JP2020116077A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To improve a way of displaying a start storage display area in a game machine.SOLUTION: In a game machine provided with a display device capable of displaying a variable display game by a plurality of pieces of identification information on the basis of satisfaction of a start condition, there are provided: start storage means capable of storing start storage to become a right to execute the variable display game on the basis of satisfaction of the start condition; and start storage display control means capable of controlling performing start storage display corresponding to the start storage to a start storage display area displayed more preferentially than the variable display game in the display device. The start storage display control means displays a start storage display background in a first display mode on the back surface of the start storage display so that it overlaps the start storage display in the start storage display area, and can switch the start storage display background to a second display mode different from the first display mode on the basis that a prescribed condition is satisfied.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 68

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine that includes a display device capable of displaying a variable display game based on a plurality of pieces of identification information and can generate a special game state advantageous to a player when the result of the variable display game is a special result. ..

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there is a gaming machine that displays a start memory display corresponding to a start memory that is a right to execute a variable display game in a start memory display area of a display device (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP, 2012-120867, A

However, the starting memory display area is displayed for a long time, and there is room for improvement in the display method.

It is an object of the present invention to improve a way of displaying a start memory display area in a game machine.

In a typical embodiment of the present invention, a display device capable of displaying a variable display game based on a plurality of pieces of identification information based on establishment of a start condition is provided, and when the result of the variable display game is a special result, a game is played. In a gaming machine capable of generating a special game state that is advantageous to a player, a start storage means capable of storing a start memory that is the right to execute the variable display game based on the satisfaction of the start condition, and the variable display game in the display device. Start memory display control means capable of executing control to display a start memory display corresponding to the start memory in a start memory display area displayed with priority over the start memory display area, wherein the start memory display control means comprises: A start memory display background is displayed in a first display mode on the back side of the start memory display so as to overlap the start memory display in the start memory display area, and the start memory display background is displayed as the first display based on the establishment of a predetermined condition. It is possible to switch to a second display mode different from the mode.

According to one embodiment of the present invention, it is possible to improve the way of displaying the starting memory display area in the gaming machine.

It is the perspective view which looked at the game machine from the front side. It is a front view of a game board. It is a figure which shows the structure of a batch display device. It is a block diagram showing a configuration example of a game control system of the gaming machine. It is the block diagram which shows the constitution example of the production control system of the game machine. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the first half part of main processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the latter half part of main processing. It is a figure showing composition of RAM of a game microcomputer of a game control device. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of an output process. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of winning a prize switch / state monitoring processing. It is the flowchart which shows the procedure of game state check processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a probability setting value change process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a probability setting value confirmation process. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of special figure game processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of starting opening switch monitoring processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of special processing starting switch common processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of special figure reservation information judgment processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the special winning opening switch monitoring processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special figure normal process. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of special figure 1 fluctuation start processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of special figure 2 fluctuation start processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of big hit flag 1 setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of big hit flag 2 setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the big hit judging processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a small hit determination process. It is a figure which illustrates the big hit probability and the small hit probability of a special figure variation display game with respect to each setting (each set value). It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of special figure 1 stop design setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of special figure 2 stop design setting processing. It is the figure which illustrates the big hit symbol distribution (big hit breakdown) of the special figure fluctuation indication game vis-a-vis each setting. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of processing during special figure change. It is the flowchart which shows the procedure of design fluctuation control processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the universal figure game processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of gate switch monitoring processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a normal figure normal process. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the first half of external information edit processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the latter half part of external information edit processing. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the batch display apparatus (1) during change of probability setting. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the batch display apparatus (2) during change of probability setting. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the batch display apparatus (3) during change of probability setting. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the batch display apparatus (4) during change of probability setting. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the batch display apparatus (5) during change of probability setting. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the batch display apparatus (6) during change of probability setting. It is a figure which shows the other structural example of a batch display device. It is a figure which shows another structure of a collective display device. It is the flowchart which shows the main processing of the production control control equipment. It is a flow chart which shows reception command check processing. It is a flow chart which shows received command analysis processing. It is a flow chart which shows single-shot system command processing. It is a flow chart which shows pre-reading symbol type command processing. It is a flow chart which shows pre-reading variable system command processing. It is the flowchart which shows the design command processing. It is a flow chart which shows variable system command processing. It is a flow chart which shows change production setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows big hit type command processing. It is a flow chart which shows stop design setting processing concerning a 2nd embodiment. It is a figure explaining the chance eye stop design mode in the chance eye pre-reading production which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example which selects the chance eye stop symbol aspect which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is a screen transition diagram (1) which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is a screen transition diagram (2) which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is a rear view of the game machine according to the third embodiment. It is a block diagram showing a configuration example of an effect control system of the gaming machine according to the third embodiment. It is a front view when the board production device of the game board according to the third embodiment operates. It is a front view when the frame production device of the glass frame which concerns on 3rd Embodiment operates. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the movable body control processing concerning a 3rd embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the timing of the initial operation control processing which concerns on 3rd Embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the timing of the initial operation control processing which concerns on the comparative example of 3rd Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of processing at the time of receiving a set value concerning a 4th embodiment. It is a table for determining the initial light emission mode of setting suggestion production of a 4th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of fanfare production setting processing concerning a 4th embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the table for determining the promotion lottery color of setting suggestion production of 4th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of ending production setting processing concerning a modification of a 4th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of processing at the time of reception of the number of out balls concerning a 4th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of RTC reading processing concerning a 4th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the count information setting processing concerning a 4th embodiment. In 4th Embodiment, it is a figure which shows an example of the display screen of a display device when it becomes a big hit. In 4th Embodiment, it is a figure which shows another example of the display screen of a display device when it is a big hit. It is a figure which shows an example of the table for determining the display mode of setting suggestion production in 4th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of hall and player setting mode processing concerning a 4th embodiment. In 4th Embodiment, it is a figure which shows an example of the display screen of a display apparatus when it is in hall setting mode. In a 4th embodiment, it is a figure showing an example of a display screen of a display when it is in a player setting mode. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the customer waiting demo setting process which concerns on 4th Embodiment. In 5th Embodiment, it is the screen transition diagram which showed the display screen of the display device in time series, and is an example of the screen transition of the whole game when the special display changing pending display of a pending digestion area changes. In 5th Embodiment, it is the screen transition diagram which showed the display screen of the display device in time series, and is an example of the screen transition of the whole game when a predetermined production|generation produces in a production display area. In 5th Embodiment, it is the screen transition diagram which showed the display screen of the display device in a time series, and another example of the screen transition of the whole game when a predetermined production|generation produces in a holding digestion area or an effect display area. Is. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the timer interruption processing concerning a 6th embodiment. It is a figure which shows the structure of the LED driver which concerns on 6th Embodiment. It is a figure which illustrates the lighting pattern of the character code (character code) and the character corresponding to it which concern on 6th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the initialization command transmitted to the LED driver concerning 6th Embodiment, and a latch. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the LED driver initial setting processing concerning a 6th embodiment. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the LED command transmitted to the LED driver concerning 6th Embodiment, and a latch. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of LED data transmission processing concerning a 6th embodiment. It is a figure which shows the detail of the cascade connection of the LED driver which concerns on the 1st modification of 6th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the detail of the state display apparatus which concerns on the 1st modification of 6th Embodiment, and FIG. 78(A) is a figure which shows the detail of the character role ratio display part which comprises a state display device and displays a character rate. FIG. 78(B) is a diagram showing the details of the discharge ball number display section for displaying the number of discharged balls and the payout rate display section for displaying the payout rate, which constitutes the state display device. It is a timing chart which shows an initial setting command sent to a driver for a winning combination according to a 1st modification of a 6th embodiment, and a driver for a ball output rate / number of discharged balls. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the initialization processing of the driver for a winning combination according to the 1st modification of a 6th embodiment, and the driver for a ball output rate / number of discharged balls. It is a timing chart which shows the LED command sent to the driver for role ratio and the driver for a ball output rate / number of discharge balls concerning a 1st modification of a 6th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of LED data transmission processing concerning the 1st modification of a 6th embodiment. It is a block diagram showing an example of composition of a game control system of a game machine concerning a 2nd modification of a 6th embodiment. It is a figure which shows the detail of the cascade connection of the LED driver which concerns on the 2nd modification of 6th Embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows the batch setting driver concerning the 2nd modification of a 6th embodiment, the driver for winning combination, and the initialization command sent to the driver for a ball output rate / number of discharge balls. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the initialization processing of the driver for a lump concerning the 2nd modification of a 6th embodiment, the driver for a winning combination, and the driver for a ball output rate / number of balls discharged. It is a timing chart which shows the LED command sent to the batch driver concerning the 2nd modification of 6th Embodiment, the driver for role ratio, and the driver for a ball output rate / number of discharge balls. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of LED data transmission processing concerning the 2nd modification of a 6th embodiment.

[First Embodiment]
Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. The front, rear, left, and right in the description of the gaming machine refer to the direction viewed by the player who is playing the game.

[Overall view of gaming machines]
FIG. 1 is a diagram illustrating a game machine.

The gaming machine 10 includes an opening/closing frame attached to a frame 11 fixed to the island facility so as to be openable/closable via a hinge. The open/close frame includes a front frame 12 (main body frame) and a glass frame 15.

A game board 30 (see FIG. 2) is arranged on the front surface frame 12, and a glass frame 15 having a cover glass 14 for covering the front surface of the game board 30 is attached. The cover glass 14 functions as a game visual recognition area that allows the game area 32 (see FIG. 2) formed on the game board 30 to be visually recognized.

The front frame 12 and the glass frame 15 can be individually opened. For example, the game area 32 of the game board 30 can be accessed by opening only the glass frame 15. Further, by opening the front frame 12 in a state where the glass frame 15 is not opened, it is possible to access the game control device (main board) 100 (see FIG. 7) and the like arranged on the back surface side of the game board 30. You can

Various frame components are arranged on the edge of the glass frame 15 around the cover glass 14.

On the upper center and the left side of the glass frame 15, a decoration device 1 capable of producing a light emission according to a game state.
8a and 18b are provided. The decoration devices 18a and 18b house illumination members such as LEDs inside and perform a light-emission effect according to the gaming state. The illumination member arranged inside these decoration devices 18a and 18b constitutes a part of the frame decoration device 18 (see FIG. 4).

Upper speakers 19a are arranged at the upper right corner and the upper left corner of the glass frame 15, respectively. In addition to these upper speakers 19a, two lower speakers 19b are provided in the lower part of the gaming machine 10. The lower speaker 19b is arranged in the lower left corner of the glass frame 15 and the lower right corner of the front frame 12. The upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b emit a sound effect, an alarm sound, a notification sound, and the like.

On the right side of the glass frame 15, a projecting effect unit 13 that extends in the vertical direction of the gaming machine 10 and projects toward the front (player side) is provided. Projection production unit 1
Reference numeral 3 is a production device that produces a light emission production or the like according to the progress of the game. Projection production unit 13
The lighting member disposed inside the frame also constitutes a part of the frame decoration device 18 (see FIG. 4).

An upper plate unit having an upper plate 21 capable of storing game balls is attached to the lower portion of the glass frame 15. The upper plate 21 is formed in a box shape having an open top surface. The game balls stored in the upper plate 21 are supplied to a ball launching device (not shown) one by one.

The upper plate unit further includes an effect operation device that accepts an input operation from a player, a ball lending operation device that accepts an input operation from the player, and a decoration device 22 that performs a light emission effect or the like according to a game state. ..

The production operation device is an operation device in which a touch panel 25b is incorporated in the production button 25,
It is provided at the center of the upper part of the upper plate unit so that the player can easily operate it.

When the player operates the effect operation device, it is possible to perform an effect in which the operation of the player is intervened in the special figure variation display game displayed on the display device 41 (see FIG. 2 ). For example, it is possible to select an effect pattern (effect mode) or execute a notice effect that gives advance notice of the result of the variable display game corresponding to the starting memory. Note that the variable display game includes a special figure variable display game, and when it is simply referred to as a variable display game, this specification refers to the special figure variable display game.

Further, the effect pattern may be changed not only during execution of the variable display game but also by the player operating the effect operation device during non-execution.

The gaming state when the variable display game is executed is composed of a plurality of gaming states. The normal gaming state (normal state) is a gaming state in which no special gaming state has occurred. Further, the special gaming state is, for example, a state where the probability of occurrence of a special result (for example, a big hit) is high in the time saving state as a specific game state or a variable display game (probably changed state, probability changing state), big hit state (
It is a special game state) and a small hit game state (small hit state).

Here, the probability variation state (specific game state) is one that continues until the next big hit (loop type), one that continues until a variable display game is executed a predetermined number of times (multi-turn type, ST), and There are those that continue until a predetermined probability falling lottery is won (falling lottery type).

Furthermore, without determining whether or not to generate a probability variation state by a big hit symbol random number, it is possible to always generate a probability variation state when a big hit occurs, or to provide a winning device or the like with a specific area to specify. The probability change state may be generated when the game ball passes through the area.

The ball lending operation device is an operation device operated by a player when borrowing a game ball, and is provided on the upper right side of the upper plate unit. The ball lending operation device has a ball lending button 27 and a return button 28.
And a balance display unit 26. The ball lending button 27 is a button operated by the player when renting a game ball, and the return button 28 is for ejecting a prepaid card or the like from a card unit (not shown) arranged adjacent to the gaming machine 10. It is a button operated by the player. The balance display unit 26 is a display area in which the balance of a prepaid card or the like is displayed.

The decoration device 22 accommodates a lighting member such as an LED inside and is a device for performing a light emission effect or the like according to a game state, and is provided in a front portion of the upper plate unit. The lighting member arranged inside the decoration device 22 constitutes a part of the frame decoration device 18 (see FIG. 4 ).

Below the glass frame 15 including the above-mentioned upper plate unit and the like, in the lower part of the front frame 12, an operation handle 24 for controlling the operation of a ball launching device (not shown) and a game ball can be stored. The lower plate 23 is provided.

The operation handle 24 is arranged on the lower right side of the front frame 12 and below the lower speaker 19b on the right side. When the player turns the operation handle 24, the ball launching device launches the game ball supplied from the upper plate 21 to the game area 32 of the game board 30. The launch speed of the game ball launched from the ball launch device is set to increase as the amount of rotational operation of the operation handle 24 increases. That is, the ball launching device is the force (speed) at which the game ball is launched into the game area.
It is possible to change the launch force corresponding to the operation of the operation handle 24 by the player, and to launch the game ball in various launch modes with different launch forces. The launch mode includes left hitting (normal hitting) in which the game ball flows down on the left side of the game area 32 and right hitting in which the game ball falls down on the right side of the game area 32.

The lower plate 23 is arranged below the upper plate unit at a predetermined distance from the upper plate unit. The lower plate 23 has a ball removal hole 23a that vertically penetrates the bottom surface of the lower plate 23, and an opening/closing operation portion 23b for opening and closing the ball removal hole 23a. When the player operates the opening/closing operation portion 23b to open the ball removing hole 23a, the game balls stored in the lower plate 23 can be discharged to the outside through the ball removing hole 23a.

[Game board]
Subsequently, the game board 30 of the game machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. 2A. FIG. 2A is a front view of the game board 30 provided in the game machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 2A, the game board 30 includes a flat board-shaped game board body 30a that serves as a mounting base for various members. The game board body 30a is made of wood or synthetic resin, and the game board body 30 is
A game area 32 surrounded by a guide rail 31 is provided on the front surface of a. The gaming machine 10 is configured to shoot a game ball from a ball launching device in a game area 32 surrounded by a guide rail 31 to play a game. In the game area 32, windmills, obstacle nails and the like are arranged as members for converting the flow direction of the game ball, and the launched game ball flows down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by these members.

A center case (front structure) 40 that forms a window that serves as a display area of the variable display game is attached to the approximate center of the game area 32. Behind the window formed in the center case 40, a production display device (variable display device) that variably displays (variably displays) a plurality of pieces of identification information.
The display device 41 is arranged. The display device 41 includes, for example, a liquid crystal display, and is arranged so that the display content can be viewed from the front side of the game board 30 through the window of the center case 40. The display device 41 is not limited to one having a liquid crystal display, and may be one having a display such as an EL or CRT.

The display screen (display unit) of the display device 41 is provided with a plurality of variable display areas, and in each variable display area, identification information (special symbols) and a character that produces a variable display game are displayed. In addition, images (big hit display, fanfare display, ending display, etc.) based on the progress of the game are displayed on the display screen.

Also, in the center case 40, a game ball flowing down the game area 32 is placed in the center case 40.
An inflow port 40a to the warp passage 40e for guiding the inside of the, and a stage portion 40b capable of rolling the game ball passing through the warp passage 40e are provided. Since the stage portion 40b of the center case 40 is arranged above the starting winning opening 36 and the normal variation winning device 37,
The game ball rolled on the stage portion 40b is easy to win in the starting winning opening 36 or the normal variation winning device 37.

An upper effect unit 40c and a side effect unit 40d are provided on the upper and right sides of the center case 40, respectively. Upper production unit 40c and side production unit 40d
Constitutes part of the board decoration device 46 (see FIG. 4) and the board effect device 44 (see FIG. 4).

In the game area 32 on the right side of the center case 40, a normal symbol starting gate (universal figure starting gate) 34 is provided. Inside the universal figure starting gate 34, a gate switch (SW) 34a (see FIG. 3) for detecting a game ball that has passed through the universal figure starting gate 34 is provided. When the game ball hit in the game area 32 passes through the universal figure starting gate 34, the universal figure variation display game is executed.

The general winning opening 35 is arranged in the lower left gaming area 32 of the center case 40, and the general winning opening 35 is also arranged in the lower right gaming area 32 of the center case 40. The winning of the game ball into these general winning openings 35 is achieved by a winning opening switch (SW) provided in the general winning openings 35.
) 35a-35n (see FIG. 3).

In the game area 32 below the center case 40, there is provided a starting winning opening (first starting winning area) 36 for giving a start condition of the special figure variation display game, and a second starting winning opening (second An ordinary variable winning device 37 having a starting winning area) is provided. The normal variation winning device 37 includes a movable member (movable piece) 37b that is rotated in a direction in which the upper end side is tilted toward the front side to convert the gaming ball into a state in which the game ball easily flows. When the movable member 37b is in the closed state, the game ball cannot normally win the variable winning device 37. When the game ball wins the starting winning opening 36 or the normal variation winning device 37, the special figure variation display game is executed as an auxiliary game.

The movable member 37b is a so-called toro-type ordinary electric accessory, and is rotated via the universal electric solenoid 37c (see FIG. 3) when the result of the universal figure changing display game is a predetermined stop display mode. The game ball is opened to change to the open state (the winning easy state advantageous for the player) in which the game ball is easily flown into the normal variation winning device 37.

The movable member 37b is controlled by the game control device 100 described later. The game control device 100 increases the frequency of occurrence of the easy prize winning state by shortening the variation time of the universal figure variation display game or setting the hit probability of the universal figure variation display game to a higher probability than usual, or the normal game state. By increasing the generation time of the prize winning easy state than the prize winning easy state generated in, the time saving state (universal power support state) is generated as the specific game state. Note that the probability change state (
Even when the latent latency change state is excluded), a time saving state (universal power support state) occurs in duplicate.

In the game area 32 on the lower right of the normal variation winning device 37, the special winning opening solenoid (39b) (
(See FIG. 3), a special variation winning device 39 having an attacker-type opening/closing door 39c that opens the big winning opening by rotating in the direction in which the upper end side falls to the front side is provided. The special variation winning device 39 converts the state in which the special winning opening is closed (a closed state that is disadvantageous to the player) to an open state (a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player) according to the result of the special figure variation display game, and wins a big prize. By facilitating the inflow of the game ball into the mouth, a predetermined game value (prize ball) is given to the player. In addition, inside the special winning opening, a count switch 39a (see FIG. 3) is arranged as a detecting means for detecting a game ball that has entered the special winning opening. In addition, inside the special winning opening of the special variation winning device 39 or in the vicinity of the special winning opening (around the special winning opening), the special winning opening is illuminated 1
One or a plurality of special winning opening LEDs 39d (full color LEDs) are arranged.

General winning a prize mouth 35, starting winning a prize mouth 36, normal fluctuation winning a prize device 37, and special fluctuation winning a prize device 39
When a game ball is won in the special winning opening, the payout control device 200 (see FIG. 3) discharges the number of prize balls corresponding to the type of the winning opening from the payout device to the upper plate 21. In addition, the regular variable winning device 3
In the game area 32 below 7, there is an outlet 30 for collecting game balls that have not won a prize.
b is provided.

Further, outside the game area 32 and in the lower right corner of the game board body 30a, a special figure variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game, special figure 2 variation display game) and a general figure variation display game are executed. A collective display device 50 is provided. The collective display device 50 includes display units 51 to 60 that display information such as the current game state (see FIG. 2B).

FIG. 2B is a diagram showing the configuration of the collective display device 50. The collective display device 50 is a first special view variable display unit 5 for a variable display game, which includes a 7-segment type display (LED lamp) or the like.
1 (special figure 1 indicator, lamp D1) and second special figure fluctuation display section 52 (special figure 2 indicator, lamp D)
2) and the variable display section 53 for the universal figure variation display game (general figure indicator, lamps D8, D10, D
18) and a memory display unit (special figure 1 hold indicator 54, special figure 2 hold indicator 55, general figure hold indicator 56) for informing the number of starting (holding) memories of each variable display game. ing. The special figure 1 hold indicator 54 is composed of lamps D11 and D12. Special Figure 2 Hold indicator 55 is the lamp D
13 and D14. The universal figure hold indicator 56 is composed of lamps D15 and D16.

In addition, the collective display device 50, the first game state display unit 57 (first game state indicator, lamp) for notifying that it is right-handed (when right-handed) or left-handed (normal) D7),
The second gaming state display unit 58 (second gaming state indicator, lamp D17) that lights up when the time saving state occurs and notifies the occurrence of the time saving state, the probability state of big hit when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on becomes a high probability state. The third game status display section 59 (third game status display, probability status display section, lamp D9) that indicates that the round display at the time of a big hit (the number of times of opening and closing the special variation winning device 39) The section 60 (lamps D3 to D6) is provided.

In the special figure 1 display device 51 and the special figure 2 display device 52, the variable display game is executed by a variable display in which identification information (for example, a central segment) is repeatedly turned on and off (blinking). In addition, the special figure 1 display device 51 and the special figure 2 display device 52 are not limited to such a segment type display unit,
It may be configured by a group of a plurality of LEDs, and when performing variable display, all LEDs provided as indicators are all turned on and off (all LEDs are blinked at the same time) and cyclically turned on (either one). One LED may be turned on and off in a predetermined order at predetermined time intervals), or a predetermined number of LEDs among a plurality of LEDs may be turned on/off (blinking) or cyclic lighting. Also on the public figure display device 53, the variable display game is executed by a variable display (blinking) in which the lamps D10 and D18 are repeatedly turned on and off. In addition, the public figure indicator 53 is also the special figure 1 indicator 5
1, the special figure 2 display 52 can be configured as appropriate.

The lamp display device 80 is a lamp display unit 1 or 2 (LED) that executes variable display (blinking) that repeats lighting display and extinguishing display as a symbol (a fourth special symbol described later), and the start of each special symbol variable display game. (Hold) It has a lamp display unit 3-6 (LED) for notifying the number of stored memories. The lamp display device 80 is controlled by the effect control device 300 (described later).

The lamp display sections 1 and 2 blink as a variable display at a predetermined blinking cycle (for example, 200 msec (millisecond)). While the variation time of the variation display in the special figure 1 display 51, the special figure 2 display 52, and the general figure display 53 of the collective display device 50 is measured by the game control device 100, the lamp of the lamp display device 80 The variation time of the display units 1 and 2 is measured by the effect control device 300 (described later).

The lamp display units 3 and 4 (special figure 1 holding LED 1, special figure 1 holding LED 2) display the special figure 1 holding number (first starting memory number) by a combination of the off state, the lighting state, and the blinking state. Similarly, the lamp display units 5 and 6 (special figure 2 holding LED 1, special figure 2 holding LED 2) display the special figure 2 holding number (second starting memory number) by a combination of the off state, the lighting state, and the blinking state. To do. The lamp display unit 3-6 finishes displaying the number of holdings when a big hit occurs, but displays the number of holdings when the jackpot state is not in effect (including a case where a reach described later is occurring on the display device 41). To do.

Next, the flow of the game in the gaming machine 10, details of the normal figure variation display game and the special figure variation display game will be described.

In the gaming machine 10, a game is played by launching a game ball from a ball launching device (not shown) toward the game area 32. The launched game ball flows down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by obstacle nails, windmills, etc. arranged at various places in the game area 32, and the universal figure starting gate 34, general winning opening 35, starting winning opening 36, the normal variation winning device 37, or the special variation winning device 39, or flows into the outlet 30b provided at the bottom of the game area 32 and is discharged from the game area 32. When a game ball is won in the general winning opening 35, the starting winning opening 36, the normal variation winning device 37, or the special variation winning device 39, the number of prize balls corresponding to the type of the winning opening is paid out through the payout device. It is discharged to the upper plate 21.

The universal figure starting gate 34 is provided with a gate switch 34a (see FIG. 3) for detecting a game ball that has passed through the universal figure starting gate 34. When the game ball passes through the universal figure starting gate 34, it is detected by the gate switch 34a, and the universal figure variation display game is executed based on the determination result of the random number value for collision determination extracted at this time.

The state in which the general figure fluctuation display game cannot be started, for example, when the general figure fluctuation display game has already been played and the general figure fluctuation display game has not ended, or the result of the general figure fluctuation display game is a win When the game ball passes through the universal figure starting gate 34 when the variable winning device 37 is converted to the open state, if the universal figure starting memory number is less than the upper limit number, the memory number is added (+1).

In the universal figure starting memory, a random number value for hit determination for determining the hit/miss of the universal figure variation display game is stored. When the random number value for hit determination coincides with the determination value, the universal figure variation display is displayed. The game wins and a specific result mode (specific result) is derived.

The general figure fluctuation display game is executed by the general figure display 53 provided in the collective display device 50. The ordinary figure display 53 is composed of LEDs that indicate a hit when the normal identification information (universal figure) is in a lighted state, and indicates a deviation when the light is in a non-illuminated state. The result is displayed by turning on or off the LED after a predetermined variable display time has elapsed.

When the universal figure random number value extracted at the time of passing the universal figure starting gate 34 is a winning value, the ordinary symbol displayed on the universal figure display 53 is stopped in the hit state and is in the hit state. At this time, the movable member 37b is converted into an open state for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 seconds) by driving the universal solenoid 37c (see FIG. 3), and the game ball to the normal variation winning device 37 is changed. Winnings are allowed.

The winning of the game ball to the starting winning opening 36 and the winning of the normal variation winning device 37 are detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 3) and the starting opening 2 switch 37a (see FIG. 3).
The game ball that has won the starting winning opening 36 is detected as the starting winning ball of the special figure 1 variable display game,
In addition to being stored with a predetermined upper limit number, the game balls that have won the normal variable prize device 37 are detected as starting winning balls of the special figure 2 variable display game, and are stored with a predetermined upper limit number.

At the time of detecting the start winning prize ball of the special figure variation display game, a big hit random number value, a big hit symbol random value, each variation pattern random value, etc. are extracted. These random number values are stored in a special figure reservation storage area (a part of RAM) of the game control device 100 as special figure starting prize winning memories, each for a predetermined number of times (for example, a maximum of eight times). The number of the special figure start winning prize memory is displayed on the special figure 1 hold indicator 54 and the special figure 2 hold indicator 55 for informing the start prize number of the collective display device 50, and the display device 4 is also displayed.
It is also displayed on the display screen of 1.

The game control device 100 executes the special figure 1 variable display game on the special figure 1 display 51 based on the winning in the starting winning opening 36 or the first starting memory. In addition, the game control device 100, the special figure 2 display 52 special figure 2 based on the winning or the second start memory to the normal variation winning device 37.
Run the floating display game.

In the special figure 1 variable display game (first special figure variable display game) and the special figure 2 variable display game (second special figure variable display game), identification information ( It is performed by displaying the predetermined result mode in a stopped manner after the variable display of the special symbol and the special symbol). Also,
On the display device 41, a decorative special figure variable display game in which a plurality of types of identification information (for example, numbers, symbols, character patterns, etc.) are displayed in a variable manner corresponding to each special figure variable display game is executed.

The decorative special figure variable display game in the display device 41, the decorative special symbol (identification information) composed of the above-mentioned numbers etc. is left (first special symbol), right (second special symbol), middle (third special symbol) ) Is started in a variable display (scroll display) in order, and the symbols that are changing after a predetermined time are sequentially stopped, and the result of the special figure variable display game is displayed. Further, on the display device 41, various effect displays such as the appearance of characters are performed in order to improve the interest. Furthermore, in the decorative special figure variation display game, as another decorative special symbol (identification information), in the lamp display units 1 and 2 of the lamp display device 80, the fourth special symbol is repeated (flashing) by repeatedly displaying the light and the light off. fluctuate. The variable display of the lamp display sections 1 and 2 is stopped after a predetermined time from the start when the lamp is off, when the lamp is off, and when the jackpot is a big hit or a small hit, it is turned on.

When the winning of the game ball to the starting winning opening 36 or the normal variation winning device 37 is made at a predetermined timing (when the big hit random number value at the time of winning detection is the big hit value), as a result of the special figure variation display game. A specific result mode (special result mode) is derived from the display pattern, and the big hit state (
It becomes a special game state). Correspondingly, the display mode of the display device 41 becomes a special result mode (for example, a state where numbers such as “7, 7, 7” are aligned).

At this time, in the special variation winning device 39, by energizing the special winning opening solenoid (39b) (see FIG. 3), the special winning opening is converted from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). That is, the special winning opening provided in the special variation winning device 39 is wide open for a predetermined time or until a predetermined number of game balls are won, and during this time, the player is given the privilege of being able to obtain many game balls. It

When the winning of the game ball to the first starting winning opening 36 or the normal variation winning device 37 is made at a predetermined timing (when the big hit random number value at the time of winning detection is the small hit value), the special figure variation display game As a result, the specific result mode (small hit result mode) is derived from the display symbol, and the small hit state is set. Correspondingly, the display mode of the display device 41 becomes the small hit result mode. In the present embodiment, the big hit random number value is also used for the small hit judgment, but the small hit value (small hit judgment value) is different from the big hit value (big hit judgment value).

At this time, in the special variation winning device 39, by energizing the special winning opening solenoid 39b (see FIG. 3), the special winning opening is converted from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined short time. In addition, the total opening time of the special winning opening is shorter in the small hit state (small hit game state) than in the big hit state (special game state), so in the small hit state, the player can obtain a game more than in the big hit state. Value (number of balls acquired)
Less is. In both the small hit state and the big hit state, the special winning opening is open, but the big hit state may be called a first special game state and the small hit state may be called a second special game state.

Here, the difference between the big hit and the small hit will be described.

A big hit is a special result with the operation of the condition device, and a small hit is a specific result without the operation of the condition device. The condition device operates when a big hit occurs in the special figure variation display game (stop display of the big hit symbol). When the condition device operates, for example, a big hit state occurs and a special electric role as a special electric accessory. This means that a specific flag for continuously operating the variable winning device 39 is set. The condition device not operating means that the above-described specific flag is not set as in the case of winning the small hit lottery, for example. The "condition device" may be software means such as a flag that is turned on and off by software as described above, or hardware means such as a switch that is turned on and off electrically. Further, the "conditional device" is a term that is generally used in the field of pachinko gaming machines as a device whose operation is a necessary condition for continuous operation of the electric accessory, and the same applies in this specification. It is used as a term having the meaning of.

Specifically, in the case of a big hit, the special variation winning device is opened by setting the big hit flag, whereas in the case of a small hit, the special variation winning device is set by setting the small hit flag. Is released.

Note that the special figure 1 display device 51 and the special figure 2 display device 52 may be configured as separate display devices or the same display device, but the special figure variation display games are not executed at the same time. Is set as follows.

Regarding the decorative special figure variable display game on the display device 41, the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game may be executed on different display devices or different display areas, or the same display may be performed. It may be executed in the device or the display area. In this case, the decorative special figure variable display games corresponding to the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are not executed at the same time. The special figure 2 variable display game is designed to be executed with priority over the special figure 1 variable display game, and there is a starting memory for the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game. When it becomes possible to execute the figure variable display game, the special figure 2 variable display game is executed.

In the following description, when the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as a special figure variable display game.

Further, although not particularly limited, the starting port 1 switch 36 in the starting winning port 36
a, the starting opening 2 switch 37a, the gate switch 34a, the winning opening switch 35a, and the count switch (39a) in the normal variation winning device 37 are provided with a coil for magnetic detection, and the magnetic field changes when a metal approaches the coil. A non-contact magnetic proximity sensor (hereinafter referred to as a proximity switch) that detects a game ball by utilizing a phenomenon is used. Further, the glass frame open detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 of the gaming machine 10 or the front frame open detection switch 64 (main frame open detection switch) provided on the front frame (game frame) 12 is a machine Microswitches with specific contacts can be used.

[Game control device]
FIG. 3 is a block diagram of a game control system of the gaming machine 10. The game machine 10 is a game control device 10
0 (main board), the game control device 100 is a main control device (main board) which controls the game in a centralized manner, and a CPU section having a game microcomputer (hereinafter, referred to as a game microcomputer) 111. 110, an input unit 120 having an input port, an output unit 130 having an output port and a driver, a data bus 140 connecting the CPU unit 110, the input unit 120, and the output unit 130.

The CPU section 110 is a game microcomputer (CP) called an amusement chip (IC).
U) 111, an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator, and an oscillation circuit (crystal oscillator) 113 for generating a CPU operation clock, a timer interrupt, and a reference clock for a random number generation circuit. DC32V, DC12V, DC5 generated by the power supply device 400 are included in the game control device 100 and electronic components such as solenoids and motors driven by the game control device 100.
A DC voltage of a predetermined level such as V is supplied to enable operation.

The power supply device 400 includes a normal power supply unit 410 having an ACDC converter that generates a DC voltage of 32V DC from an AC power supply of 24V and a DC-DC converter that generates a DC voltage of a lower level such as DC 12V and DC 5V from a voltage of 32V DC. , Game microcomputer 11
1 has a backup power supply unit 420 for supplying a power supply voltage to the internal RAM and a power failure monitoring circuit, and control signals such as a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal for notifying the occurrence and recovery of the power failure to the game control device 100 And a control signal generation unit 430 that generates and outputs.

In the present embodiment, the power supply device 400 is configured separately from the game control device 100,
The backup power supply section 420 and the control signal generation section 430 may be provided on separate boards or integrated with the game control device 100, that is, on the main board. Since the game board 30 and the game control device 100 are subject to replacement when the model is changed, the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 43 are provided on a board different from the power supply apparatus 400 or the main board as in the embodiment.
By providing 0, the cost can be reduced by removing it from the replacement target.

The backup power supply unit 420 can be composed of one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power supply is the game microcomputer 111 (of the game control device 100).
In particular, the data stored in the RAM is retained even after being supplied to the built-in RAM) and during a power failure or after the power is cut off. The control signal generation unit 430, for example, monitors the voltage of 32 V generated by the normal power supply unit 410, detects the occurrence of a power failure when the voltage drops to 17 V or less, changes the power failure monitoring signal, and resets the reset signal after a predetermined time. Is output. Further, even when the power is turned on or the power is restored, a reset signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed from that point.

Further, the game control device 100 (main board) is set by a turning operation of the operator or the like to be turned on, and a setting key switch 93 for setting a set value relating to a game condition (game) to be changeable, and an operation of the operator. Set value change switch 102 capable of changing the set value related to the game condition
And In the present embodiment, the setting value related to the game condition (game) is the probability setting value of the big hit probability, but other game conditions other than the big hit probability (such as the small hit probability and the probability variation plunge rate) also depend on the probability setting value. It can be changed. The setting key switch 93 and the setting value change switch 102 are
A setting changing unit (setting changing device 42) capable of changing the setting (setting value) relating to the game condition is configured. In the present embodiment, the touch switch signal of the touch switch provided on the operation handle 24 is used as the confirmation signal for confirming the set value, but an operable confirmation button switch (operation means, operation unit) is used. It may be provided in the game control device 100, and the signal from the confirmation button switch may be used as a confirmation signal for confirming the set value.

The setting key switch 93 and the setting value change switch 102 are provided on the game control device 100 inside the gaming machine 10 so that the setting key switch 93 and the setting value change switch 102 are arranged at a position where they cannot be operated (a position where they cannot be accessed) unless the front frame 12 (main body frame) is opened. To be done. That is, a general player cannot access and operate the setting key switch 93 and the setting value changing switch 102. In the present embodiment, the setting key switch 93 and the setting value change switch 102 are provided so as to be assembled on the game control device 100, but the front frame 1 such as on the power supply board of the power supply device 400.
It may be provided at a position where it cannot be accessed unless 2 (main body frame) is opened.

When the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on, the front frame 12 (main body frame) is opened and the setting key switch 9
When 3 is turned on, the operator sets the setting value change switch 102 (setting value change button).
By operating the, it is possible to change the setting (setting value) related to the game conditions such as the probability of a big hit and the probability of sudden change. That is, when the power is turned on, the state in which the front frame 12 is opened and the setting key switch 93 is turned on is the setting variable state in which the setting (setting value) can be changed. In a normal procedure, when the operator opens the front frame 12 and rotationally operates the setting key switch 93 to turn it on to turn on the power, a setting variable state corresponding to a setting changing state is set. The variable setting state may be notified by a voice from a speaker. It should be noted that when the power is turned on, the state in which the glass frame 15 is opened and the setting key switch 93 is turned on may be a variable setting state, or both the front frame 12 and the glass frame 15 are opened and the setting key switch 93 is turned on. The state may be a variable setting state

In the present embodiment, the setting values relating to the game conditions are defined in 6 stages, and the setting value 1 (setting 1), the setting value 2 (setting 2), the setting value 3 (setting 3), the setting value 4 (setting 4), There are setting value 5 (setting 5) and setting value 6 (setting 6). The setting value 1 is the most unfavorable setting for the player, and the setting value 6
Is the most advantageous setting for the player. Setting values 1 and 2 are low settings, setting values 3 and 4 are intermediate settings (intermediate settings), and setting values 5 and 6 are high settings.

In the set value change processing, the operator sets the set value change switch 102 (set value change button).
Each time is operated, the set value (setting) is changed as follows: set value 1→set value 2→set value 3→set value 4→set value 5→set value 6→set value 1→set value 2→... Change to and select. The setting value may be changed by rotating the setting key switch 93 to a predetermined position instead of operating the setting value changing button. The set value is not limited to 6 levels. Then, the selected setting values 1 to 6 are displayed on the probability setting value display device 143 or the like which is a 7-segment type display. Note that the probability set value display device 143 uses the electric circuit to set the set value change switch 102.
The display may be changed by directly interlocking with the operation of. As will be described later, by displaying the selected setting values of 1 to 6 on the first special figure fluctuation display section 51 and/or the second special figure fluctuation display section 52 for the variable display game of the collective display device 50. Good.

When the operator touches the operation handle 24, a touch switch signal is sent to the game control device 1
When it is input to 00, the selected (changed) setting value (that is, setting) is confirmed and stored in the probability setting value area in the RWM (storage means), and the setting value changing process ends. Note that, regardless of the touch switch signal, when the setting key switch 93 is turned off after changing the setting value or when a predetermined time has elapsed after the setting variable state, the game control device 100 confirms and stores the setting value (that is, setting). It is also possible to configure.

On the other hand, after turning on the power of the gaming machine 10, when the front frame 12 (main body frame) is opened and the setting key switch 93 is rotationally operated to change from the off state to the on state, the set value confirmation mode (setting confirmation state)
become. In the set value confirmation mode, the set value displayed on the probability set value display device 143 can be confirmed. The selected 1 to 6 setting values may be displayed and confirmed on the first special figure fluctuation display section 51 and/or the second special figure fluctuation display section 52 for the variable display game of the collective display device 50. .. The set value confirmation mode (setting confirmation state) may be notified by voice from a speaker.

The set value change switch 102 (set value change button) is a RAM initialization switch (RA
It can also be used as an M clear switch), and an initialization switch signal is generated if the initialization switch is in the ON state when the power is turned on (power restoration), and based on this, the gaming microcomputer 11
A process of forcibly initializing the information stored in the RAM 111c in 1 and the RAM in the payout control device 200 is performed. Although not particularly limited, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by the gaming microcomputer 111. The reset signal is a kind of forced interrupt signal and resets the entire control system.

The gaming microcomputer 111 is a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111a.
, Read-only ROM (read only memory) 111b and RA that can be read and written at any time
An M (random access memory) 111c is provided.

The ROM 111b stores invariant information (programs, fixed data, judgment values of various random numbers, etc.) for game control in a nonvolatile manner, and the RAM 111c stores a work area of the CPU 111a and a storage area of various signals and random number values at the time of game control. Used as. ROM111b or RAM11
As 1c, an electrically rewritable non-volatile memory such as an EEPROM may be used.

Further, the ROM 111b stores, for example, a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines the execution time of the special figure variation display game, the effect contents, the presence or absence of the reach state, and the like. The fluctuation pattern table is a table for the CPU 111a to refer to the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 stored as start-up memory to determine the fluctuation pattern. Further, the variation pattern table includes a deviation variation pattern table selected when the result is a loss, a big hit variation pattern table selected when the result is a big hit, and the like. Further, in these pattern tables, there are tables for determining the latter half variation pattern which is the variation pattern after reaching the reach state (the latter half variation group table, the latter half variation pattern selection table, etc.), and the variation before the reach state. A table (first half variation group table, first half variation pattern selection table, etc.) for determining a first half variation pattern that is a pattern is included.

Here, the reach (reach state) has a display device whose display state can be changed, and the display device derives and displays a plurality of display results at different times, and the plurality of display results are predetermined. In the special result mode, the game state is advantageous for the player (special game state)
In the gaming machine 10 that becomes, at the stage where some of the plurality of display results are not derived and displayed yet,
A display state in which the display result that has already been derived and displayed satisfies the condition of the special result mode. In other words, the reach state is out of the display condition that is the special result mode even when the variable display control of the display device progresses to reach the stage before the display result is derived and displayed. It refers to a display mode that does not exist. Then, for example, the reach state includes a state in which the variable display is performed by the plurality of variable display areas while maintaining the state in which the special result mode is uniform (so-called full rotation reach). Further, the reach state is a display state at the time when the display control of the display device progresses to reach the stage before the display result is derived and displayed, and is determined before the display result is derived and displayed. The display state in the case where at least a part of the display results of the plurality of variable display areas satisfying the condition satisfies the special result mode.

Therefore, for example, the decorative special figure variation display game displayed on the display device corresponding to the special figure variation display game varies a plurality of pieces of identification information for a predetermined time in each of the left, middle and right variation display areas of the display device. After displaying, if the result mode is displayed by stopping the variable display in the order of left, right, and middle, in the left and right variable display areas, the condition that satisfies the special result mode (for example, The state in which the variable display is stopped by the same identification information) is the reach state. In addition, at the time when the variable display of all variable display areas is temporarily stopped, the condition that the special result mode is satisfied in any two variable display areas of left, middle, and right (for example, the same identification information May be set as the reach state, and the remaining one variable display area may be variably displayed from the reach state.

Then, the reach state includes a plurality of reach effects, and a normal reach (as a system of reach effects) in which the possibility of deriving a special result mode (big hit mode) is different (expected value is different)
N Reach, Special 1 Reach (SP1 Reach), Special 2 Reach (SP2 Reach), Special 3 Reach (SP3 Reach), and Premier Reach are set. It should be noted that the expectation level (expected value) of the jackpot increases in the order of no reach <normal reach <special 1 reach <special 2 reach <special 3 reach <premier reach.
In addition, the reach state is at least when the special result mode is derived in the special figure variation display game (
It is included in the variable display mode in the case of a big hit). That is, it may be included in the variable display mode in the case where it is determined that the special result mode is not derived in the special figure variable display game (when it is out of sync). Therefore, the state in which the reach state has occurred is a state in which there is a high possibility of a big hit compared to the case where the reach state does not occur.

The CPU 111a executes a game control program in the ROM 111b to generate a control signal (command) for the payout control device 200 or the effect control device 300, or generate and output a drive signal for a solenoid or a display device to output the game machine. Control of the whole 10 is performed. Although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 111 is a big hit random number for determining the big hit random number in the special figure variation display game, a big hit symbol random number for determining the big hit symbol, and a small hit for determining the small hit symbol. Random pattern generation circuit for generating random numbers for patterns, fluctuation patterns in special figure variable display games (including execution time of variable display games in various reach and variable display without reach) A clock generator that generates a clock that gives a timer interrupt signal of a predetermined cycle (for example, 4 msec (milliseconds)) to the CPU 111a or an update timing of the random number generation circuit based on an oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113. ing.

Further, the CPU 111a executes the ROM 111b in the processing related to the special figure variation display game.
One of the plurality of fluctuation pattern tables stored in is acquired. Specifically, the CPU 111a causes the special figure change display game to have a game result (big hit or miss), the special figure change display game as the current game state, the probability state (normal probability state or high probability state), and the number of starting memories. Based on the above, any one of the fluctuation pattern tables is selected and acquired from the plurality of fluctuation pattern tables. Here, the CPU 11
The reference numeral 1a constitutes a fluctuation distribution information acquisition means for acquiring one of the plurality of fluctuation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111b when executing the special figure fluctuation display game.

The payout control device 200 includes a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, an input interface, an output interface, and the like, and drives a payout motor 91 of the payout unit according to a prize ball payout command (command or data) from the game control device 100 to win a prize ball. Control for paying out.
Further, the payout control device 200 drives the payout motor 91 of the payout unit based on the ball rental request signal from the card unit 600 to perform control for paying out the ball.

The input unit 120 of the gaming microcomputer 111 has a radio wave sensor 62 (a board radio wave sensor) for detecting the emission of radio waves to the gaming machine, a gate switch 34a of the universal figure starting gate 34, and a starting opening 1 in the first starting winning opening 36. Switch 36a, start opening 2 switch 37a in second start winning opening 37
, Winning a prize switch 35a, is connected to the special winning a prize device 39 large winning a prize switch 39a,
An interface chip (proximity I) that receives a negative logic signal such as a high level of 11V and a low level of 7V supplied from these switches and converts the signal into a positive logic signal of 0V-5V.
/F) 121 is provided.

The output of the proximity I/F 121 is supplied to the second input port 123 or the third input port 124 and read by the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. The proximity I/F1
Among the outputs of 21, the detection signals of the gate switch 34a, the starting opening 1 switch 36a, the starting opening 2 switch 37a, the winning opening switch 35a, and the special winning opening switch 39a are the third input port 1
24 is input.

Further, among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, the detection signal of the radio wave sensor 62 and the abnormality detection signal output when the abnormality of the sensor or the switch is detected are input to the second input port 123.

Further, the second input port 123, the detection signal of the magnetic sensor switch 61 for fraud detection provided on the front frame 12 of the gaming machine 10, the glass frame open detection provided on the glass frame 15 of the gaming machine 10, etc. Signals are input from the switch 63, the front frame open detection switch 64 (main frame open detection switch) provided on the front frame 12 (main frame) and the like. Note that a vibration sensor switch for detecting vibration may be provided in the game machine and the detection signal may be input to the second input port 123.

Further, the second input port 123 (input port 3) takes in the setting key switch signal from the setting key switch 93 and the set value change switch signal from the set value change switch 102, and plays the game microcomputer via the data bus 140. Supply to 111.

Further, among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, the output to the third input port 124 is also supplied from the game control device 100 to the test shot test device (not shown) via the relay board 70. Further, the detection signals of the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121 are configured to be input to the gaming microcomputer 111 in addition to the third input port 124.

As described above, the proximity I/F 121 has a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, the proximity I/F 121 is supplied with a voltage of 12V from the power supply device 400 in addition to the voltage of 5V required for normal IC operation. Has become.

The data held by the third input port 124 is the enable signal CE when the gaming microcomputer 111 decodes the address assigned to the third input port 124.
It can be read by asserting 2 (changing to a valid level). The same applies to the second input port 123 and the first input port 122 described later.

Further, to the input unit 120, a frame radio wave incorrect signal output from the payout control device 200, a payout busy signal, a status signal indicating a payout abnormality, a shoot ball out switch signal indicating a shortage of game balls before payout, and an overflow. The overflow switch signal, the touch switch signal based on the input of the touch switch provided on the operation handle 24, the out ball detection switch signal from the out ball detection switch are fetched, and the gaming microcomputer 1 is operated via the data bus 140.
A first input port 122 is provided which supplies 11 to 11. The overflow switch signal is a signal output when it is detected that the game balls are stored in the lower plate 23 in a predetermined amount or more (full). The frame radio wave incorrect signal is a signal output based on the detection of radio waves by the frame radio wave sensor provided on the front frame 12 (main body frame), and whether the payout busy signal is in a state in which the payout control device 200 can receive a command. This is a signal indicating whether or not. In this embodiment,
The out ball detection switch (not shown) detects all the game balls that have been shot in the game area and finished the game. The out ball detection switch (not shown) may detect only the game ball passing through the out opening 30b.

Further, the input section 120 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 125 for inputting signals such as a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal from the power supply device 400 to the gaming microcomputer 111 and the like, and the Schmitt buffer 125 receives these input signals. It has a function to remove noise from.
The power failure monitoring signal from the power supply device 400 is once input to the first input port 122, and taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. That is, it is treated as a signal equivalent to the signal from the above-mentioned various switches. This is because there is a limit to the number of terminals provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 for receiving signals from the outside.

On the other hand, the reset signal RST from which noise has been removed by the Schmitt buffer 125 is directly input to the reset terminal provided in the gaming microcomputer 111, and the output unit 13 is also provided.
0 to each port. In addition, the reset signal RST is directly output to the relay board 70 without passing through the output unit 130, thereby turning off the test shot test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay board 70 for output to the test shot test apparatus. Is configured.

In addition, the reset signal RST may be configured to be output to the test shot test device via the relay board 70. It should be noted that the reset signal RST is output to the ports 122 and 123 of the input unit 120.
, 124 is not supplied. The data set to each port of the output unit 130 by the gaming microcomputer 111 immediately before the reset signal RST is input needs to be reset in order to prevent a malfunction of the system, but each of the input units 120 is input immediately before the reset signal RST is input. This is because the data read by the gaming microcomputer 111 from the port is discarded by resetting the gaming microcomputer 111.

The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 132 arranged on a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the effect control device 300 and a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the payout control device 200. Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. It should be noted that one-way communication is set so that no signal can be input from the effect control device 300 side to the game control device 100.

Further, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140, and transmits data for notifying special test symbol information of the variable display game to a test firing test device of an accredited organization (not shown) and a signal indicating a probability state of a big hit via the relay board 70. The output buffer 133 is configured to be mountable. The buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on the game control device (main board) of the pachinko gaming machine as an actual machine (mass-produced product) installed in the game shop. A detection signal of a switch that does not need to be processed, such as a starting port switch output from the proximity I/F 121, is supplied to the test-shooting test device via the relay board 70 without passing through the buffer 133.

On the other hand, a detection signal such as the magnetic sensor switch 61 and the radio wave sensor 62 that cannot be supplied to the test-shooting test device as it is is once taken into the game microcomputer 111 and processed into another signal or information, for example, a game machine controls the game. As an error signal indicating that the test is not possible, the error signal is supplied from the data bus 140 to the test-inspection test apparatus via the buffer 133 and the relay board 70.

The relay board 70 is provided with a port for receiving the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplying it to the test-shooting test apparatus, a connector for relaying and transmitting the signal line of the detection signal of the switch that does not pass through the buffer, and the like. There is. At the port on the relay board 70, the game microcomputer 11
The chip enable signal CE output from 1 is also supplied, and the signal of the port selectively controlled by the signal CE is supplied to the test-injection test apparatus.

In addition, the opening/closing data of the solenoid (universal solenoid) 37c connected to the data bus 140 for opening the normal variation winning device 37 and the solenoid (large winning opening solenoid) 39b for opening the special variation winning device 39 are output to the output unit 130. A second output port 134 for outputting is provided.

Further, the output unit 130 has a third output port 135 for outputting ON/OFF data of the segment line to which the anode terminal of the LED is connected according to the content displayed on the collective display device 50, and the collective display device 50. ON/OFF of the digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED is connected
A fourth output port 136 is provided for outputting off data.

Further, the output unit 130 outputs information about the gaming machine 10 such as jackpot information to the external information terminal 71.
A fifth output port 137 is provided for outputting to. The external information terminal 71 is provided with a photo relay and can be connected to, for example, an external device (such as an information collecting terminal or an amusement hall internal management device (hall computer)) installed in a game store, and information related to the gaming machine 10 is externally transmitted. It can be supplied to the device. Further, a firing permission signal is also output from the fifth output port 137 to the payout control device 200 via the Schmitt buffer 132.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a sixth output port 141 (probability set value display output port) for outputting information on the set value (probability set value) to the probability set value display device 143.
In the present embodiment, the probability set value display device 143 is a 7-segment type display (LED lamp), but the set value (probability set value) information is output from the sixth output port 141 to the driver (
It may be output to the probability set value display device 143 via an LED driver).

Further, the output unit 130 has a universal solenoid 37 output from the second output port 134.
c, a first driver (driving circuit) 138a that receives and outputs the opening/closing data signal of the special winning opening solenoid 39b and outputs a solenoid driving signal, and a segment on the current supply side of the collective display device 50 that is output from the third output port 135. Second driver 1 for outputting line on/off drive signal
38b, a third driver 138c that outputs an ON/OFF drive signal for the digit line on the current drawing side of the batch display device 50 that is output from the fourth output port 136, and is supplied from the fifth output port 137 to an external device such as a management device. A fourth driver 138d that outputs an external information signal to the external information terminal 71 is provided.

The first driver 138a is supplied with 32V DC as a power supply voltage from the power supply device 400 in order to drive a solenoid that operates at 32V. In addition, the collective display device 50
The DC 12V is supplied to the second driver 138b that drives the segment line. The third driver 138c for driving the digit line is for pulling out the digit line corresponding to the display data with a current, and therefore the power supply voltage may be either 12V or 5V.

The second driver 138b that outputs 12V causes a current to flow into the anode terminal of the LED through the segment line, and the third driver 138c that outputs the ground potential pulls out the current from the cathode terminal through the segment line, thereby providing a dynamic driving method. The power supply voltage flows to the LEDs that are sequentially selected by, and the LEDs are turned on. Fourth output of external information signal to external information terminal 71
The driver 138d is supplied with DC12V in order to give a level of 12V to the external information signal. The buffer 133, the second output port 134, the first driver 138a, etc. may be provided not on the output unit 130 of the game control device 100, that is, on the main board, but on the relay board 70 side.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a photo coupler 139 for transmitting information such as an identification code of each gaming machine and a program to the external inspection device 250. Photo coupler 13
9, the gaming microcomputer 111 is configured to be able to communicate with each other so that the gaming microcomputer 111 can transmit and receive data to and from the inspection device 250 by serial communication. Since the data transmission/reception is performed using the serial communication terminal of the gaming microcomputer 111 as in a general-purpose microprocessor, ports such as the input ports 122, 123, and 124 are not provided.

Further, the output unit 130 includes a driver 150 that receives the serial data (control data, lighting pattern data, character code (character code), etc.) output from the second output port 134 and drives the status display device 152. It is provided. In the present embodiment, the status display device 152 is made up of a plurality (four) of 7-segment type (8-segment type including dot portions) indicators (LED lamps), and the driver 150 is an LED driver. It is not limited to.

The state display device 152 is provided on the game control device 100 (main board),
It may be provided in another place. For example, the status display device 152 is a 4-digit 7-segment type (
This is an 8-segment type display including the dot portion), and it is possible to display the character ratio, the payout rate, and the number of discharged balls. The state display device 152 is not limited to a device that directly displays the character ratio, the ball output rate, and the number of balls discharged, but may also indirectly display the number of ball discharged, the ball ratio, and the character ratio. Good.
That is, the state display device 152 may display information about the character ratio, the payout rate, and the number of discharged balls.

Here, the number of discharged balls is the number of game balls discharged from the game area 32 (also called the number of out balls).
Is the total of the number of gaming balls that have passed through the winning opening (the number of winnings) and the number of gaming balls that have passed through the out opening 30b. The number of discharged balls is basically the same as the number of discharged balls, which is the number of game balls emitted from the ball emitting device to the game area 32. The number of discharged balls can be acquired by counting the signal of the out-ball detection switch. In the present embodiment, the winning holes are the general winning holes 35,
A start winning opening 36 (first starting winning opening, starting opening 1), a normal variable winning device 37 (second starting winning opening, starting opening 2), and a special variable winning device 39 (large winning opening) are included. The number of discharged balls is displayed as a countdown, (100-number of discharged balls) is displayed, and only 100 (predetermined number) is counted. The number of discharged balls may be displayed by counting up from “00” to “99”.

The payout rate is the ratio (proportion) of the total number of prize balls to the number of discharged balls (or the number of shots), (
Calculated as (number of balls acquired/number of balls discharged)×100 (%). That is, the payout rate is the number of balls acquired (the total number of prize balls) per 100 discharged balls.

In the present embodiment, the payout rate is easily calculated from the acquired number of balls during which the number of discharged balls becomes 0 to 100, every time the number of discharged balls becomes 100. That is, the number of discharged balls is counted up to 100 (predetermined number). Every time the number of discharged balls reaches 100 (predetermined number), the payout rate is updated to the latest payout rate until the number of discharged balls changes from 1 to 100. As a result, if the number of acquired balls (total number of prize balls) is displayed on the state display device 152 as it is, the payout rate is displayed.

For example, the prize ratio is during the jackpot state, out of the total number of prize balls (the total number of prize balls) obtained by winning the prize hole in a predetermined period (for example, from turning on the game machine 10 to the present). Is the ratio (%) of the number of prize balls (the number of balls acquired for each character) obtained by winning the big prize hole (=so-called continuous character ratio). In addition, the ratio of the prizes may be the ratio of the number of prize balls (during the big hit state and the small hit state) obtained by winning the big prize hole (=the big prize hole ratio), out of the total number of prize balls. Or, the ratio of the number of prize balls obtained by winning in the special winning opening and the ordinary variable winning device 37 (second starting winning opening) (= so-called character ratio (general character ratio) that is generally used )).

[Production control device]
Next, the configuration of the effect control device 300 (sub-board) will be described with reference to FIG. Figure 4
FIG. 7 is a block diagram of an effect control system of the gaming machine 10.

The effect control device 300, like the gaming microcomputer 111, is an amusement chip (IC).
A main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 and a VDP (Video Display Processor) 312 as a graphic processor that performs image processing for displaying an image on the display device 41 in accordance with commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311. A sound source LSI 314 for controlling the output of sound for reproducing various melody and sound effects from the speaker 19 is provided.

The main control microcomputer 311 has a P that stores programs executed by the CPU and various data.
A program ROM 321, which is a ROM (programmable read-only memory), a RAM 322 that provides a work area, and an Fe that can retain stored contents even when power is not supplied at the time of power failure
A RAM 323 and an RTC (Real Time Clock) 338, which is a time measuring means for generating information indicating the current date and time (year, month, day, day of the week, etc.), are connected. A RAM for providing a work area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311.

A WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311. The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes the command from the game microcomputer 111, determines the effect contents and instructs the VDP 312 on the contents of the output video, or the sound source LSI 314.
To perform reproduction sound instruction, lighting of a decorative lamp, drive control of a motor or solenoid, management of effect time, and the like.

The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a for providing a work area and a scaler 312b for enlarging and reducing an image. Further, the VDP 312 has an image ROM 325 in which character images and video data are stored, and an ultra-high-speed VRAM (video RAM) used for expanding and processing image data such as characters read from the image ROM 325. ) 326 is connected.

Although not particularly limited, data is transmitted and received between the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 in a parallel manner. By transmitting and receiving data in a parallel manner, it is possible to transmit commands and data in a shorter time than in the case of serial transmission.

From the VDP 312 to the main control microcomputer 311, a vertical synchronizing signal VSYN for synchronizing the image of the display device 41 and the lighting of the decorative lamp provided on the glass frame 15 or the game board 30.
C, a synchronization signal STS that gives a data transmission timing is input. In addition, VDP312
From the main control microcomputer 311 to the main control microcomputer 311 to wait for reception of the interrupt signals INT0-n and the command and data from the main control microcomputer 311 to notify the processing status such as the completion of drawing in the VRAM. The signal WAIT or the like is also input.

The effect control device 300 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 by the LVDS (small amplitude signal transmission) method. Video data, a horizontal synchronization signal HSYNC and a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC are input from the VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 313, and the image generated by the VDP 312 is sent to the display device 41 via the signal conversion circuit 313. Is displayed.

A sound ROM 327 storing voice data is connected to the sound source LSI 314. The main control microcomputer 311 and the tone generator LSI 314 are connected via an address/data bus 340. An interrupt signal INT is input from the sound source LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311. The effect control device 300 is provided with an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier for driving the upper speaker 19a provided on the glass frame 15 and the lower speaker 19b provided on the front frame 12, and the sound source LSI 314 is provided. The generated sound is output from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b via the amplifier circuit 337.

Further, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I/F) 331 that receives a command transmitted from the game control device 100. Command I/F3
Through the 31, the decoration special figure reservation number command, the decoration special figure command, the variation command, the stop information command and the like transmitted from the game control apparatus 100 to the effect control apparatus 300 is received as an effect control command signal (effect command). .. The game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 is DC5
Since the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at DC 3.3V, the command I/F 331 is provided with a signal level conversion function.

In addition, in the effect control device 300, the board decoration LED control circuit 332 for driving and controlling the board decoration device 46 having the LED (light emitting diode) provided in the game board 30 (including the center case 40) and the glass frame 15 are provided. A frame decoration LED control circuit 333 for driving and controlling a frame decoration device (for example, the frame decoration device 18 or the like) having an LED (light emitting diode) provided therein, a game board 3
0 (including the center case 40) board production device 44 (for example, display device 41)
A board production movable body control circuit 334 is provided for driving and controlling a movable accessory etc. that enhances the production effect in cooperation with the production display in FIG. It should be noted that the panel decoration device 46 includes the lamp display device 8 described above.
It may include 0.

These control circuits 332 to 334 that drive and control lamps, motors, solenoids, etc. are connected to the main control microcomputer 311 via an address/data bus 340. A frame effect movable body control circuit for driving and controlling a frame effect device such as a motor provided in the glass frame 15 may be provided.

Further, in the effect control device 300, the effect button switch 25a built in the effect button 25 provided on the glass frame 15, the touch panel 25b provided on the surface of the effect button 25, and the motor in the board effect device 44. A function of detecting the on/off state of the performance accessory switch 47 (production motor switch) for detecting the initial position and the like and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311, and a volume control switch provided in the production control device 300. A switch input circuit 336 for detecting the state of 335 and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 is provided.

The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply device 400 has the effect control device 300 having the above-described configuration.
A DC voltage of 32V for driving a motor or a solenoid, a display device 41 including a liquid crystal panel, a DC 12V for driving a motor or an LED, in order to supply a desired level of DC voltage to the electronic components controlled by the same or the like. DC5 that is the power supply voltage for the command I/F 331
In addition to V, it is configured to generate a DC 15V voltage for driving a motor, an LED, and a speaker.

Further, when an LSI that operates at a low voltage such as 3.3V or 1.2V is used as the main control microcomputer 311, DC- for generating DC3.3V or DC1.2V based on DC5V is used. A DC converter is provided in the performance control device 300. DC-
The DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply unit 410.

The reset signal generated by the control signal generation unit 430 of the power supply device 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 and puts the device in the reset state. Further, the VDP 312 (VDPRESET signal), the sound source LSI 314 are output from the main control microcomputer 311.
, And is supplied to an amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRESET signal) for driving a speaker and control circuits 332 to 334 (IORESET signal) for driving and controlling a lamp, a motor, and the like to reset them. In addition, the production control device 300 has a cooling FA that cools various parts of the gaming machine 10.
The cooling FAN 45 is driven when N45 is connected and the effect control device 300 is powered on.

Next, game control performed in these control circuits will be described. Game control device 1
In the CPU 111a of the game microcomputer 111 of 00, based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the gate switch 34a provided in the universal figure starting gate 34, the random number for hit determination of the universal figure is extracted and stored in the ROM 111b. The judgment result is compared with the judgment value, and the hit/miss of the universal figure variation display game is judged.

Then, after the identification symbol is variably displayed for a predetermined time on the public figure display, the general figure variability display game that is stopped and displayed is displayed. When the result of the universal figure variation display game is a hit, a special result mode is displayed on the universal figure indicator, the universal electric solenoid 37c is operated, and the movable member 37b of the regular variation winning device 37 is operated for a predetermined time (for example, (0.3 seconds) The opening control is performed as described above. That is, the game control device 100 serves as conversion control execution means for performing conversion control of the conversion member (movable member 37b). When the result of the universal figure variation display game is out of alignment, control is performed to display the outlying result mode on the universal figure display.

In addition, based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the start opening 1 switch 36a provided in the start winning opening 36, the start winning (starting memory) is stored, and the big hit judgment of the special figure 1 variable display game is based on the starting memory. The random number for use is extracted and compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111b to determine whether or not the special figure 1 variable display game is missed.

Also, the starting memory is stored based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the starting opening 2 switch 37a provided in the normal variation winning device 37, and the random number value for jackpot determination of the special figure 2 variation display game is based on the starting memory. Is extracted and compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111b to determine whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game has missed.

Then, the CPU 111a of the game control device 100 outputs to the effect control device 300 a control signal (effect control command) including the determination result of the special figure 1 variable display game or the special figure 2 variable display game. Then, after the identification symbol is variably displayed for a predetermined time on the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52, the special figure variation display game that is stopped and displayed is displayed. That is, the game control device 100 controls the progress of the variable display game based on the winning of the game balls flowing down the game region 32 to the starting winning region (first starting winning port 36, normal variable winning device 37). To make.

Further, in the effect control device 300, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, the display device 41 displays the decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure variation display game. Furthermore, in the effect control device 300, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, setting of the effect state, output of sounds from the speakers 19a and 19b, processing for controlling light emission of various LEDs, and the like are performed.
That is, the effect control device 300 constitutes an effect control means for controlling the effect related to the game (variable display game, etc.).

Then, the CPU 111a of the game control device 100 displays the special result mode on the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52 and generates the special game state when the result of the special figure variation display game is a hit. Let In the process of generating the special gaming state, the CPU 111a
For example, the opening/closing door 39c of the special variation winning device 39 is opened by the special winning opening solenoid 39b, and control is performed to allow the game balls to flow into the special winning opening.

Either a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls is won in the special winning opening, or a predetermined openable time (for example, 27 seconds or 0.05 seconds) elapses from the opening of the special winning opening. Opening the special winning opening until one of the conditions is achieved is defined as one round (R), and this is continued (repeated) for a predetermined number of rounds (for example, 15 times, 11 times or 2 times) (cycle game) I do. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a special winning opening opening/closing control unit that controls the opening and closing of the special winning opening when the stop result appearance becomes the special result appearance. Further, when the result of the special figure variation display game is off, control is performed to display the deviation result mode on the special figure 1 display device 51 or the special figure 2 display device 52.

Further, the game control device 100 can generate a high-probability state as a game state after the special game state ends based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. The high probability state (probability change state) is a state in which the probability of a hit result in the special figure variation display game is higher than that in the normal probability state. In addition, even if the high probability state is reached based on the result mode of the special figure variable display game, the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game, Both are in high probability state.

Further, the game control device 100 can generate a time saving state (specific game state) as a game state after the special game state ends, based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. In the time saving state, control is performed so that the universal figure variation display game and the normal variation winning device 37 are set to the time saving operation state, and the normal variation winning device 37 per unit time is longer than that in the case where the normal variation winning device 37 is in the normal operation state. Since it is controlled so that the opening time of is substantially increased, it becomes the universal communication support state. It should be noted that even in the high probability state (normal probability variation state) excluding the latent probability variation state, the time-saving state is duplicated and the ordinary electric power support is executed.

For example, in the time saving state, the execution time of the above-mentioned general figure fluctuation display game (general figure fluctuation time)
It is possible to perform a time-shortening variation in which the second variation display time is shorter than the normal first variation display time (for example, 10000 msec is 1000 msec). In the time saving state, the execution time of the special figure variation display game (special figure variation time) is shortened as compared with the normal time, and the time reduction variation of the special figure variation display game is also executed.

In addition, in the time saving state, the general figure stop time for displaying the result of the general figure fluctuation display game is set to the first time.
Second stop time (eg 704 msec) shorter than stop time (eg 1604 msec)
It is possible to control so that.

Further, in the time saving state, when the universal figure variation display game is a hit result and the regular variation winning device 37 is opened, the opening time (normal communication opening time) is the first opening time in the normal state (for example, 100 msec). It is possible to control so that the second opening time is longer than that (for example, 1352 msec).

In addition, in the time saving state, the number of times the normal variation winning device 37 is opened (the number of ordinary electric open times) is larger than the first number of times of opening (for example, two times) with respect to one hit result of the universal figure variation display game. It is possible to set the second opening number (for example, 4 times). Further, in the time-saving state, it is possible to make the probability of being a hit result of the universal figure fluctuation display game (general figure probability) higher and higher than the ordinary probability (low probability) in the normal operation state.

In the time saving state, the general variable winning device 37 is opened by changing any one or more of the universal figure variation time, the universal figure stop time, the number of universal communication open, the universal communication open time, and the universal figure probability. Try to extend the conversion time longer than usual. As a result, in the time saving state, winning in the normal variation winning device 37 is easier than in the normal gaming state, and the number of executions of the special figure variation display game per unit time can be increased more than in the normal gaming state. It is also possible to set a plurality of types of time saving states that are different from each other. Further, in the normal operation state, the movable member 3
You may set so that 7b may not be opened (universal figure probability is 0). Further, in the case of a win, either the first opening mode or the second opening mode may be selected. In this case, the selection probabilities of the first opening mode and the second opening mode may be different. The high-probability state and the short-time state can occur independently of each other, both of them can occur at the same time, or only one of them can occur.

[Control of game control device]
Hereinafter, control of a gaming machine that performs such a game will be described. First, the control executed by the gaming microcomputer (gaming microcomputer) 111 of the gaming control device 100 will be described. The control process by the gaming microcomputer 111 mainly includes a main process shown in FIGS. 5A and 5B and a timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 9 which is performed in a predetermined time period (for example, 4 msec).

[Main processing (game control device)]
First, the main process will be described. 5A and 5B are flowcharts showing the procedure of main processing by the game control device 100. The main process is started when the power is turned on. In the flowchart of the process executed by the game control device 100, the code (number) of the step is expressed as "A***".

As shown in FIG. 5A, when starting the main process, the game control device 100 first executes a process of prohibiting an interrupt (A1001). Further, a stack pointer setting process for setting the stack pointer which is the top address of the area for saving the value of the register or the like when the interrupt occurs (A1002).

Then, register bank 0 is designated as the register bank to be used (A1003), and the upper address of the RAM start address is set in a predetermined register (A1004). For example, when the RAM address is in the range of 0000h to 01FFh, 00h is set as the upper address.

Next, the game control device 100 outputs a firing prohibition signal and sets the firing permission signal to a prohibited state (A1005). The firing permission signal is set to a prohibited state when at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 outputs a firing prohibition signal, and the firing of the game ball is prohibited. After that, the game control device 100 reads the state of the input port 3 (second input port 123) (A1006). As a result, the setting key switch 93,
Setting value change switch 102, glass frame opening detection switch 63, front frame opening detection switch 6
The signal from 4 (main frame opening detection switch) can be read.

Further, the game control device 100 sets a power supply delay timer (A1007). By setting a predetermined initial value in the power supply delay timer, the game control device 1 forming the main control means
Waiting time for waiting until a program of a secondary control unit (for example, payout control device 200 or effect control device 300) that performs various controls according to an instruction from 00 normally starts (for example, 3
Seconds) is set. As a result, when the power is turned on, the command is sent to the slave control device before the game control device 100 starts up first and the slave control devices (for example, the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300) start up, and the slave control device. Can avoid dropping a command. That is, the game control device 100 delays the activation of the main control means (game control device 100) when the power is turned on, and the sub-control devices (payout control device 200, effect control device 3).
(00 etc.) forms a standby means for setting a predetermined standby time for waiting for the activation of the (00 etc.).

In addition, the power supply delay timer measures time using a storage area (RAM area or register, which is not the target of validity determination) that is not the target of validity determination (checksum calculation) of RAM. As a result, when calculating check data such as the checksum of the RAM area, some R
Since it is not necessary to calculate by excluding the AM area, it is possible to prevent the control at power-on from becoming complicated.

The setting key switch signal from the setting key switch 93 and the set value change switch signal from the set value change switch 102 are input to the second input port 123 (input port 3), and the standby time By reading the state of the second input port 123 before the start of, the operation of the setting key switch 93 or the setting value change switch 102 can be detected with certainty. That is, if the states of the setting key switch 93 and the setting value changing switch 102 are read after the waiting time has elapsed, the setting key switch 93 and the setting value changing switch 102 are operated after the waiting time has elapsed, or the power is turned on. It is necessary to continue to operate the setting key switch 93 and the setting value changing switch 102 from the time until the waiting time elapses. However, by reading the state before the start of the standby time, it becomes possible to detect it by performing the operation immediately after the power is turned on without performing such a troublesome operation. It is possible to prevent a situation in which the operation of the setting value change switch 102 cannot be accepted.

When the power supply delay timer is set (A1007), the game control device 100 executes a process of measuring the standby time and a process of monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the standby time (A1008 to A).
1012).

When the power failure monitoring process is started, the game control device 100 first reads the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 via the port and the data bus and checks the number of times (
(For example, twice) is set (A1008), and it is determined whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is on (A1).
009).

If the power failure monitoring signal is ON, the game control device 100 (the result of A1009 is "Y
)), it is determined whether or not the ON state of the power failure monitoring signal continues for the number of checks set in the process of step A1008 (A1010). Then, when the power failure monitoring signal is not kept on for the number of checks (the result of A1010 is “N”), the process returns to the process of determining whether the power failure monitoring signal is on in step A1009.

Further, the game control device 100, when the ON state of the power failure monitoring signal for the number of checks continues (the result of A1010 is “Y”), that is, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred, the gaming machine. Wait until the power is cut off. In this way, by determining that a power failure has occurred when the power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period, it is possible to prevent erroneous detection of a power failure due to noise, etc., and appropriately deal with problems at power-on. can do.

That is, the game control device 100 serves as a power failure monitoring means for monitoring the occurrence of power failure during a predetermined standby time. As a result, it becomes possible to deal with a power failure that has occurred during the period in which the activation of the game control device 100, which is the main control means, is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately deal with a problem at the time of turning on the power. Note that access to the RAM is not permitted until the end of the standby time, and the stored contents at the time of the previous power shutdown are retained, so backup processing etc. is performed when a power failure occurs here. No need. Therefore, even if a power failure occurs during the standby time, it is not necessary to back up the RAM, and the control load can be reduced.

On the other hand, the game control device 100, when the power failure monitoring signal is not on (the result of A1009 is "
N"), that is, when the power failure has not occurred, the power-on delay timer is updated by -1 (A1011), and it is determined whether the timer value is 0 (A1012). When the value of the timer is not 0 (result of A1012 is “N”), that is, when the waiting time has not ended, the process returns to the process of setting the number of checks of the power failure monitoring signal in step A1008.

Further, the game control device 100, when the value of the timer is 0 (the result of A1012 is “Y”).
) That is, when the waiting time is over, access to a read/write memory (RWM) such as a RAM or an EEPROM is enabled (A1013), and OFF data is output to all output ports (no output). Set to (A1014).

Next, the game control device 100 sets a serial port (a port that is installed in the game microcomputer 111 in advance, and is used for communication with the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 in this embodiment) (A1015). ). Furthermore, the driver 15 that drives the status display device 152
0 is initialized (A1016).

Here, the game control device 100 writes a command including control data corresponding to the contents of the initial setting in the transmission buffer of the second output port 134 (serial communication circuit) and transmits it to the driver 150. For example, the game control device 100 sets the duty ratio in the initial setting. The duty ratio corresponds to the brightness of each LED of the status display device 152. The control data corresponding to the duty ratio is used by the duty setting unit of the driver 150 (LED driver). The duty ratio of the driver 150 may be made smaller than usual in order to darken each LED with power saving. Next, the game control device 100 sets the number of used digits of the state display device 152 in the initial setting. In this embodiment, the number of used digits is four. The control data corresponding to the number of used digits is used by the number of digits setting unit of the driver 150 (LED driver).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the power failure inspection area 1 in the RWM is normal power failure inspection area check data (A1017). If it is normal (A101
The result of 7 is "Y"), and it is determined whether the value of the power failure inspection area 2 in the RWM is normal power failure inspection area check data (A1018).

Furthermore, if the value of the power failure inspection area 2 is normal (the result of A1018 is “Y”), the game control device 100 calculates a checksum of a predetermined area (for example, a game control work area) in the RWM. A calculation process is executed (A1019), and it is determined whether the calculated checksum and the checksum at power-off match (A1020). If the checksums match (result of A1020 is “Y”), the RAM 111c is normal and the RAM clear start address 2 is set (A1021).

FIG. 5C is a diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 111c of the gaming microcomputer 111. As shown in FIG. 5C, the RAM clear start address 2 is set so as to remove the probability setting value area from the RAM area to be cleared. With the RAM clear start address 2, the RAM area to be cleared becomes the clear area #2 in FIG. 5C. The clear area #2 includes a random number area, a control information area, and a game control stack area. The random number area is an initial value random number area for storing various initial value random numbers,
A fluctuation pattern random number area for storing fluctuation pattern random numbers is included. The control information area is an area from the power failure inspection area 1 to the checksum area, and includes the power failure inspection area 1, the power failure inspection area 2, the checksum area, and the like. The random number area may be excluded from the clear area #2. It should be noted that the clear area #2 includes a status display work area for storing information displayed on the status display device 152 such as a character ratio, and a status display stack area for processing information displayed on the status display device 152. I can't.

In FIG. 5C, an unused area may be provided between the game control work area including the probability setting value area, the random number area, and the control information area and the game control stack area. An unused area may be provided between the status display work area and the status display stack area. Also,
The stack area for status display may be arranged at the end of the address of the RAM 111c, and the unused area (the bottom of FIG. 5C) at the end of FIG. 5C may be eliminated.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the probability setting is being changed (during setting variable state, setting change state) (A1022). When the probability setting is being changed (the result of A1022 is “Y”), the game control device 100 executes the process of changing the probability setting in steps A1036-A1041. If the probability setting value changing flag (A1038) is set, it can be determined that the probability setting value is changing.

When the probability setting is not being changed (the result of A1022 is “N”), the game control device 100,
It is determined whether the front frame 12 (main body frame) is in the open state (A1023). When a signal from the front frame open detection switch 64 (main frame open detection switch) is input, the front frame 1
It can be determined that 2 (main body frame) is in an open state. In step A1023, the front frame 1
Instead of 2, it may be determined whether the glass frame 15 is in the open state, or both the front frame 12 and the glass frame 15 may be in the open state. When the signal from the glass frame open detection switch 63 is input, it can be determined that the glass frame 15 is in the open state.

When the front frame 12 (main frame) is in the open state (result of A1023 is “Y”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the setting key switch 93 is on (A1024).
When the setting key switch 93 is on (result of A1024 is “Y”), the setting (setting value) can be changed. Therefore, the RAM initial state in the setting changing state of steps A1036-A1041 is set. Processing (RAM clear processing) and processing during setting change are executed.

When the front frame 12 (main body frame) is not in the open state (when the game control device 100 is in the closed state)
(The result of A1023 is “N”), or when the setting key switch 93 is off (A102
The result of No. 4 is "N"), and it is determined whether or not the set value change switch 102 is turned on (A1).
025). When the setting value change switch 102 is not turned on (the result of A1025 is "N
)), the normal processing at power-on (when power is restored) in steps A1031-A1035 is executed.

On the other hand, the game control device 100, when the set value change switch 102 is turned on (A1
If the result of 025 is “Y”), the RAM initialization (RAM clear) processing of steps A1042-A1045 is executed. Since the setting key switch 93 is turned off by operating (pressing) the setting value changing switch 102 when the power is turned on, the setting value changing switch 102 is the RAM initialization switch ( It is used as a RAM clear switch). It should be noted that the setting value change switch 102 is not actually turned on when the front frame 12 is in the closed state (the result of A1023 is “N”). The setting value change switch 102, which can also function as an initialization switch, forms an initialization operation unit that can be operated from the outside, and the game control device 100
Serves as an initialization unit that initializes the data stored in the RAM based on the operation of the initialization operation unit.

In addition, when the game control device 100 determines that the check data in the power failure inspection area is not normal data (the result of A1017 is “N” or the result of A1018 is “N”), the checksums do not match. (The result of A1020 is “N”), the abnormality of the RAM 111c has occurred, and the process proceeds to the processing for dealing with the RAM abnormality after step A1026. First, R
The AM clear start address 1 is set (A1026). As shown in FIG. 5C, since the RAM clear start address 1 is the start address of the game control work area, the probability setting value area is also included in the clear target RAM area. R to be cleared by RAM clear start address 1
The AM area is set to clear area #1 in FIG. 5C. The clear area #1 includes a game control work area (including a probability setting value area, a random number area, and a control information area), and a game control stack area. The clear area #1 does not include a status display work area for storing information displayed on the status display device 152 and a status display stack area for processing information displayed on the status display device 152.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the front frame 12 (main body frame) is in an open state (A1027). When the signal from the front frame open detection switch 64 (main frame open detection switch) is input, it can be determined that the front frame 12 is in the open state.

When the front frame 12 is in the open state, the game control device 100 (the result of A1027 is "Y
)), it is determined whether the setting key switch 93 is on (A1028). When the setting key switch 93 is on (result of A1028 is “Y”), the setting value can be changed, and therefore the RAM in the setting variable state of steps A1036-A1041.
Initialization processing (RAM clear processing) and processing during setting change are executed. Note that RA in this case
The RAM area to be cleared in the M initialization process is the clear area #1 in FIG. 5C. Therefore,
RAM abnormality can be resolved.

When the front frame 12 (main body frame) is not in the open state (when the game control device 100 is in the closed state)
(The result of A1027 is “N”), or when the setting key switch 93 is off (A102
When the result of No. 8 is “N”), the command of the setting change instruction for urging the player to change the setting is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (effect control board) (A1029). In addition, the effect control device 300 that has received the command of the setting change instruction displays a setting change instruction display for prompting the player to change the setting on the display device 41. By the setting change instruction display, the player tries to change the setting, the setting key switch 93 is turned on (the result of A1028 is “Y”), and the RAM abnormality processing is solved by the RAM clearing process (A1036) at the time of the setting change. it can.

After that, the game control device 100 executes a process of prohibiting access to the RWM (A10
30), stand by until the power of the gaming machine is cut off.

Next, the normal processing when the power is turned on (when the power is restored) in steps A1031-A1035 will be described.

The game control device 100 first saves the initial value at the time of power failure recovery in the area to be initialized (
A1031). The area to be initialized is the clear area #2 (random number area, control information area, game control stack area) in FIG. 5C. Here, in the control information area, a power failure inspection area,
It includes a checksum area and an area related to error fraud monitoring. The payout control device 200
Also clears the busy signal status area for storing the state of the pay-out busy signal, which is a signal indicating whether or not the command can be accepted, and is set to an undefined state indicating that the state of the pay-out busy signal is not fixed. After that, the game control device 100 checks the area for storing the game state in the RWM to determine whether the game state is the high probability state (A1032).

Here, when the game state is not the high-probability state (result of A1032 is “N”), the game control device 100 skips the processes of step A1033 and step A1034, and shifts to the process of step A1035. If the gaming state is a high probability state (A1
The result of 032 is “Y”), the ON information is saved in the high probability notification flag area (A1033),
For example, the ON (lighting) data of the high-probability notification LED (third gaming state display unit 59, error display) provided in the collective display device 50 is saved in the segment area (A1034). Then, a command at the time of power failure recovery corresponding to the process number prepared for rationally executing the special figure game process described later is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (effect control board) (A1035), and in step A1046. Move to processing.

Next, the RAM initialization process (RAM in the variable setting state of steps A1036-A1041)
The clearing process) and the process during setting change will be described.

The game control device 100 first clears the RAM area to be cleared to 0 (A1036).
.. When the RAM 111c is normal (result of A1020 is “Y”), the RAM area to be cleared has the RAM clear start address 2 set, and therefore the clear area #2 of FIG. 5C is set.
Becomes When the RAM 111c is abnormal (result of A1020 is “N”), the RAM clear start address 1 is set, and therefore the clear area #1 in FIG. 5C is set. That is, RAM
The probability setting value area is not cleared when the RAM is normal, but the probability setting value area is also cleared when the RAM is abnormal.

Next, the game control device 100 saves the initial value at the time of RAM initialization in the area to be initialized (A1037). At this point, it is premised that the front frame 12 is in the open state, and the initial value of the security signal control timer (described later) for outputting the security signal is saved and the front frame 12 (main frame) is opened. Enables the output of information such as what has been done to an external device (such as a hall computer). When the probability setting value area is cleared when the RAM is abnormal, a default value (for example, setting value 1) may be saved as an initial value in the probability setting value area.

Then, the game control device 100 sets a probability setting value changing flag indicating that the setting is changeable (that is, the setting is being changed) so that the setting can be changed (A1038).
Then, the probability setting value display data corresponding to the probability setting value is saved in the probability setting value display data area as initial data when the probability setting value is changed (A1039), the value in the probability setting value area is loaded, and the probability setting value is set. It is saved in the work probability setting value area as initial data at the time of change (A104).
0). Next, a command during the probability setting change indicating that the setting is in the variable setting state (during the probability setting change) is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (effect control board) (A1041), and step A104.
The processing shifts to the processing of 6. The effect control device 300 can recognize that it is in the setting variable state (probability setting is being changed) by the command that is changing the probability setting.

Next, the processing of the RAM initialization (RAM clear) by the RAM initialization switch (RAM clear switch, setting value change switch 102) in steps A1042-A1045 will be described.

The game control device 100 first sets the RAM clear top address 2 (A1042),
The RAM area to be cleared is cleared to 0 (A1043). Since the clear start address 2 is set, the RAM area RAM to be cleared is the clear area #2 in FIG. 5C. Therefore, the RAM initialization by operating the RAM initialization switch (setting value change switch 102) (
In the RAM clear processing, the probability setting value area is not cleared.

Next, the game control device 100 saves the initial value at the time of RAM initialization in the area to be initialized (A1044). Here, the area to be initialized is, for example, a customer waiting demonstration area and an area related to the setting of the effect mode. Then, the command for the RAM initialization is used as the effect control device 300.
It is transmitted to (production control board) (A1045), and the process proceeds to step A1046.

In addition, the command at the time of power failure recovery transmitted in the process of step A1035 and step A1
The command at the time of RAM initialization transmitted in the processing of 045 includes a model designation command indicating the type of gaming machine, a decorative special figure 1 reserved number command and a decorative special figure 2 reserved number indicating the reserved numbers of special figures 1 and 2. The command and the probability information command indicating the state of probability are included. Also, depending on the state when the power is turned off or turned on, a recovery screen command is displayed when the special figure variation display game is running when the power is turned off, and a customer wait demo command when the customer is waiting when the power is turned off. , A power-on command indicating that the power is turned on is included. Further, depending on the model, an effect mode information command indicating the state of the effect mode, an effect number information command, and a high probability number information command indicating the number of remaining games in the high probability state are included. The RAM initialization command also includes a RAM initialization command (RAM clear command). Upon receiving the RAM initialization command (RAM clear command), the production control device 300 displays a customer waiting demo on the display device 41 and initializes the RAM with the sound of the LED and the speaker of the panel decoration device 46 and the like. Clear) notification 3
Perform for 0 seconds.

Further, the command for power failure recovery and the command for RAM initialization include a setting value information command (probability setting value information command) indicating setting value information that is information of the setting value (probability setting value) of the gaming machine 10. Be done. The game control device 100 need only transmit the setting value information command to the effect control device 300 only once when the power is restored (turned on), and thereafter, the effect control device 300 refers to the setting value information stored by itself. You can control production.

After the processing of steps A1035, A1041, and A1045, the game control device 100 includes a CTC (Counter/Timer Circuit) circuit that generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC) in the game microcomputer 111 (clock generator). Start (A104
6). The CTC circuit is provided in the clock generator in the gaming microcomputer 111. The clock generator divides the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113 and a timer interrupt signal of a predetermined cycle (for example, 4 milliseconds) to the CPU 111a based on the divided signal. And a CTC circuit for generating a signal CTC that gives a trigger for updating the random number to be supplied to the random number generation circuit.

After executing the CTC activation process in step A1046, the game control device 100 activates and sets the random number generation circuit (A1047). Specifically, a predetermined register (CTC in the random number generation circuit
The code (specified value) for activating the random number generation circuit in the update permission register is set to C
It is performed by the PU 111a. Also, a bit transposed pattern of a hard random number (here, a big hit random number) generated by the hardware of the random number generation circuit is set.

The bit transposition pattern is a method of exchanging the bit arrangement of the extracted random numbers (arrangement before bit transposition in the upper row) in a predetermined order and storing as a different bit arrangement (arrangement after bit transposition in the lower row). Is a pattern that determines.

In the present embodiment, by exchanging the bits of the random number according to the bit transposed pattern, the regularity of the random number can be broken and the confidentiality of the random number can be improved. The bit transposition pattern may be a fixed single pattern or may be selected from a plurality of patterns prepared in advance. Further, the user may be allowed to arbitrarily set it.

After that, the game control device 100 extracts the value of a predetermined register (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit when the power is turned on, and various corresponding initial value random numbers (random numbers for determining the jackpot symbols (jackpot symbols) Random number 1, big hit symbol random number 2), small number to determine small hit symbol (small hit symbol random number), random number to determine hit of ordinary figure (random number per hit), random number to determine hit symbol of ordinary figure (random number to hit symbol) Etc.) as an initial value (start value) in a predetermined area of the RWM (A1048
), the interrupt is permitted (A1049). Since the random number generation circuit in the CPU 111a used in this embodiment is configured such that the initial value of the soft random number register changes each time the power is turned on, this value is used as the initial value (start value) of various initial value random numbers. By doing so, it is possible to break the regularity of the random numbers generated by the software and make it difficult for the player to obtain an illegal random number.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 executes an initial value random number updating process for updating the values of various initial value random numbers and breaking the regularity of the random numbers (A1050). Although not particularly limited, in the present embodiment, the big hit random number, the big hit pattern random number, and the hit random number are configured to be generated using the random numbers generated in the random number generation circuit. However, the big hit random number is C
It is a so-called "high-speed counter" that is updated based on a clock having a speed equal to or higher than the operation clock of PU, and a big hit symbol random number, a hit random number is a CTC output that has the same cycle as a timer interrupt process which is a processing unit of a program The CTC (CTC) different from the CTC (CTC0) for timer interrupt processing
It is a "low speed counter" that is updated based on TC2)).

In addition, in the big hit symbol random number and the hit symbol random number, a so-called "initial value changing method" is adopted in which the start value is changed each time the random number makes a round by using an initial value random number (generated by software). Each of the random numbers may be updated by a counter method by +1 or 1, or may be a random update by which all values within the range appear in a scattered manner without duplication until one cycle.
That is, the big hit random number is a random number that is updated only by hardware, and the big hit symbol random number and the hit random number are random numbers that are updated by hardware and software.

After the initial value random number updating process of step A1050, the game control device 100 determines the power supply device 40.
The power failure monitoring signal input from 0 is read through the port and the data bus and the number of checks is set (A1051), and it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is on (A10).
52). When the power failure monitoring signal is not on (result of A1052 is “N”), step A
The process returns to the initial value random number updating process of 1050. That is, when the power failure has not occurred, the initial value random number update processing and the power failure monitoring signal check (loop processing) are repeated. By permitting the interrupt (A1049) before the initial value random number updating process (A1050), when the timer interrupt occurs during the initial value random number updating process, the interrupt process is preferentially executed, and the timer interrupt is initialized. It is possible to prevent the interrupt processing from being stressed by making the value random number update processing wait. Note that the processing of steps A1046, A1047, A1048, and A1050 relating to the initial value random number update may not be executed during the setting change (during the setting variable state).

In addition to the main process, the initial value random number updating process of step A1050 includes a method of performing the initial value random number updating process also in the timer interrupt process. When such a method is adopted, both of the initial value random number updating processes are performed. In order to prevent the update process from being executed, when the initial value random number update process is performed in the main process, it is necessary to disable the interrupt and then update and cancel the interrupt. On the other hand, if the initial value random number updating process in the timer interrupt process is not performed as in the present embodiment and only the main process is performed, there is no problem even if the interrupt is released before the initial value random number updating process. No, there is an advantage that the main process is simplified thereby.

When the power failure monitoring signal is on (the result of A1052 is “Y”), the game control device 10
In 0, it is determined whether or not the ON state of the power failure monitoring signal continues for the number of checks set in the process of step A1051 (A1053). Then, when the power failure monitoring signal is not kept on for the number of checks (result of A1053 is “N”), the process returns to step A1052, and it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is on.

Further, the game control device 100 once interrupts when the power failure monitoring signal remains on for the number of checks (the result of A1053 is “Y”), that is, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred. Is prohibited (A1054), and OFF data is output to all output ports (A105).
5).

After that, the game control device 100 saves the power failure inspection area check data 1 in the power failure inspection area 1 (A1056) and saves the power failure inspection area check data 2 in the power failure inspection area 2 (
A1057). Further, a checksum calculation process for calculating a checksum at the time of power-off of the RWM is executed (A1058), and the calculated checksum is saved (A1059).
). Finally, the process of prohibiting access to the RWM is executed (A1060), and the process waits until the power of the gaming machine is cut off.

In this way, by saving the check data in the power failure inspection area and calculating the checksum at the time of power shutdown, it is possible to check whether the information stored in the RWM before power shutdown is correctly backed up. It can be judged at the time of re-input.

From the above, the main control means (game control device 100) for controlling the game in general, and the sub-control means (payout control device 200, effect control device 300, etc.) for performing various controls according to the instructions from the main control means. ), and the main control means delays the start of the main control means when the power is turned on, and sets a predetermined waiting time for waiting for the start of the slave control device (game control device 100), and a power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) for monitoring the occurrence of power failure during the predetermined standby time.

In addition, a power supply device 400 that supplies power to various devices is provided, and the power supply device 400 is configured to output a power failure monitoring signal when detecting the occurrence of a power failure, and the power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) When the power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period, it is determined that the power failure has occurred.

Further, the main control means (game control device 100), RAM111c capable of storing data,
An initialization operation unit (initialization switch) that can be operated from the outside, an initialization unit (game control device 100) that initializes the data stored in the RAM 111c based on the operation of the initialization operation unit, The operation state of the initialization means is read before the start of the waiting time.

Further, the main control means (game control device 100) allows access to the RAM 111c after the waiting time has elapsed.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, the timer interrupt processing will be described. FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing the procedure of timer interrupt processing. The timer interrupt process is started when a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator is input to the CPU 111a. When a timer interrupt occurs in the gaming microcomputer 111, timer interrupt processing is started.

When the timer interrupt process is started, the game control device 100 first designates the register bank 1 as the register bank to be used (A1301), and sets the upper address of the RAM start address in a predetermined register (A1302). Switching from register bank 0 used in the main process to register bank 1 at the start of the timer interrupt process is equivalent to saving the registers used in the main process. When the timer interrupt process is started, the interrupt is automatically disabled.

Next, the game control device 100 inputs from various sensors and switches, captures signals,
That is, the input process of reading the state of each input port is executed (A1303). further,
Based on the output data set by various processes, solenoid (special winning opening solenoid 39b)
Output processing for performing drive control of the actuators such as is executed (A1304). If the firing prohibition signal is output in step A1005 of the main process,
By performing this output processing, a firing permission signal is output, and the firing permission signal can be set to the permission state.

Next, the game control device 100, the random number update process 1 (A1305), the random number update process 2 (A1).
306) is executed. The random number update process 1 is a process for updating the initial value (start value) of the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number that is the target of the initial value random number update process. The random number updating process 2 is a process of updating the variation pattern random number for determining the variation pattern in the variation display game of Toku-zu 1 and Toku-zu 2. Note that the random number update process 1 and the random number update process 2 do not have to be executed when the probability setting is being changed (during the setting variable state).
After that, the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, the gate switch 34a, the winning opening switch 35a, the special winning opening switch 39a is monitored to see if a normal signal is input, and the error is monitored (front frame or A winning opening switch/state monitoring process for checking whether the glass frame is opened or not is executed (A1307).

Next, the game control device 100 executes probability setting value changing processing for changing the probability setting value (A1308). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the probability setting is being changed (during setting variable state) (A1309). Whether or not the probability setting is being changed is determined by the probability setting value changing flag (A103
It can be determined by 8). Next, it is determined whether or not the probability setting is being confirmed (in the setting confirmation state) (A1310). If the probability setting value confirmation mode flag described below is set,
It can be determined that the probability setting is being confirmed.

The game control device 100 determines whether the probability setting is not being changed or the probability setting is being confirmed (A131
The result of 0 is "N"), and the command set in the transmission buffer in various processes is issued by the payout control device 2
The payout command transmission process for outputting to 00 is executed (A1311). Further, a special figure game process for performing a process related to the special figure variation display game is executed (A1312), and then a general figure game process for performing a process related to the general figure variation display game is executed (A1313). Game control device 10
0 is unnecessary when the probability setting is being changed (the result of A1309 is “Y”) or when the probability setting is being confirmed (the result of A1310 is “Y”), and therefore the payout command transmission process (A
1311), special figure game processing (A1312), and general figure game processing (A1313) are not executed, and the processing proceeds to step A1314.

Next, the game control device 100 executes a segment LED edit process which is provided in the gaming machine 10 and drives the segment LEDs for displaying the special figure variation game and various information regarding the game so as to display desired contents. (A1314).

Further, the game control device 100 executes a magnet fraud monitoring process of checking the detection signal from the magnetic sensor switch 61 to determine whether there is any abnormality (A1315). For example, in the magnet fraud monitoring process, the magnet fraud occurrence flag is saved in the magnet fraud flag area when there is an abnormality. Further, a radio wave fraud monitoring process (board radio wave fraud monitoring process) for checking whether a detection signal from the radio wave sensor 62 of the game board is normal or not is executed (A1316). For example, in the radio wave fraud monitoring process, the board radio wave fraud flag is saved in the board radio wave fraud flag area when there is an abnormality.

After that, the game control device 100 executes an external information editing process of setting a signal to be output to various external devices in the output buffer (A1317). Then, a state display edit output process of editing and outputting the output data to the state display device 152 is executed (A1318). In the state display edit output process, as the output data to the state display device 152, a character product ratio, a winning rate, a number of discharged balls, or the like may be calculated. In the status display edit output process, when the power is turned on (power is restored), the checksum of the status display work area is calculated, and if it does not match the checksum when the power is turned off, the status display work area and status display work area are displayed. You may clear the stack area. afterwards,
Terminate the timer interrupt processing. Note that when the timer interrupt processing returns, restoration of the interrupt disabled state and restoration of the specified register bank is configured to be performed automatically.
Depending on U, after the external information editing process, a process of permitting interruption or a process of returning the designation of the register bank to the register bank 0 may be performed.

[Output processing]
Next, details of the output processing (A1304) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt processing will be described. FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the output process.

The game control device 100 first outputs (resets) off data to the port 135 (see FIG. 3) that outputs the data of the segment of the collective display device (LED) 50 (A1601).
Next, the data output to the solenoid output port 134 which outputs the data of the special winning opening solenoid 39b is combined and output (A1602).

Then, the game control device 100 updates the value of the digit counter for sequentially scanning the digit lines of the collective display device (LED) 50 (A1603). Further, the output data of the digit line of the LED corresponding to the value of the digit counter is acquired (A1604). Then, the acquired data and the external information data are combined (A1605), and the combined data is output to the fourth output port 136 for digit output/external information output (A1606). After that, the output data of the segment line is loaded from the segment area in the RWM corresponding to the value of the digit counter (A1607), and the loaded data is output to the third output port 135 for segment output.
To (A1608).

Next, the game control device 100 loads and combines the data to be output to the external information terminal 71 (A1609), and further combines the combined data and the output data of the launch permission (A161).
0), the finally combined data is the fifth output port 137 for outputting the external information/launch permission signal.
To (A1611).

Next, the game control device 100 sets off output data of the probability setting value display (A161).
2). The off output data is output data (blank data for extinguishing light) in a period in which the probability setting value display is not performed. Then, it is determined whether the probability setting value display permission flag for permitting the display of the probability setting value is set (A1613). The probability setting value display permission flag is set in the probability setting value changing process described later.

The game control device 100, when the probability setting value display permission flag is set (A16
13 is "Y"), the probability setting value display data is loaded from the probability setting value display data area (A1614), and the loaded probability setting value display data is output to the probability setting value display output port (sixth output port 141). It is output (A1615). If the probability setting value display permission flag is not set (result of A1613 is "N"), the probability setting value display data is not loaded, and the OFF output data is set to the probability setting value display output port (sixth output port 141). To (A161
5). Therefore, when the probability setting value display permission flag is set, the probability setting value display device 143 displays the probability setting value, and when the probability setting value display permission flag is not set, the probability setting value display device 143. Turns off (blank display).

Next, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 1 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test device is loaded and combined, and the combined data is output to the test terminal output port 1 on the relay board 70. (A1616). After that, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 2 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test device is loaded and combined, and the combined data is output to the test terminal output port 2 on the relay board 70. (A1617).

Next, the game control device 100 loads and synthesizes the data to be output to the test terminal output port 3 on the relay board 70 which outputs the test signal to the test shooting test device, and the test terminal output port 3 on the relay board 70. The combined data is output to (A1618). Further, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 4 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal of the test-shooting test device is loaded and combined, and the combined data is output to the test terminal output port 4 on the relay board 70 ( A1619
). Then, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test device is loaded and combined, and the combined data is output to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay board 70. (A1620), the output process ends.

After that, the game control device 100 loads the test signal output data of the probability set value (A1)
621). Here, the display data itself of the probability setting value display device 143 (7-segment type display), that is, the probability setting value display data in the probability setting value display data area is output as the test signal output data relating to the probability setting value. The test signal output data may be numerical data (1 to 6) representing the set value, or may be output data of another form. Then, it is determined whether the setting key switch 93 is on (A1622). When the setting key switch 93 is ON (result of A1622 is “Y”), the loaded data and the setting key switch ON information are combined (A1623), and the combined data is output to the test signal output port 6 (
A1624). On the other hand, when the setting key switch 93 is off (the result of A1622 is "
N”), the test signal output data of the probability setting value is output to the test signal output port 6 as it is (
A1624).

[Winning prize switch/Status monitoring processing]
FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing a procedure of a winning opening switch/state monitoring process. The winning opening switch/state monitoring process is executed in step A1307 in the timer interrupt process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the probability setting is being changed (during setting variable state) (A2001). The game control device 100, if the probability setting is not being changed (A2001
Is “N”), it is determined whether the probability setting is being confirmed (during setting confirmation) (A20).
02). When the probability setting confirmation is not in progress (result of A2001 is “N”), the monitoring process from step A2003 to A2010 is executed as usual. On the other hand, when the probability setting is being changed (result of A2001 is “Y”) or when the probability setting is being confirmed (result of A2002 is “Y”), the glass frame 15 may be released. Since there is a possibility that a game ball can be inserted into any of the winning openings by hand, and there is no point in performing monitoring processing or the like, step A20.
The monitoring process from 03 to A2010 is not executed, and the process proceeds to step A2011.

When the probability setting is not being changed (the result of A2001 is “N”), the game control device 100,
The winning prize port monitoring table 1 corresponding to one of the large winning hole switches 39a (two) in the special winning part (special variation winning device 39) is prepared (A2003). Then, despite the fact that the special winning opening is not open, whether or not there is an illegal winning in the special winning opening is monitored, and the fraud & winning monitoring process for detecting a normal winning is executed (A2004).

After that, the game control device 100 prepares a winning opening monitoring table 2 corresponding to the other one of the large winning opening switches 39a (two pieces) in the special winning opening (special variation winning device 39) (A2005).
Then, the fraud & prize monitoring process of monitoring the fraudulent prize and detecting the normal prize is executed (A2006).

Then, the game control device 100 prepares a winning opening monitoring table corresponding to the starting opening 2 switch 37a in the normal variation winning device 37 (A2007). Then, the fraud & prize monitoring process of monitoring the fraudulent prize and detecting the normal prize is executed (A2008). Next, a prize-winning port monitoring table of a winning-winning port switch that does not require fraudulent monitoring is prepared (A2009). The winning opening switch that does not require unauthorized monitoring is the starting opening 1 switch 36a and the winning opening switch (SW) 35a of the general winning opening 35.

Next, the game control device 100 executes a winning number counter updating process for updating the winning number (
A2010). Then, the status scan counter for sequentially designating which switch or signal of the plurality of switches and signals whose status is to be monitored is to be monitored this time is updated (A2011). The status scan counter is updated in the range of 0 to 3.

After that, the game control device 100 prepares the gaming machine status monitoring table 1 for setting the status to be monitored according to the value of the status scan counter (A2012). Then, a gaming machine status check process for determining a status such as whether an error occurs (A2013)
.. The details of the gaming machine status check processing will be described later.

By referring the value of the status scan counter to the gaming machine status monitoring table 1, when the value of the status scan counter is 0, the status based on the abnormality detection signal 1 output by the occurrence of disconnection of the switch connector (switch abnormality) 1 error) monitoring is set, and when the value of the state scan counter is 1, monitoring of the state (shooting ball out error) based on the shot ball out switch signal from the payout control device 200 is set. The value of the status scan counter is 2
If the value is 3, the monitoring of the state (overflow error) based on the overflow switch signal is set, and if the value of the status scan counter is 3, the monitoring of the state (payout abnormal error) based on the payout abnormal status signal is set.

Next, the game control device 100 prepares the gaming machine status monitoring table 2 for setting the status to be monitored according to the value of the status scan counter (A2014). Then, the gaming machine status check processing for determining a status such as whether an error has occurred is executed (A2015).

By referring the value of the status scan counter to the gaming machine status monitoring table 2, when the value of the status scan counter is 0, the status (glass frame opening error) is monitored based on the signal output from the glass frame opening detection switch. Is set, and when the value of the status scan counter is 1, monitoring of the status (body frame opening error, front frame opening error) based on the signal output from the front frame opening detection switch is set. Further, when the value of the status scan counter is 2, monitoring of the status based on the frame radio wave incorrect signal (frame radio wave incorrect) is set, and when the value of the status scan counter is 3, monitoring of the status based on the touch switch signal is set. Is set.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the status scan counter is 0 (A2016). If the value of the error scan counter is not 0 (A2016
Result of "N"), the winning opening switch/state monitoring process is ended. In this case, there is no status monitoring target in the gaming machine status monitoring table 3 to be referred to next.

In addition, the game control device 100, if the value of the error scan counter is 0 (A2
The result of 016 is “Y”), the gaming machine status monitoring table 3 is prepared (A2017), and gaming machine status check processing for determining a status such as whether an error occurs (A2018) is executed.
..

By referring the value of the status scan counter to the gaming machine status monitoring table 3, when the value of the status scan counter is 0, the status based on the abnormality detection signal 2 output due to occurrence of disconnection of the switch connector (switch abnormality) 2 error) monitoring is set. The gaming machine status monitoring table 3 is not defined when the status scan counter is 1 to 3.

After that, the game control device 100 executes a payout busy signal check process for setting a busy signal status (payout busy signal flag) based on a payout busy signal indicating whether the payout control device 200 can start payout control (A2019). ), and ends the winning opening switch/state monitoring process.

Since the processing from steps A2017 to A2019 is executed only when the value of the status scan counter updated for each timer interrupt is 0, it is executed once every four timer interrupts. .. That is, if the timer interrupt is performed every 4 ms, 1
The processing from A2017 to A2019 is performed every 6 ms.

In the fraud & prize winning monitoring process (A2008), a special winning opening (special variation winning device 39
) And the number of prizes and the number of balls acquired by role (total of the number of prize balls) related to the regular variable prize device 37 are counted and stored, and information of the number of prizes and the number of balls acquired by role is set as a production command. Good.
In the winning number counter updating process (A2010), the number of winnings and the number of winning balls for each character (total of the number of award balls) regarding the starting winning port 36 and the general winning port 35 are counted and stored, and the number of winnings and each character are classified. Information on the number of acquired balls may be set as a performance command. Further, in the winning opening switch/state monitoring process (FIG. 8), the number of out balls (the number of discharged balls) is counted and stored by the out ball detection switch, and the information of the number of out balls is a production command (out ball number command). May be set as The payout rate is the ratio (ratio) of the total number of prize balls (the total number of balls acquired by all character items) to the number of discharged balls. The character ratio is, for example, the ratio (%) of the number of prize balls (the number of balls acquired by character) obtained by winning the prize hole, out of the total number of prize balls (=so-called continuous character ratio). is there. In the state display edit output process (A1318), the output ratio of the state display device 152 may be calculated such as a character product ratio, a payout rate, and the number of discharged balls.

[Game machine status check process]
FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the gaming machine status check processing. The gaming machine status check processing is step A2013 in the winning opening switch/status monitoring processing shown in FIG.
It is executed in A2015 and A2018.

The game control device 100 first acquires a state monitoring table corresponding to the state scan counter (A2201). The state scan counter is set to a value in the range of 0 to 3 corresponding to the gaming state. The relationship between the status monitoring table and the status scan counter is as described in the winning port switch/status monitoring process shown in FIG.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the signal to be checked is on (
A2202). When the signal to be checked is not on (the result of A2202 is “N”), that is, when the signal to be checked is off, the state off flag is prepared as the state flag (A2203) and the target state off command is acquired. And prepare (A2204). Further, the target state-off monitoring timer comparison value is acquired (A2205). The state off flag indicates a normal state with respect to an error system signal, and indicates a non-touch state regarding a touch switch signal.

On the other hand, when the signal to be checked is on (result of A2202 is “Y”), the game control device 100 prepares a state on flag as a state flag (A2206), acquires a target state on command, and prepares. Yes (A2207). Further, the target state-on monitoring timer comparison value is acquired (A2208). The state-on flag indicates an abnormal or incorrect state regarding an error system signal, and indicates a state with a touch regarding a touch switch signal.

When the process of step A2205 or step A2208 ends, the game control device 100
Determines whether the value of the target signal control area matches the state of the acquired signal (A2
209). If they match (the result of A2209 is “Y”), the process moves to step A2212. When they do not match (result of A2209 is “N”), the acquired signal state is saved in the target signal control area (A2210) and the target state monitoring timer is cleared (
A2211).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 updates the target state monitoring timer by +1 (A2212).
.. Further, it is determined whether or not the updated value of the state monitoring timer is equal to or larger than the corresponding timer comparison value (A2213). When the updated value of the state monitoring timer is less than the corresponding timer comparison value (result of A2213 is “N”), the gaming machine state check process is ended.

On the other hand, when the updated value of the state monitoring timer is equal to or more than the corresponding timer comparison value (result of A2213 is “Y”), the game control device 100 updates the state monitoring timer by −1, and the timer comparison value − It remains at a value of 1 (A2214). Further, it is determined whether or not the prepared status flag matches the value of the target status flag area (A2215). If they match (A221
The result of 5 is "Y"), and the gaming machine state check processing is ended.

On the other hand, when the prepared state flag does not match the value of the target state flag area (result of A2215 is “N”), the game control device 100 saves the prepared state flag in the target state flag area. Yes (A2216). Finally, effect command setting processing for setting effect commands is executed (A2217), and the gaming machine state check processing is ended. The effect command here is either a state off command or a state on command. If the state on command is an error command, the effect control device 300 is caused to start error notification. In the effect command setting process, the effect command is written in the serial transmission buffer, and the effect command is transmitted to the effect control device 300.

[Probability setting value change processing]
Next, details of the probability setting value changing process (A1308) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the probability setting value changing process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the probability setting value is being changed (during setting variable state) (A2401). When the probability setting value is not being changed (the result of A2401 is “N”),
Probability set value confirmation processing for confirming the probability set value is executed (A2402).

When the probability setting value is being changed, the game control device 100 (the result of A2401 is “Y”)
If the probability setting value extinguishing timer is not 0, -1 is updated (A2403), and it is determined whether the probability setting value extinguishing timer is 0 (A2404). When the probability setting value extinction timer is 0 (result of A2404 is “Y”), the probability setting value display permission flag is set (A2405),
The process moves to step A2406. If the probability setting value extinction timer is not 0 (A24
If the result of 04 is "N"), nothing is done and the process proceeds to step A2406.

Then, in step A2406, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the probability setting value has been changed (A2406). If the probability setting value changed flag, which will be described later, is set, the probability setting value has been changed. If the probability setting value has been changed (A2
If the result of 406 is “Y”), the setting change end processing of steps A2416 to A2421 is executed.

If the probability setting value has not been changed, the game control device 100 (the result of A2406 is "N
)), it is determined whether or not there is an input from the setting value change switch 102 (A2407). If there is no input from the setting value change switch 102 (result of A2407 is “N”), the process proceeds to step A2411.

The game control device 100, when there is an input from the setting value change switch 102 (A240
The result of 7 is "Y"), and the value of the work probability setting value area is updated by +1 in the range of 0 to 5 (A24).
08). In this way, each time the setting value change switch 102 is operated, the value in the work probability setting value area is increased by one. If the setting value change switch 102 is operated after the value of the working probability setting value area becomes 5, the value of the working probability setting value area may be reset to 0.
Values 0 to 5 in the work probability setting value area correspond to 6-step probability setting values 1 to 6. The probability setting value is not limited to 6 levels.

Then, the game control device 100 saves the probability setting value display data corresponding to the work probability setting value in the probability setting value display data area (A2409). Next, an initial value (for example, 100 ms) is saved in the probability setting value extinction timer area (A2410). This initial value corresponds to an extinguishing period (blank period) in which the probability setting value display device 143 is extinguished (blank display).

As described above, when the probability set value extinction timer is 0, the probability set value display permission flag is set, so that the probability set value display data sets the probability as the probability set value (working probability set value) being changed. When the probability set value display timer 143 is displayed on the set value display device 143 and the probability set value extinction timer is not 0, the probability set value display device 143 is turned off. Since the probability setting value extinguishing timer turns off the setting value changing switch 102 (setting value changing button) for a predetermined extinguishing period, even when the setting is only one stage (when the setting value is only 1) The operation of the set value change switch 102 can be visually confirmed on the probability set value display device 143.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not there is a touch switch signal input from the touch switch provided on the operation handle 24 (A2411). When the touch switch signal is not input (result of A2411 is “N”), the probability setting value changing process ends. When the touch switch signal is input (result of A2411 is “Y”), the value of the work probability setting value area is loaded and saved in the probability setting value area (A2412). The touch switch signal serves as a confirmation signal for confirming the set value. Then, the values 0 to 5 corresponding to the confirmed probability setting value are stored in the probability setting value area.

It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the probability setting value is determined and stored in the probability setting value area when a predetermined time has elapsed after the setting key switch 93 was turned off or the setting variable state was entered. Further, an operable confirmation button switch (operation means, operation unit) may be newly provided in the game control device 100, and a signal from this confirmation button switch may be used as a confirmation signal for confirming the set value. .. That is, instead of operating the touch switch, the operation of the newly provided confirm button switch may be used as the confirm operation.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 saves the probability setting value display data corresponding to the probability setting value in the probability setting value display data area (A2413). As a result, the confirmed probability setting value is displayed on the probability setting value display device 143. Then, a probability setting value changed flag indicating that the probability setting value has been changed is set (A2414), and a command for changing the probability setting value indicating that the probability setting value has been changed is output to the effect control device 300 (effect control. Send to board (A241
5) Then, the probability setting value changing process ends.

In the process of ending the setting change of steps A2416 to A2421, the game control device 10
For 0, first, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 93 is off (A2416). When the setting key switch 93 is in the on state (result of A2416 is “N”), the probability setting value changing process ends. When the setting key switch 93 is in the off state (the result of A2416 is “Y”)
, RAM clear start address 3 is set (A2417), and the RAM area to be cleared is cleared to 0 (A2418). The RAM area to be cleared here is clear area #3 in FIG. 5C.
Becomes The clear area #3 includes a control information area (area from the power failure inspection area 1 to the checksum area) and a game control stack area, and excludes the probability setting value area and the random number area. The clear area #3 is obtained by removing the random area from the clear area #2, and the random numbers updated during the setting change are not wasted. By clearing the RAM area to be cleared to 0, the information and flags used for setting changes such as the work probability setting value area information, the probability setting value changing flag, and the probability setting value changed flag are cleared. It

Next, the game control device 100 saves the initial value at the time of RAM initialization in the area to be initialized (A2419). Since the setting change is completed, the initial value of the security signal control timer (described later) for outputting the security signal is saved, and the external device (hall Output to a computer). After that, the probability setting value display data corresponding to the probability setting value is saved in the probability setting value display data area (A2420). As a result, the probability setting value at the time of ending the setting change is displayed and maintained on the probability setting value display device 143.

Next, the game control device 100 transmits a probability setting change end command indicating that the probability setting change has ended to the effect control device 300 (effect control board) (A2421), and the main process (
Returning to FIG. 5B), the process proceeds to step A1049. The commands to be transmitted here include the model designation command, the decoration special figure 1 hold number command, the decoration special figure 2 hold number command, the probability information command, the set value information command (probability set value information command), and the probability setting change end. Command (RAM initialization command may be used). Depending on the model, a performance mode information command, a performance number information command, and a high probability number information command are transmitted. Upon receiving the command for ending the probability setting change, the production control device 300 displays a customer waiting demo on the display device 41, for example, and notifies the RAM initialization (RAM clear) by the sound of the LED and the speaker of the panel decoration device 46 and the like. Do it for 30 seconds.

[Probability setting value confirmation processing]
Next, details of the probability setting value confirmation processing (A2402) in the above-described probability setting value changing processing will be described. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the probability setting value confirmation processing.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not it is in the probability set value confirmation mode (a set value confirmable state) in which the probability set value can be confirmed (A2501). When the probability setting value confirmation mode flag described later is set, it can be determined that the probability setting value confirmation mode is in progress. When the probability setting value confirmation mode is in effect (result of A2501 is “Y”), the processes of step A2509 and thereafter are executed.

The gaming control device 100, when the probability setting value confirmation mode is not in progress (the result of A2501 is "
N”), the probability setting value display permission flag is cleared (A2502). Then, it is determined whether or not a game is being played (A2503). For example, if the variable display game is being executed or the jackpot is being hit, it can be determined that the game is being played. When the game is being played (the result of A2503 is "Y"), the probability setting value confirmation processing is ended so that the confirmation of the probability setting value becomes impossible. If not playing (A
The result of 2503 is "N", and it is determined whether the setting key switch 93 is on (A2).
504). When the setting key switch 93 is off (result of A2504 is “N”), the probability setting value confirmation process ends.

When the setting key switch 93 is on (result of A2504 is “Y”), the game control device 100 sets the probability setting value confirmation mode flag (A2505). This allows
When the probability setting value is not being changed (in the setting variable state) (the result of A2401 is “N”)
When the setting key switch 93 is turned on, the probability setting value confirmation mode (setting value confirmable state) in which the probability setting value can be confirmed is entered. Then, the probability setting value display permission flag is set (A2
506). As a result, the output process (FIG. 7) causes the probability setting value display device 143 to display the probability setting value based on the probability setting value display data loaded from the probability setting value display data area.

Next, the game control device 100 saves the initial value in the security signal control timer area so that the security signal can be output (A2507). When the set value is confirmed, a security signal is output, and the fact that the front frame 12 is opened can be output to an external device (hall computer, etc.). The command for confirming the probability set value is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (effect control board) (A2508), and the probability set value confirmation process ends.

When the game control device 100 is in the probability set value confirmation mode (the result of A2501 is "
Y”), and determines whether the setting key switch 93 is on (A2509). When the setting key switch 93 is on (result of A2509 is “Y”), the probability setting value confirmation mode continues and the probability setting value confirmation probability setting value confirmation processing ends.

When the setting key switch 93 is off (result of A2509 is “N”), the game control device 100 clears the probability setting value confirmation mode flag (A2510). Therefore, when the setting key switch 93 is turned off, the probability setting value confirmation mode ends. And
In order to prevent the probability setting value display device 143 from displaying the probability setting value, the probability setting value display permission flag is cleared (A2511). Subsequently, a command for ending the confirmation of the probability set value indicating that the confirmation of the probability set value has been completed is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (effect control board) (A2).
512).

Although the setting value changing switch 102 is configured to be usable also as the RAM initializing switch (RAM clear switch) in the above, a RAM initializing switch may be provided separately from the setting value changing switch 102. In this case, at power-on (power restoration),
If the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch are on, the setting is in a variable state (setting change state), and if the setting key switch 93 is on and the RAM initialization switch is off, the setting confirmation state (set value confirmation possible state) If the setting key switch 93 is off and the RAM initialization switch is on, RAM initialization (RAM clear) is possible, and the setting key switch 93
If the RAM initialization switch is off, the power may be turned on normally (power recovery). Further, the setting value (setting) may be settled when the setting key switch 93 is turned off.

[Special game processing]
Next, details of the special figure game process (A1312) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure game process. In the special figure game processing, the input of the starting opening 1 switch 36a and the starting opening 2 switch 37a is monitored, the entire processing relating to the special figure changing display game is controlled, and the display of the special drawing is set.

The game control device 100 first executes a starting opening switch monitoring process for monitoring the winning of the starting opening 1 switch 36a and the starting opening 2 switch 37a (A2601). In the starting opening switch monitoring process, when a gaming ball wins the starting winning opening 36 and the normal variation winning device 37 that constitutes the second starting winning opening, various random numbers (such as big hit random numbers) are extracted and a special figure variation display based on the winning is made. Prior to the start of the game, a game result pre-judgment is performed in which the game result based on the winning prize is pre-judged. In addition,
Details of the starting port switch monitoring process will be described later.

Next, the game control device 100 executes a special winning opening switch monitoring process (A2602).
In the special winning opening switch monitoring process, the detection of the game ball by the count switch 39a provided in the special variation winning device 39 is monitored. The details of the special winning opening switch monitoring process will be described later.

Next, the game control device 100 updates -1 if the special figure game processing timer is not 0 (1
(A2603). The special figure game processing timer is timed by the interrupt period (4 msec) of the timer interrupt processing by updating -1. The minimum value of the special figure game processing timer is set to 0. Next, it is determined whether the special figure game processing timer is 0 (A2604). When the special figure game processing timer is not 0 (result of A2604 is “N”), the process proceeds to step A2619.

The game control device 100, when the special figure game processing timer is 0 (the result of A2604 is "
Y”), that is, when the time has expired or has already expired, the special figure game sequence branch table to be referred to for branching to the process corresponding to the special figure game process number is set in the register (A2605). .. Further, the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure game processing number is acquired using the special figure game sequence branch table (A2606).
Subsequently, a subroutine call is executed by the special figure game process number to execute a game branch process corresponding to the special figure game process number (A2607).

If the game processing number is “0” in step A2607, the game control device 100,
Special figure normal processing that monitors the fluctuation start of the special figure fluctuation display game, sets the fluctuation start of the special figure fluctuation display game, sets the effect, and sets the information necessary for performing the special figure fluctuation process It is executed (A2608). Details of the special figure normal process will be described later with reference to FIG.

If the game process number is “1” in step A2607, the game control device 100,
A special figure changing process for setting the stop display time of the special figure and setting information necessary for performing the special figure displaying process is executed (A2609). For details of the special figure changing process, see FIG.
It will be described later in 8.

If the game processing number is “2” in step A2607, the game control device 100,
If the game result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit, in order to set the fanfare command according to the type of big hit, set the fanfare time according to the big winning opening pattern of each big hit, and process during the fanfare/interval The special figure displaying process for setting the information necessary for the process is executed (A2610). For example, in the special figure display processing, if the result of the special figure change display game is a big hit, necessary information such as big hit fanfare command (effect command), big hit fanfare time, probability information command (low probability), etc. are set, The processing number "3" related to the fanfare/interval processing is set and saved in the special figure game processing number area. If the result of the special figure variation display game is a small hit, set the necessary information such as the small hit fanfare command (effect command) and the small hit fanfare time, and set the processing number "7" related to the small hit fanfare middle processing. Save it in the special figure game processing number area. If the result of the special figure variation display game is not a big hit or a small hit, the process number "0" related to the special figure normal process is set and saved in the special figure game process number area.

If the game processing number is “3” in step A2607, the game control device 100,
The fanfare/interval processing for setting the opening time of the special winning opening, updating the number of times of opening, and setting the information necessary for performing the processing during opening of the special winning opening is executed (A2611). For example, in the fanfare/interval processing, necessary information such as the round command (effect command) corresponding to the round of the round game to be executed and the opening time of the special winning opening is set, and the processing number related to the processing during the big winning opening is set. "4" is set and saved in the special figure game processing number area.

If the game processing number is “4” in step A2607, the game control device 100:
If the big hit round is not the final round, set the interval command while setting the ending command if it is the final round, and set the information necessary to perform the big winning opening remaining ball processing. Medium processing is executed (A2612). For example, in the process of opening the special winning opening, necessary information such as an interval command and an ending command as an effect command is set, and a processing number “5” related to the special winning opening remaining ball processing is set, and the special figure game processing number area is set. Save to.

If the game processing number is “5” in step A2607, the game control device 100,
If the jackpot round is the final round, the processing to set the time for discharging the remaining balls in the jackpot and the jackpot remaining ball processing to set the information necessary for the jackpot end processing etc. It is executed (A2613). For example, in the special winning opening remaining ball processing, if it is not the final round, the interval time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area, and the processing number "3" related to the fanfare/interval processing is set in the special figure game processing number area. Save. If it is the final round, the ending time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area, the processing number "6" relating to the big hit end processing is set, and the ending time is saved in the special figure game processing number area.

If the game processing number is “6” in step A2607, the game control device 100,
Special figure execution The big hit end processing which sets the information and the like necessary to execute the processing (A
2614). For example, in the jackpot end process, necessary information such as the probability state after the jackpot state ends and the normal electric power support state (time-saving state) after the jackpot state is set, and the probability information command (production) Command), set a process number “0” related to special figure normal processing, and save it in the special figure game process number area. The probability information command includes the number of continuous games (probability/high probability/high probability/low probability) after the big hit state ends, and the number of continuous games (time reduction fluctuation count, power support count) in the normal power support state (time saving state) after the big hit state ends. Information is included.

If the game processing number is “7” in step A2607, the game control device 100,
The small hit fanfare middle processing is executed to set the opening time of the special winning opening, update the number of times of opening, and set the information necessary for performing the small hit processing (A2615). For example, in the small hitting fanfare medium processing, necessary information such as the small winning opening time of the special winning opening is set, and the processing number "8" related to the small winning medium processing is set and saved in the special figure game processing number area.

If the game processing number is “8” in step A2607, the game control device 100,
The small hit mid-range process is executed to set the information necessary for the small hit remaining ball process (A2).
616). For example, in the small hitting process, necessary information such as the small hit remaining ball processing time is set, and the processing number "9" relating to the special winning opening remaining ball processing is set and saved in the special figure game processing number area.

If the game processing number is "9" in step A2607, the game control device 100,
Execute the small hit remaining ball processing that sets the information necessary for performing the small hit end processing (A
2617). For example, in the small hit remaining ball process, necessary information such as the small hit ending time is set, and the process number "10" related to the special figure small hit end process is set and saved in the special figure 1 game process number area.

When the game process number is “10” in step A2607, the game control device 100 executes a small hit ending process for setting information necessary for executing the special figure normal process (
A2618).

When the process based on the special figure game process number is finished, the game control device 100 prepares a special figure 1 change control table for controlling the change of the special figure 1 display device 51 (A2619), and then the special figure 1 display device. The symbol variation control process relating to 51 is executed (A2620). Then, after preparing a special figure 2 fluctuation control table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 2 display 52 (A2621), the symbol fluctuation control process relating to the special figure 2 display 52 is executed (A2622). The details of the symbol variation control process will be described later with reference to FIG.

[Starting switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the starting opening switch monitoring process (A2601) in the special figure game process will be described. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the starting opening switch monitoring process.

The game control device 100 first prepares a winning prize monitoring table for the start winning opening 36 (starting opening 1) (A2701), executes a hard random number acquisition process (A2702), and starts the winning opening 36.
It is determined whether or not there is a prize (A2703). If there is no winning in the starting winning slot 36 (
When the result of A2703 is "N"), the processes of step A2709 and subsequent steps are executed. On the other hand, if there is a winning in the starting winning opening 36 (result of A2703 is “Y”), it is determined whether or not it is during special time saving (during normal power support state) (A2704).

When the game control device 100 determines that it is not during special time saving (during normal power support state) (A
When the result of 2704 is “N”), the processes of step A2707 and thereafter are executed. On the other hand, when it is during special time saving (during normal power support state) (result of A2704 is “Y”), right-handing instruction notification command is prepared as a production command (A2705), and production command setting processing is executed ( A2706).

That is, in the normal power support state (time saving state), regardless of the probability state (high-probability state/low-probability state) of the variable display game, the right-handing instruction notification command is prepared and the effect command setting process is executed. .. In the case of this embodiment, the start winning port 36 is not won unless the player hits it left, and the normal variable winning device 37 is won if the player is not hit right. Also, the game ball does not pass through the universal figure starting gate 34 unless it is hit to the right. Therefore, in the normal power support state (time saving state), right-handed is more advantageous than left-handed, but if there is a winning at the start winning port 36 during the normal power support state (that is, in the normal power support state When left-handed), a right-handing instruction notification command is transmitted to the effect control device 300, and the effect control device 300 gives an instruction to instruct right-handing (
Warning) is executed by the display device 41 or the like.

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a table for setting information on hold by the starting winning opening 36 (starting opening 1) (A2707), and then executes special figure starting opening switch common processing (A2).
708). Then, a winning monitor table for the second starting winning opening (normal variation winning apparatus 37) is prepared (A2709), a hard random number acquisition process is executed (A2710), and it is determined whether or not there is a winning at the second starting winning opening. The determination is made (A2711). If there is no winning in the 2nd starting prize hole (
When the result of A2711 is "N"), the starting port switch monitoring process is ended.

On the other hand, the game control device 100, if there is a winning in the second starting winning opening (the result of A2711 is "Y"), whether or not the ordinary electric auditors (ordinary variation winning device 37) is operating. That is, it is determined whether or not the normal variation winning device 37 is activated and the gaming ball is in an open state in which a winning can be made (A2712). When the normal electric accessory is in operation (the result of A2712 is "Y")
), and proceeds to the processing of step A2714.

On the other hand, when the ordinary electric accessory is not in operation (result of A2712 is “N”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the illegal electric power generation is occurring (A2713). When the number of illegal winnings to the normal variation winning device 37 is equal to or more than the number of fraudulent occurrence determinations (for example, 5), it is determined that the ordinary electric fraud is occurring. The normally variable winning device 37 cannot win the game ball in the closed state, and can win the game ball only in the open state. Therefore, if the game ball wins in the closed state, it means that some abnormality or dishonesty has occurred, and if there is a game ball won in such a closed state, the number is counted as the fraudulent winning number. When the number of fraudulent prizes thus counted is equal to or larger than a predetermined fraud occurrence determination number (upper limit value), it is determined that fraud has occurred.

In the case where the illegal attempt to generate a regular telephone is not occurring (the result of A2713 is “N”), the game control device 100 prepares a table for setting information on hold by the second start winning a prize mouth (normal variation winning device 37) (A2714). The special figure starting port switch common process is executed (A2715), and the starting port switch monitoring process is ended. In addition, when it is determined in A2713 that the unauthorized use of general electric power is occurring (the result of A2713 is "Y"), the starting port switch monitoring process is ended. That is, the second
Prevent further generation of starting memory.

[Common processing for special drawing start switch]
Next, the special figure starting port switch common process in the starting port switch monitoring process (A2708, A
2715) will be described in detail. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure starting port switch common processing. The special figure starting port switch common process is a process commonly performed for each input when the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a are input.

The game control device 100 first outputs the information regarding the number of winnings to the start port switch to be monitored among the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a to the management device outside the game machine 10. Is loaded (A2901), the loaded value is updated by +1 (A2902), and it is determined whether or not the output number overflows (A2903). If the output count does not overflow (result of A2903 is “N”),
The updated value is saved in the starting port signal output count area of the RWM (A2904), and step A
The processing moves to 2905. On the other hand, if the output count overflows (result of A2903 is “Y”), the process moves to step A2905. In the present embodiment, a value from "0" to "255" can be stored in the starting port signal output frequency area. When the loaded value is "255", the value after updating becomes "0" by +1 update, and it is configured to determine that the output count overflows.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the number of special figure reservations to be updated (starting memory number) corresponding to the starting port switch to be monitored among the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a is less than the upper limit value. It is determined (A2905). When the number of reserved special-drawing figures to be updated is not less than the upper limit (the result of A2905 is “N”), the special-drawing starting port switch common processing ends. When the number of reserved special maps to be updated is less than the upper limit (the result of A2905 is “Y”), the number of reserved special maps to be updated (the number of reserved special maps 1 or the number of reserved special maps 2) is updated by +1. Then (A2906), the target starting opening winning flag is saved (A2907).

Next, the game control device 100 calculates the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the starting mouth switch and the special figure reservation number to be monitored (A2908), and stores the jackpot random number prepared in step A2805 to the RWM jackpot random number. Save to area (A2909). Next, the big hit symbol random number of the starting mouth switch to be monitored is extracted, prepared (A2910), and saved in the big hit symbol random number storage area of the RWM (A2911).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not there is a winning in the starting winning opening 36 (starting opening 1) (A2912). When it is not a winning in the starting winning opening 36 (the result of A2912 is "N")
), the process proceeds to step A2915. On the other hand, in the case of winning the start winning opening 36 (result of A2912 is “Y”), a small winning symbol random number is extracted and prepared (A2913),
It is saved in the small hit symbol random number storage area of the RWM (A2914).

Next, the game control device 100 saves the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 in the fluctuation pattern random number storage area of the corresponding RWM (A2915), and executes the special figure reservation information determination process (A2).
916). Then, a starter switch to be monitored and a decoration special figure reservation number command corresponding to the special figure reservation number are prepared as effect commands (A2917), and effect command setting processing (A291).
8) is executed and the special figure starting port switch common processing is ended.

Here, the game control device 100 (RAM 111c) extracts a predetermined random number based on the inflow of the game balls into the starting winning area and the starting winning area of the normal variation winning device 37, and becomes the execution right of the variation display game. As a starting memory, a starting memory means for storing a predetermined number at the upper limit is formed. Also,
The starting storage means (game control device 100) stores various random number values extracted based on the winning of the game ball into the first starting winning opening (starting winning opening 36) as a first starting memory with a predetermined number as an upper limit. , Various random number values extracted based on the winning of the game ball into the second starting winning opening (ordinary variation winning device 37) are stored as a second starting memory with a predetermined number as an upper limit.

[Special map reservation information determination process]
Next, details of the special figure reservation information determination process (A2916) in the common start port switch process will be described. FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure reservation information determination process.
The special figure hold information determination process is a pre-reading (preliminary determination) process of determining the result-related information corresponding to the start memory before the start timing of the special figure variation display game based on the corresponding start memory.

First, the game control device 100 checks the starting opening winning flag saved in step A2907 to determine whether or not the winning is to the starting winning opening 36 (starting opening 1) (A300).
1). If the winning is not in the winning opening 36 (the result of A3001 is "N"), step A3
The processing moves to 004. On the other hand, in the case where the winning is at the start winning port 36 (the result of A3001 is “Y”), it is determined whether or not it is during special time saving (in the normal power support state) (A300).
2).

The game control device 100 ends the special figure reservation information determination process when it is during the special figure time saving (during normal communication support state) (result of A3002 is “Y”). On the other hand, if the special drawing is not in a short time (A3
If the result of 002 is “N”, it is determined whether the big hit or the small hit is in progress (A30).
03). When the big hit or the small hit is in progress (the result of A3003 is "Y"), the special figure reservation information determination processing is ended.

On the other hand, when the big hit or the small hit is not in progress (the result of A3003 is "N"), the game control device 100 judges whether or not the big hit random number value is the big hit judgment value, and is a big hit judgment processing. Is executed (A3004). And if the result is a big hit (
The result of A3005 is “Y”) is to set a big hit symbol random number check table corresponding to the target start switch (A3006), and to obtain stop symbol information corresponding to the big hit symbol random number prepared in step A2910 ( A3007) and the process proceeds to step A3014.

When the determination result is not a big hit (the result of A3005 is “N”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the winning is the first starting opening (starting winning opening 36) (A3008). When it is not a winning in the starting winning opening 36 (result of A3008 is "N"), the stop symbol information of the out is set (A3013), and the process proceeds to step A3014.

The game control device 100, in the case of winning the start winning port 36 (the result of A3008 is "Y").
)), a small hit determination process is performed to determine whether the small hit is a small hit depending on whether or not the random number of the big hit matches the small hit determination value (A3009). If the determination result is not a small hit (A30
The result of 10 is "N"), the stop symbol information of the deviation is set (A3013), and step A3
The processing moves to 014. On the other hand, if the determination result is a small hit (the result of A3010 is "Y
)), a small hit symbol random number check table is set (A3011), and step A143
The stop symbol information corresponding to the small hit symbol random number prepared in step S3014 is acquired (A3012), and the process proceeds to step A3014.

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a read-ahead stop symbol command corresponding to the target starting opening switch and the stop symbol information as an effect command (A3014), and executes an effect command setting process (A3015). Next, special figure information setting processing for setting special figure information that is a parameter for setting the variation pattern is performed (A3016), and variation pattern setting processing for setting the variation mode of the special figure variation display game is executed (A3017). ).

After that, the game control device 100 prepares a look-ahead variation pattern command corresponding to the first half variation number indicating the first half variation pattern and the second half variation number indicating the second half variation pattern in the variation mode of the special figure variation display game as an effect command (A3018). ), effect command setting processing is performed (A3019), and the special figure reservation information determination processing ends. The special figure information setting process in step A3016 and the variation pattern setting process in step A3017 are the same as the processes executed at the start of the special figure variation display game in the special figure normal process. In the effect command setting process, the effect command is written in the serial transmission buffer, and the effect command is transmitted to the effect control device 300.

By the above processing, a read-ahead symbol command including the result of the special figure variation display game based on the start-up memory of the pre-reading target, and a read-ahead variation pattern command including information on the variation pattern in the special figure variation display game based on the starting memory are prepared. And transmitted to the performance control device 300. Thus, the determination result (prefetch result) of the result-related information (whether it is a big hit or the type of the variation pattern) corresponding to the starting memory is controlled before the start timing of the special figure variation display game based on the corresponding starting memory. The device 300 can be informed, and in particular, by changing the decoration special figure starting memory display displayed on the display device 41, the result related information is given to the player before the start timing of the special figure changing display game. It becomes possible to inform.

That is, the game control device 100 determines a random number stored as a start memory in the start storage means (game control device 100) before executing the variable display game based on the start memory (for example, whether a special result is obtained or not). Judgment etc.) Make a pre-judgment means. Note that the random number value stored corresponding to the starting memory is determined in advance not only at the time of the winning prize when the starting memory occurs, but also at any time before the variable display game based on the starting memory is performed. Good.

[Winning prize switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the special winning opening switch monitoring process (A2602) in the special figure game process will be described. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing a procedure of a special winning opening switch monitoring process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the value of the special figure game process number is “4”, that is, whether or not the special winning opening process is being performed (A3101). When the special winning opening opening process is being performed (the result of A3101 is “Y”), the process proceeds to step A3105. If the special winning opening is not being processed (the result of A3101 is "N"), the value of the special figure game processing number is "5", that is, whether the special winning opening remaining ball processing is being performed. Judge (A3102
).

The game control device 100, during the special winning opening remaining ball processing (the result of A3102 is "Y")
), and proceeds to the processing of step A3105. In addition, when the special winning opening remaining ball processing is not in progress (A
The result of 3105 is "N"), and the value of the special figure game processing number is "8", that is, it is determined whether or not processing is being performed during the small hit (A3103). When processing is in progress during a small hit (A310
The result of 4 is "Y"), and the process proceeds to step A3105. Further, when the small hitting is not being processed (the result of A3103 is “N”), it is determined whether the value of the special figure game processing number is “9”, that is, whether the small hit remaining ball processing is being performed ( A3104). The special figure game processing number does not shift until the special figure game processing timer reaches 0, and thus the progress of the game can be checked by the special figure game processing number.

If the gaming control device 100 is not processing the small hit remaining balls (the result of A3104 is "N")
, The special winning opening switch monitoring process ends. Also, when the small hit remaining ball is being processed (A31
If the result of 04 is "Y"), the process proceeds to step A3105. Then, the winning prize counter is set to 0 (A3105), and the special winning opening switch 1 (one big winning opening switch 39a
) Is input (A3106).

The game control device 100, when there is no input to the special winning opening switch 1 (the result of A3106 is "
N"), it is determined whether or not there is an input to the special winning opening switch 2 (the other special winning opening switch 39a) (A3110). If there is an input to the special winning opening switch 1 (the result of A3106 is “Y”), a special winning opening count command is prepared as an effect command (A3107),
The effect command setting process (A3108) is executed. Then, the winning counter is updated by +1 (
A3109), it is determined whether or not there is an input to the special winning opening switch 2 (the other special winning opening switch 39a) (A3110).

The game control device 100, when there is no input to the special winning opening switch 2 (the result of A3110 is "
N”), and it is determined whether the value of the winning counter is 0 (A3114). If there is an input to the special winning opening switch 2 (the result of A3110 is “Y”), the special winning opening count command is prepared as an effect command (A3111) and the effect command setting process (A3112) is executed. Then, the winning counter is updated by +1 (A3113), and it is determined whether the value of the winning counter is 0 (A3114).

The game control device 100, when the value of the winning counter is 0 (the result of A3114 is "Y").
) Ends the special winning opening switch monitoring process. If the value of the winning counter is not 0 (
The result of A3114 is "N", and it is determined whether or not the special winning opening remaining ball processing is being performed (A311).
5). When the special winning opening remaining ball processing is being performed (the result of A3115 is “Y”), the special winning opening switch monitoring processing is ended, and when the special winning opening remaining ball processing is not being performed (the result of A3115 is “N”),
It is determined whether or not the small hit remaining balls are being processed (A3116).

When the gaming control device 100 is in the process of processing a small hit remaining ball (the result of A3116 is "Y").
Ends the special winning opening switch monitoring processing, and when the small hit remaining ball processing is not in progress (result of A3116 is “N”), the value of the winning prize counter (1 or 2) is added to the special winning opening count number (A31
17), the maximum winning opening count is the upper limit value (the number of game balls that can be won in one round. For example, "9
)) It is determined whether or not the above (A3118).

Game control device 100, when the special winning opening count number is not equal to or more than the upper limit value (A31
The result of 18 is "N"), and the special winning opening switch monitoring process is ended. In addition, when the special winning opening count number is equal to or more than the upper limit value (the result of A3118 is “Y”), the special winning opening count number is kept at the upper limit value (A3119), and the special figure game processing timer area is cleared to 0. (A3120), it is determined whether or not during the small hitting process (A3121).

When the game control device 100 is not in the process of small hit (the result of A3121 is "N"), the special winning opening switch monitoring process is ended, and when the process of small hit is in progress (the result of A3121 is "Y").
)), save the value of the small hit opening operation end in the special winning opening control pointer area (A3122)
, The special winning opening switch monitoring process ends. As a result, the special winning opening will be closed and the first round will be completed.

[Normal processing of special drawings]
Next, details of the special figure normal process (A2608) in the special figure game process will be described.
FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing the procedure of special figure normal processing.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the special figure 2 holding number (second starting memory number) is 0 (A3201). When the special figure 2 reservation number is 0 (result of A3201 is “Y”), it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 reservation number (first starting memory number) is 0 (A3205). Then, when the number of reserved special characters 1 is 0 (the result of A3205 is “Y”), it is determined whether or not the customer waiting demo has been started (A3209), and when the customer waiting demo is not started (A3209). If the result is “N”), a customer waiting demonstration flag indicating that the customer waiting demonstration state (state during customer waiting demonstration) is set in the customer waiting demo flag area (A3210).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 prepares a customer waiting demo command as a production command (
(A3211), effect command setting processing is performed (A3212), and "0" relating to special figure normal processing is set as the processing number (A3213). On the other hand, in step A3209, even when the customer waiting demo has been started (result of A3209 is “Y”), “0” related to the special figure normal process is set as the process number (A3213). After that, the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (A3214), and the variable symbol determination flag area is cleared (A3215). Then, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the special winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (A3216).
, Special figure normal processing ends.

In this way, the customer waiting demo command is transmitted when the special figure 1 holding number (first starting memory number) and the special figure 2 holding number (second starting memory number) are 0, and the customer waiting demo command is received. The produced control device 300 performs the setting to display the customer waiting demo on the display device 41 or the like. The game control device 100 can also be configured to transmit the customer waiting demo command only when the touch switch signal from the touch switch of the operation handle 24 becomes an off signal.

Further, the game control device 100, if the special figure 2 hold number is not 0 (the result of A3201 is "N
)), the special figure 2 variation start process is executed (A3202), and a decorative special figure reserved number command (decorative special figure 2 reserved number command) corresponding to the special figure 2 reserved number is prepared as an effect command (A3203).
), the effect command setting process is executed (A3204), and the special figure normal process is ended.

Further, the game control device 100, if the special figure 1 holding number is not 0 (the result of A3205 is "N
)), the special figure 1 fluctuation start process is executed (A3206), and a decorative special figure reserved number command (decorative special figure 1 reserved number command) corresponding to the special figure 1 reserved number is prepared as an effect command (A3207).
), the effect command setting process is executed (A3208), and the special figure normal process ends.

In this way, by checking the special figure 2 pending number before checking the special figure 1 pending number, the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (A3202) is executed when the special figure 2 pending number is not 0. The Rukoto. That is, the special figure 2 variable display game is executed with priority over the special figure 1 variable display game. That is, the game control device 100 is the second start storage means (game control device 100).
When there is a second starting memory, the priority control means executes the variable display game based on the second starting memory with priority over the variable display game based on the first starting memory.

[Special map 1 fluctuation start processing]
Next, details of the special figure 1 variation start process (A3206) in the special figure normal process will be described. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 variation start process. The special figure 1 variation start process is a process performed at the start of the special figure 1 variation display game.

The game control device 100 saves the special symbol 1 variation flag indicating the type of the special symbol variation display game to be executed (here, special symbol 1) in the variable symbol determination flag area (A3401). Subsequently, a big hit flag 1 setting process for setting deviation information and big hit information to the big hit flag 1 for determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit is executed (A3402). Details of the jackpot flag 1 setting process will be described later.

Next, the game control device 100 executes the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process relating to the setting of the special figure 1 stop symbol (symbol information) (A3403). The details of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process will be described later. Furthermore, the game control device 100 executes special figure information setting processing for setting special figure information which is a parameter for setting the variation pattern (A3404).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 prepares a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting information table which is a table in which information for referring to various kinds of information regarding the setting of the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is set (A3405). ). After that, the game control device 100 executes a variation pattern setting process for setting a variation pattern which is a variation mode in the special figure 1 variation display game (A3406).

Next, the game control device 100 executes variation start information setting processing for setting variation start information of the special figure 1 variation display game (A3407), and ends the special figure 1 variation start processing. In the fluctuation start information setting processing, the fluctuation time value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation pattern number) is acquired and saved in the special figure game processing timer area. Then, with respect to the special figure 1 variable display game, variable commands (MODE, ACTION) corresponding to the variable pattern numbers are prepared as effect commands, and effect command setting processing is performed.

Then, the game control device 100 sets "1" relating to the special figure changing process as the process number (A3408), and saves the process number in the special figure game process number area (A3409).

Then, the game control device 100 clears the customer waiting demo flag area (A3410), and saves the signal regarding the fluctuation start of the special figure 1 in the test signal output data area (A3411). After that, the changing flag is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (A3412), and the initial value of the blinking control timer (timer of the blinking cycle of the special figure 1 display 51) is set in the special figure 1 blinking control timer area (
For example, 100 ms) is set (A3413). Subsequently, the initial value (for example, 0) is saved in the special figure 1 variation symbol number area (A3414), and the special figure 1 variation start processing is ended.

[Special map 2 fluctuation start processing]
Next, details of the special figure 2 variation start process (A3202) in the special figure normal process will be described. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 variation start process. The special figure 2 variation start process is a process performed at the start of the special figure 2 variation display game, and is the same process as the process of the special figure 1 variation start process shown in FIG. It is something to do.

The game control device 100 first executes the type of special figure variation display game to be executed (here, special figure 2).
The special figure 2 variation flag indicating is saved in the variation symbol determination flag area (A3501). Subsequently, a big hit flag 2 setting process for setting deviation information and big hit information to the big hit flag 2 for determining whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit is executed (A3502).

Next, the game control device 100 executes the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process relating to the setting of the special figure 2 stop symbol (symbol information) (A3503). Further, a special figure information setting process for setting special figure information which is a parameter for setting the variation pattern is executed (A3504). Then, a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referring to various information regarding the setting of the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is set (A3505).

After that, the game control device 100 executes a variation pattern setting process for setting a variation pattern of the special figure 2 variable display game (A3506). Then, the fluctuation start information setting process for setting the fluctuation start information of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is executed (A3507). In the fluctuation start information setting processing, the fluctuation time value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation pattern number) is acquired and saved in the special figure game processing timer area. Then, for the special figure 2 variable display game, prepare variable commands (MODE, ACTION) corresponding to the variable pattern numbers as effect commands,
Perform effect command setting processing.

Next, the game control device 100 first sets “1” relating to the special figure changing process as the process number (A3508), and saves the process number in the special figure game process number area (A3509).

Then, the game control device 100 clears the customer waiting demo flag area (A3510), and saves the signal related to the fluctuation start of the special figure 2 in the test signal output data area (A3511). After that, the changing flag is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (A3512), and the initial value of the blinking control timer (timer of the blinking cycle of the special figure 2 display 52) is set in the special figure 2 blinking control timer area (
For example, 100 ms) is set (A3513). Then, the initial value (for example, 0) is saved in the special figure 2 variation symbol number area (A3414), and the special figure 2 variation start processing is ended.

[Big hit flag 1 setting process]
Next, details of the big hit flag 1 setting process (A3402) in the special figure 1 variation start process will be described. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the big hit flag 1 setting process.

The game control device 100 first saves the deviation information in the small hit flag area (A360
1), the deviation information is saved in the big hit flag 1 area (A3602). Next, the big hit random number is loaded from the special figure 1 big hit random number storage area (for the number of holding 1) of the RWM and prepared (A360
3), 0 is cleared to the special figure 1 big hit random number storage area (for the number of holding 1) (A3604). The reserved number 1 is an area for storing information (random numbers, etc.) about the special figure starting memory having the earliest digestion order (here, the earliest in special figure 1). After that, a jackpot determination process of determining whether or not it is a jackpot is executed depending on whether or not the prepared jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value (A3605).

When the determination result of the jackpot determining process (A3605) is a jackpot (the result of A3606 is “Y”), the game control device 100 overwrites the jackpot information in the jackpot flag 1 area where the deviation information is saved in step A3602. It saves (A3607), and ends the jackpot flag 1 setting process. On the other hand, if the determination result of the jackpot determination process (A3605) is not a jackpot (A
If the result of 3606 is “N”), and the prepared big hit random number value matches the small hit judgment value, the small hit judgment processing for judging whether or not it is a small hit is executed (A3608).

When the determination result of the small hit determination process (A3608) is a small hit (the result of A3609 is "Y"), the game control device 100 outputs the small hit information to the small hit flag area in which the deviation information is saved in step A3601. The data is overwritten and saved (A3610), and the jackpot flag 1 setting process ends. On the other hand, if the determination result of the small hit determination process (A3608) is not a small hit (A3
If the result of 609 is “N”), the big hit flag 1 setting process is terminated while the deviation information is saved in both the big hit flag 1 area and the small hit flag area. Thus, in this embodiment,
The result of the special figure 1 variable display game is one of "big hit", "small hit", and "outside hit".
[Big hit flag 2 setting process]
Next, details of the big hit flag 2 setting process (A3502) in the special figure 2 variation start process will be described. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the big hit flag 2 setting process.
In this process, the same process as the process of setting the big hit flag 1 shown in FIG. 20 is performed for the second starting memory.

The game control device 100 first saves the deviation information in the big hit flag 2 area (A37).
01). Next, a big hit random number is loaded from the special figure 2 big hit random number storage area (for holding number 1) and prepared (A3702), and the special figure 2 big hit random number storage area (for holding number 1) is cleared to 0. (A3703). The reserved number 1 is an area for storing information (random numbers, etc.) about the special figure starting storage in which the digestion order is the earliest (here, the earliest in the special figure 2). After that, a jackpot determination process of determining whether or not it is a jackpot is executed depending on whether or not the prepared jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value (A3704).

When the determination result of the jackpot determining process (A3704) is a jackpot (the result of A3705 is “Y”), the game control device 100 overwrites the jackpot information in the jackpot flag 2 area where the deviation information is saved in step A3701. It saves (A3706), and ends the jackpot flag 2 setting process. On the other hand, if the determination result of the jackpot determination process (A3704) is not a jackpot (A
The result of 3705 is “N”), and the big hit flag 2 setting process is terminated while the deviation information is saved in the big hit flag 2. As described above, in the present embodiment, the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is any one of "big hit" and "off".

[Big hit determination processing]
Next, the jackpot determination processing (such as jackpot flag 1 setting processing and jackpot flag 2 setting processing)
Details of (A3605, A3704) will be described. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the big hit determination process. The big hit judging process is a process common to the big hit judging process in other processes executed during the timer interrupt process, and is also executed in step A3004 of the special figure reservation information judging process.

The game control device 100 first sets a table of upper limit determination values (upper limit determination value table) corresponding to the probability setting value (A3801). The upper limit determination value table defines upper limit determination values according to probability setting values for each of the high probability state and the low probability state. Then, the lower limit judgment value of the big hit judgment value is set (A3802), and it is judged whether or not the value of the target big hit random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (A3803). The big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit determination value. The big hit judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and when the big hit random number is greater than or equal to the lower limit judgment value, which is the lower limit value of the big hit judgment value, and less than or equal to the upper limit judgment value, which is the upper limit value of the big hit judgment value. , Determined to be a big hit.

The game control device 100, when the value of the target big hit random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (A380
The result of No. 3 is “Y”), a deviation (other than the big hit) is set as the judgment result (A3808), and the big hit judgment process ends.

Further, the game control device 100, if the value of the big hit random number is not less than the lower limit judgment value (A3
The result of 803 is “N”), and it is determined whether or not the jackpot occurrence probability is the high-probability state (probability change state) (A3804). Then, in the case of the high probability state (the result of A3804 is “Y”).
), using the upper limit judgment value table, the upper limit judgment value in the high probability is set corresponding to the probability setting value (A3805). On the other hand, when it is not in the high probability state (the result of A3804 is “N”), the upper limit judgment value table is used to set the upper limit judgment value in the low probability corresponding to the probability setting value (A
3806).

After setting the upper limit judgment value of the value of the big hit random number, the game control device 100 judges whether or not the value of the target big hit random number is larger than the upper limit judgment value (A3807). When the value of the big hit random number is larger than the upper limit judgment value (result of A3807 is “Y”), deviation (other than big hit) is set as the judgment result (A3808). On the other hand, if the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the upper limit judgment value (
The result of A3807 is "N"), and a big hit is set as a determination result (A3809). When the determination result is set, the jackpot determination process ends.

[Small hit judgment processing]
Next, the details of the small hit determination process (A3608) in the big hit flag 1 setting process will be described. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the small hit determination process. The small hit determination process is a process common to the small hit determination processes in other processes executed during the timer interrupt process, and is also executed in step A3009 of the special figure reservation information determination process.

The game control device 100 first sets a small hit upper limit determination value corresponding to the probability setting value (A
3901). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the big hit random number of the target (special figure 1) is less than the small hit lower limit determination value (A3902). The small hit means that the big hit random number matches the small hit determination value. The small hit judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the big hit random number is greater than or equal to the small hit lower limit judgment value, which is the lower limit value of the small hit judgment value, and the upper limit of the small hit judgment value, which is the upper limit value. When it is less than or equal to the determination value, it is determined to be a small hit.

As a matter of course, the range of the small hit judgment value (between the small hit lower limit judgment value and the small hit upper limit judgment value) should be the same as the above big hit judgment so that the same special figure variable display game result will not be a small hit and a big hit. It does not overlap with the value range (between the lower limit judgment value and the upper limit judgment value). In this embodiment,
The small hitting random number is not independently provided, and the big hit random number is also used for the small hit determination, but it is also possible to provide a unique small hitting random number.

When the value of the big hit random number of the target (special figure 1) is less than the small hit lower limit judgment value (the result of A3902 is “Y”), the game control device 100 sets the deviation as the judgment result (A3904),
The small hit determination process ends.

Further, when the value of the big hit random number is not less than the small hit lower limit judgment value (the result of A3902 is “N”), the value of the big hit random number of the target (special figure 1) is the small hit upper limit judgment value. It is determined whether or not it is larger (A3903). When the value of the big hit random number is larger than the small hit upper limit judgment value (the result of A3903 is “Y”), a deviation is set as the judgment result (A3904).
.. On the other hand, when the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the small hit upper limit judgment value (the result of A3903 is "
N”), and a small hit is set as the determination result (A3905). When the determination result is set, the small hit determination process ends.

[Big hit probability, small hit probability]
24A, 24B, and 24C show the big hit probability and the small hit probability of the special figure variation display game determined as a result of the big hit judgment process (FIG. 22) and the small hit judgment process (FIG. 23) described above. Each setting (
It is a table illustrated for each set value).

The example of FIG. 24A shows a case where the big hit probability and the small hit probability are different for each setting (each set value). The big hit probability (at the time of low probability and high probability) and the small hit probability become higher as the set value becomes larger (higher setting). The larger the set value, the more easily the big hit occurs, which is advantageous to the player. The jackpot probability is obtained by dividing the difference between the upper limit determination value and the lower limit determination value in FIG. 22 by the range of the value of the jackpot random number. The big hit probability can be changed according to the set value by changing the lower limit judgment value or the range of the value of the big hit random number in accordance with the set value, in addition to the upper limit judgment value.
In another example, only one of the big hit probability at the time of low probability and the big hit probability at the time of high probability may be configured to be high as the set value becomes large. By changing the big hit probability and the small hit probability according to the setting (setting value), the player has the pleasure of estimating the setting (setting value) from the big hit probability and the small hit probability, and the enjoyment of the game is improved.

In the example of FIG. 24B, the big hit probability and the small hit probability of the settings 1, 2, 3 (setting values 1, 2, 3) and the settings 4, 5, 6 (setting values 4, 5, 6) are the same. It is set. In addition, in the settings 1 to 3 or the settings 4 to 6, the big hit probability and the small hit probability increase as the set value increases (the setting becomes higher). In the example of FIG. 24B, it is more difficult for the player to estimate the setting (setting value) from the big hit probability and the small hit probability, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired.

In the example of FIG. 24C, regardless of the setting (setting value), the jackpot probability (at the time of low probability and at the time of high probability)
And the small hit probability is the same. In this case, the player will estimate the setting (setting value) from other setting discriminating elements.

Other factors that can be used to determine settings are the probability of sudden change (described later), the number of continuations of normal electric power support after the jackpot (described later), the number of times the ST machine continues in the probability variation state, the number of jackpot rounds (upper limit number of rounds), and There are a variation pattern (variation time value) of the figure variation display game, various times set in the special figure game processing (stop display time, fanfare time, etc.), and the like. If the probability that the predetermined contents of these setting discrimination elements are selected is made different for each set value, the player can estimate the set value from these setting discrimination elements.

[Special map 1 stop symbol setting process]
Next, details of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (A3403) in the special figure 1 variation start process will be described. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the big hit flag 1 is a big hit (A4001).
If it is a big hit (the result of A4001 is “Y”), the big hit symbol random number is loaded from the special figure 1 big hit symbol random number storage area (for the number of holding 1) (A4002). Next, the special figure 1 big hit design table is set (A4003).

Then, the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded big hit symbol random number is acquired and saved in the special symbol 1 stop symbol number area (A4004). The type of special result by this process (type of jackpot)
Is selected.

After that, game control control equipment 100, sets the special figure 1 big hit stop design information table (A4
005), the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (A4006). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol on the special symbol display device (here, the special symbol 1 display device 51) or a stop symbol on the display device 41. Next, the round number upper limit value information corresponding to the stopped symbol number is acquired and saved in the round number upper limit value information area (A4007).

Next, the game control device 100 acquires time reduction determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number,
The data is saved in the time reduction determination data area (A4008). The time reduction determination data includes information on the presence/absence of the universal communication support state (time saving state) after the end of the big hit state.

After that, the game control device 100 saves the effect mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern and the probability state (A4009). Then, the game control device 100 prepares a decorative special figure 1 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (A4018).

The effect mode transition information is information for changing the effect mode. The effect mode transition information here is set in the case of a big hit (the result of A4001 is “Y”) and is used in the big hit ending process. That is, the production mode can be shifted by the big hit by the production mode transition information. In addition, as described above, the production mode transition information is set according to the big hit stop pattern pattern (whether it is a probability variation big hit pattern/normal big hit pattern etc.), so the big hit pattern type (big hit type) ends. The destination of the effect mode to be changed later will change. Further, as described above, the effect mode transition information is set according to the probability state,
The transition destination of the effect mode is also influenced by whether or not the special map high probability state (probability change state) is currently in progress.

On the other hand, when the big hit flag 1 is not a big hit (the result of A4001 is "N"), the game control device 100 judges whether the small hit flag is a small hit (A4010), and if it is a small hit (
The result of A4011 is “Y”), and the small hit symbol random number is loaded from the special figure 1 small hit symbol random number storage area (for holding number 1) (A4011). Next, set the special figure 1 small hit symbol table (A4
012), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded small hit symbol random number is acquired and saved in the special symbol 1 stop symbol number area (A4013).

After that, the game control device 100 acquires the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number,
Save in the stop symbol pattern area (A4014), save the effect mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (A4015). The effect mode transition information here is set in the case of a small hit (the result of A4010 is “Y”), and the effect mode can be switched when the small hit occurs. Then, a decoration special figure command corresponding to the stop design pattern is prepared (A40).
18).

If the small hit flag is not a small hit (the result of A4010 is “N”), the stop symbol number at the time of falling is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol number area (A4016), and the stop symbol pattern is stopped. Save in the area (A4017), and prepare a decoration special figure command corresponding to the stop pattern pattern (A4018). By the above process, the stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure variation display game is set.

After that, the decoration special drawing command is saved in the decoration special drawing command area (A4019), and effect command setting processing is executed (A4020). This decoration special command is directed to the effect control device 30.
Sent to 0. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (A4021), and the special figure 1 big hit symbol random number storage area (for holding number 1) is cleared to 0 (A4022), the special figure 1 small hit. Clear the symbol random number storage area (for 1 hold number) to 0 (A40
23), the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process ends.

[Special figure 2 stop symbol setting process]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (A3503) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the big hit flag 2 is a big hit (A4101).
If it is a big hit (the result of A4101 is “Y”), the big hit symbol random number is loaded from the special figure 2 big hit symbol random number storage area (for the number of reservations 1) (A4102). Next, the special figure 2 big hit design table is set (A4103). Subsequently, the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded jackpot symbol random number is acquired and saved in the special symbol 2 stop symbol number area (A4104). By this processing, the type of special result (type of big hit) is selected.

After that, game control control equipment 100, sets the special figure 2 big hit stop design information table (A4
105), the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (A4106). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol on the special symbol indicator (here, the special symbol 2 indicator 52) or a stop symbol on the display device 41. Next, the round number upper limit value information corresponding to the stopped symbol number is acquired and saved in the round number upper limit value information area (A4107).

Next, the game control device 100 acquires time reduction determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number,
The data is saved in the time reduction determination data area (A4108). The time reduction determination data includes information on the presence/absence of the universal communication support state (time saving state) after the end of the big hit state.

After that, the game control device 100 saves the effect mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern and the probability state (A4109). The performance mode transition information here is for big hits (
The result of A4101 is set to "Y") and is used in the jackpot end process. Then, the game control device 100 prepares a decorative special figure 2 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (A4112).
).

On the other hand, when the big hit flag 2 is not a big hit (the result of A4101 is “N”), the game control device 100 saves the stop symbol number at the time of falling out in the special symbol 2 stop symbol number area (A4110).
), the detachment stop design pattern is saved in the stop design pattern area (A4111), and a decoration special command corresponding to the stop design pattern is prepared (A4112). By the above process, the stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure variation display game is set.

After that, the decoration special drawing command is saved in the decoration special drawing command area (A4113), and effect command setting processing is executed (A4114). This decoration special command is directed to the effect control device 30.
Sent to 0. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (A4115), and the special figure 2 big hit symbol random number storage area (for the number of reserved 1) is cleared to 0 (A4116), the special figure 2 stop symbol. The setting process ends.

[Example of special design jackpot design distribution]
FIG. 27 is a table exemplifying, for each setting, the jackpot pattern distribution (between big hits) of the special figure variation display game controlled by the special figure game process described above.

FIG. 27 exemplifies jackpot symbol numbers 1 to 6 (stop symbol numbers) showing types of jackpots and jackpot symbol tables defining the distribution rate thereof for each setting. As shown in FIG. 27, the distribution rate of the big hit symbol numbers (kind of big hit, symbols 1 to 6) can be changed according to the setting (setting value), and the probability variation rush rate becomes higher as the setting value becomes larger and the player Be advantageous. The probability variation plunge rate is the proportion of the probability variation big hit symbol to all the symbols that the probability state after the big hit is high.
In addition, the number of times of the usual electric jackpot support after the big hit ends, especially for the normal big hit (the probability state after the big hit ends becomes low probability), in the setting 1-3 or the setting 4-6, the larger the set value growing. Settings 1, 2, 3 (settings 1, 2, 3) and Settings 4, 5, 6 (settings 4,
The number of regular electric power support in 5 and 6) is set to be the same. Note that the ST machine can be configured such that the number of times the probability variation state continues is increased as the set value increases.

Further, in FIG. 27, the number of rounds (round number upper limit value, for example, 2R, 6R, 16R) given in one big hit does not change with respect to the set value, but the larger the set value, the larger the round number. Various configurations are also possible. Further, in FIG. 27, it is easier to give a larger number of rounds to the big hit of the special figure 2 variable display game than the big hit of the special figure 1 variable display game. It is more advantageous to the player than the 1-variation display game.

Note that, similar to FIG. 24C, it is also possible to make the big hit symbol distribution (big hit breakdown) the same regardless of the setting (setting value).

[Processing during special figure fluctuation]
Next, the details of the special figure changing process (A2609) in the special figure game process will be described. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure changing process.

The game control device 100 first prepares a symbol stop command (special figure 1 symbol stop command or special figure 2 symbol stop command) corresponding to the changing symbol as an effect command (A4701).
, Production command setting processing is executed (A4702). The changing symbol can be determined from the variable symbol determination flag (special figure 1 variation flag or special figure 2 variation flag). Upon receiving the symbol stop command, the effect control device 300 stops the corresponding decorative special figure variable display game (decorative special figure 1 variable display game or decorative special figure 2 variable display game).

Next, the game control device 100 sets a display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern number indicating the stop symbol pattern (A4703), and saves the set display time in the special figure game processing timer area (A4704). In the case of the present embodiment, when the stop symbol pattern is a falling symbol pattern, a big hit symbol pattern, or a small hit symbol pattern, the display time is commonly 600.
Set msec.

Next, the game control device 100 sets the process number "2" related to the process during special figure display (A4
705), the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (A4706).

Next, the game control device 100 saves the signal related to the fluctuation end of the special figure 1 in the test signal output data area (A4707), and further saves the signal related to the fluctuation end of the special figure 2 in the test signal output data area ( A4708).

Then, the game control device 100, in the symbol determination frequency signal control timer area used when outputting the symbol determination frequency signal relating to the number of executions of the special figure variation display game to the external information terminal, the control timer initial value (for example, 256 msec). Is saved (A4709).

After that, the game control device 100 displays the stop flag related to the fluctuation stop on the special figure 1 display device 51 as the information for controlling the special figure 1 change display game on the special figure 1 display device 51. Save to (A4710). Further, as the information for controlling the special figure 2 variable display game on the special figure 2 display device 52, a stop flag related to the fluctuation stop on the special figure 2 display device 52 is saved in the special figure 2 change control flag area (A4711). , The special figure changing process transition setting process ends.

[Design fluctuation control processing]
In FIG. 29, the symbol variation control process (A2620, A2622) in the special figure game process described above.
), the symbol variation control processing in the later-described universal figure game processing is shown. The symbol variation control process is the control of the variation of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol, etc.) and the normal symbol (general symbol) of the variable display game in the variable display section of the collective display device 50, and the special symbol and the ordinary symbol. It is a process of setting display data of symbols.

The game control device 100 first checks whether or not the fluctuation control flag applied to the symbol to be controlled (for example, one of the first special drawing, the second special drawing, and the general drawing) is changing (A7501). In the case of the present embodiment, on the fluctuation control table prepared in Step A2619, Step A2621, and Step A7614, the lower address of the fluctuation control flag area, the initial value of the blink control timer, the fluctuation symbol number upper limit judgment value, and the display table 2 ( Address for stop), display table 1
The address (for fluctuation) is defined.

The game control device 100, when the changing flag related to the symbol to be controlled is changing (A
The result of 7502 is “Y”), and the symbol display table (for fluctuation) corresponding to the symbol to be controlled is acquired (A7503). In the case of this embodiment, step A2619, step A2621,
The address of the symbol display table (for fluctuation, display table 1) is defined on the fluctuation control table prepared in step A7614.

Next, the game control device 100 updates the control target blinking control timer by -1 (A7504).
, The flashing control timer after updating is determined to be 0 (A7505), and if the flashing control timer after updating is not 0 (result of A7505 is "N"), the value of the variable symbol number area to be controlled The corresponding display data is acquired (A7508). Then, the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (A7511), and the symbol variation control process ends.

If the blink control timer after updating is 0 (result of A7505 is "Y"), the blink control timer initial value corresponding to the target blink timer area is saved (A7506), and the variable symbol number of the control target Is updated by +1 in the corresponding range (A7507), and the display data corresponding to the value of the variable symbol number area to be controlled is acquired (A7508). Then, the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (A7511), and the symbol variation control process ends.

On the other hand, the game control device 100 acquires the symbol display table (for stop) corresponding to the symbol of the control target when the changing flag related to the symbol of the control target is not changing (result of A7502 is “N”). (A7509). In the case of this embodiment, step A2619 and step A2
621, the address of the symbol display table (for stop, display table 2) is defined on the fluctuation control table prepared in step A7614. Next, the display data corresponding to the value of the stop symbol number area of the control target is acquired (A7510), the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (A7511), and the symbol variation control process is ended.

As the blink control timer initial value saved in step A7506, the value defined in the fluctuation control table prepared according to the game to be processed is saved. Here, a value corresponding to 100 msec is defined as the blinking control timer initial value. This blinking control timer initial value is an interval at which the lighting pattern is updated in the collective display device 50 during the varying time.

The corresponding range in step A7507 is defined by the variable symbol number upper limit determination value defined in the variation control table prepared according to the game to be processed. When the variable symbol number upper limit value is reached by updating the variable symbol number by +1 in step A7507, the variable symbol number is set to 0, and the variable symbol number is 0 (variable symbol number upper limit judgment value -1. ) Is updated sequentially. In steps A7508 and A7511, the display data (lighting pattern) corresponding to the variable symbol number is acquired and displayed, and the lighting pattern is updated (changed) a number of times equal to the variable symbol number upper limit determination value. As a result of performing the above, the display for one cycle is repeated.

In this way, by defining the blinking control timer initial value and the variable symbol number upper limit value in the variation control table prepared according to the game to be processed, the interval and the display for updating the lighting pattern in the collective display device 50 make one round. The number of updates to be performed can be set for each game.

[Public game processing]
Next, details of the universal figure game process (A1313) in the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the universal figure game process. In the general-purpose game processing, the input of the gate switch 34a is monitored and the overall processing related to the general-purpose variable display game is controlled.
Set the display of general maps.

The game control device 100 first executes a gate switch monitoring process for monitoring the input from the gate switch 34a (A7601). The details of the gate switch monitoring process will be described later.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 executes the ordinary electric prize winning switch monitoring process of monitoring the input from the starting opening 2 switch 37a (A7602).

Next, the game control device 100 updates -1 if the universal figure game processing timer is not 0 (1
(A7603). The minimum value of the universal figure game processing timer is set to 0. Then, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the universal figure game processing timer has become 0 (A7604).

When the value of the universal figure game processing timer is 0 (the result of A7604 is “Y”), that is, when the time has expired or has already expired, the game control device 100 displays the universal figure game processing number. The universal figure game sequence branch table to be referred to for branching to the corresponding process is set in the register (A7605).

Further, the game control device 100 obtains the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the universal figure game process number based on the set universal figure game sequence branch table (A7606). Then, a subroutine call by the universal figure game process number is performed to execute a game branch process corresponding to the universal figure game process number (A7607).

If the game processing number is “0” in step A7607, the gaming control device 100,
Regular figure normal processing that monitors the variation start of the universal figure variation display game, sets the variation start of the universal figure variation display game, sets the effect, and sets the information necessary for performing processing during the universal figure variation Execute (A7608). The details of the ordinary figure ordinary process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Further, when the game process number is “1” in step A7607, the game control device 100 executes the general figure changing process for setting the information necessary for performing the general figure displaying process ( A7609). For example, in the process of changing the figure, in order to shift to the process of displaying figure, the game processing number is set to "2" and saved in the figure game processing number area. Save to processing timer area.

Further, when the game process number is “2” in step A7607, if the result of the universal figure variation display game is a hit, the game control device 100 determines whether or not it is in the time saving state. The general figure display processing is executed to set the opening time and the information necessary for performing the general figure hit processing (A7610). For example, in the processing for displaying a figure, when the result of the figure changing display game is a hit, in order to shift to the processing for hitting a figure, "3" is set as the game processing number and the figure game processing number area is set. On the other hand, in the case of the loss, the game processing number is set to "0" and the game processing number is saved in the general/universal game processing number area in order to shift to the normal/universal figure normal processing.

If the game process number is “3” in step A7607, the game control device 100 sets the information necessary for continuing the process of hitting the universal figure or performing the normal ball remaining ball process. The middle process is executed (A7611). For example, in the normal figure hitting process, after setting the normal variation winning device 37 for a predetermined number of times, the game process number is set to "4" in order to shift to the normal ball remaining ball process. Save to the universal figure game processing number area.

If the game process number is "4" in step A7607, the game control device 100 executes a normal electric ball remaining ball process that sets information necessary to perform the end-of-universal figure process (A7612). ). For example, in the normal ball remaining ball process, in order to shift to the normal process per end process, "5" is set as the game process number and saved in the general figure game process number area. Save to processing timer area.

Further, when the game process number is "5" in step A7607, the game control device 100 executes the universal figure per end process for setting the information necessary for performing the ordinary figure normal process (A7608). (A7613). For example, in the universal figure ending process, in order to shift to the regular figure normal process, "0" is set as the game process number and saved in the universal figure game process number area.

After that, the game control device 100 prepares a universal figure variation control table for controlling the variation of the ordinary symbols by the universal figure display 53 (A7614). After that, the symbol variation control process relating to the control of the variation of the ordinary symbol by the universal symbol display 53 is executed (A7615), and the universal symbol game process is ended.

On the other hand, if the value of the universal figure game processing timer is not 0, the game control device 100 (A7604).
If the result is "N"), that is, if the time has not expired, the processing from step A7614 is executed.

[Gate switch monitoring process]
FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the gate switch monitoring process. The gate switch monitoring process is executed in step A7601 in the universal figure game process shown in FIG.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not there is an input to the gate switch 34a (
A7701). When there is an input to the gate switch 34a (the result of A7701 is "
Y”), it is determined whether or not the game state is a right hit (A7702). The gaming state of hitting to the right is a big hit state, a small hit state, and a time saving state (normal power support state). If the game state is to hit the right side (result of A7702 is "Y"), the process proceeds to step A7705.
When the game state is not right hitting (the result of A7702 is "N"), a left hitting instruction notification command (left hitting instruction command) is prepared as an effect command (A7703), and effect command setting processing is executed (A7704). Effect control device 300 that has received the left-handed instruction notification command
Performs a notification (warning) for instructing left-handed driving on the display device 41 or the like.

Next, the game control device 100 obtains the number of reserved universal figures and determines whether the number of reserved universal figures is less than an upper limit value (for example, 4) (A7705). The game control device 100, if the number of reserved universal figures is less than the upper limit value (the result of A7705 is “Y”), updates the number of reserved universal figures by +1 (A
7706), and calculates the address of the hit random number storage area corresponding to the updated number of universal figure reservations (A
7707). Then, the hit random number is extracted and saved in the hit random number storage area of the RWM (A77
08), the hit symbol random number is extracted and saved in the hit symbol random number storage area (A7709), and the gate switch monitoring process ends.

On the other hand, the game control device 100, when there is no input to the gate switch 34a (the result of A7701 is "N"), or when it is determined that the number of reserved universal figures is not less than the upper limit value (A770).
When the result of 5 is "N"), the gate switch monitoring process is terminated.

[Usually processing]
Next, details of the ordinary figure ordinary process (A7608) in the ordinary figure game process will be described.
FIG. 32 is a flow chart showing the procedure of a normal figure normal process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the number of universal figure reservations is 0 (A7901).
.. When the number of reserved figures is not 0 (the result of A7901 is “N”), the random number is loaded from the random number storage area per RMU of the RWM (for the number of reservations 1), and the random number storage area per symbol of the RWM is stored. (
Load a random number per design from (for hold number 1), and clear the random number per universal figure storage area (for hold number 1) and the random number per universal figure storage area (for hold number 1) to 0 (A7902) .. Furthermore, whether or not the probability that a hit result in the universal figure fluctuation display game is higher than normal is in high probability of regular figure (during high-probability state), that is, whether it is in a time-saving state (state of universal communication support). It is determined (A7903). Note that the probability of hitting a universal figure in the high probability is 250/251, and the probability of hitting a universal figure in the low probability is 0/251.

When the universal figure high probability is not in progress (the result of A7903 is “N”), the game control device 100 sets the low probability lower limit determination value (here, 251) which is the lower limit determination value in the universal figure low probability (A7904).
), if the probability of universal figure high is in effect (result of A7903 is “Y”), the high probability lower limit determination value (here, 1) which is the lower limit determination value in universal figure high probability is set (A7905), and step A7906 is performed. Process shifts to.

The game control device 100 determines whether or not the hit random number is equal to or higher than the upper limit determination value (251 in this case) (A7906). It should be noted that the upper limit determination value here is common between the high probability of universal figure and the low probability of regular figure. When the hit random number is equal to or higher than the upper limit judgment value (result of A7906 is “Y”), that is,
If the result is yes, the process moves to step A7908. When the hit random number is less than the upper limit judgment value (result of A7906 is "N"), it is determined whether the hit random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (A7907).

If the hit random number is less than the lower limit judgment value, the game control device 100 (the result of A7907 is "
Y”), that is, in the case of a loss, save the shift information in the hit flag area (A7908).
.. Furthermore, the deviation stop symbol number is set as the universal figure stop symbol number (A7909), the deviation symbol information is saved in the universal figure stop symbol information area (A7910), and the process proceeds to step A7914.

If the hit random number is not less than the lower limit judgment value, the game control device 100 (the result of A7907 is "
N"), that is, in the case of a hit, hit information is saved in the hit flag area (A7911), and a hit stop symbol number corresponding to the hit symbol random number loaded is set (A7912), a hit corresponding to a hit stop symbol number. The stop symbol information is saved in the universal symbol stop symbol information area (A7913), and the process proceeds to step A7914. There may be several types of hit stop symbols, and there are two in this embodiment.

Next, the game control device 100 saves the stop symbol number in the universal symbol stop symbol area (A791).
4), the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (A7915), the random number storage area per universal figure is shifted (A7916), and the empty area after the shift is cleared to 0 (A7917).
), the number of reservations for the universal map is updated by -1 (A7918).

That is, with the execution of the universal figure fluctuation display game relating to the oldest universal figure reservation number 1, the number of the universal figure reservation numbers 2 to 4 that are on hold after the universal figure reservation number 1 is advanced one by one.
By this process, the values for the number of reserved figures of 2 for public figures in the random number storage area per general figure to the number of reserved figures of 4 for general figures are moved from the number of reserved figures of 1 for general figures in the random number storage area for one figure to 3 for the number of retained figures Will be done. Then, the value for the figure hold number 4 in the random number storage area per figure is cleared, and the figure hold number is decremented by one.

Next, the game control device 100 extracts the fluctuation pattern random number 3 (A7919), sets the fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern random number 3, and saves it in the universal figure game processing timer area (A7).
920). For example, the fluctuation time is 500 msec with a probability of 200/256 and a probability of 40/25.
It is distributed to 1500 msec at 6 and 3000 msec at a probability of 16/256. Then, the processing for setting transition to normal figure transition setting processing is executed (A7921), and the normal figure normal processing ends. For example, in the universal figure changing process transition setting process, "1" is set as the process number for shifting to the universal figure changing process, and the process number is saved in the universal figure game process number area. Then, the blinking control timer initial value (for example, 100 msec), which is the initial value of the blinking cycle timer of the universal figure display, is saved in the universal figure blinking control timer area, and the initial value is set in the universal figure variation symbol number area (here 0). To save.

Further, the game control device 100, when the universal figure holding number is 0 (the result of A7901 is "
Y”), and set “0” as the processing number for shifting to the ordinary processing (A7922),
The processing number is saved in the universal figure game processing number area (A7923). After that, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the flagging fraud monitoring period flag area (A7924), and the ordinary processing of the ordinary figure ends.

[External information editing process]
Next, details of the external information editing process (A1317) in the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the external information editing process. 33A shows the first half of the external information editing process, and FIG. 33B shows the second half of the external information editing process. In the external information editing process, payout command transmitting process (A1311), winning opening switch/state monitoring process (A1307), magnet fraud monitoring process (A1315), board radio fraud monitoring process (A1316).
On the basis of the monitoring result in (1), a process of creating information to be output to an external device such as an information collecting terminal, an amusement hall internal management device, or a test shooting test device and setting it in an output buffer is performed.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not a glass frame opening error is occurring (
A9501). When the glass frame opening error is not occurring (A9501 result is “N”),
It is determined whether a body frame opening error (front frame opening error) is occurring (A9502).
.. When the main frame opening error is not occurring (the result of A9502 is “N”), the OFF data of the door/frame opening signal is saved in the external information output data area (A9503), and the OFF data of the security signal is output as the external information output data. Save to area (A9504).

When the glass frame opening error is occurring (the result of A9501 is “Y”) or the main frame opening error is occurring (the result of A9502 is “Y”), the game control device 100
ON data of the door/frame opening signal is saved in the external information output data area (A9505), and ON data of the gaming machine error status signal is saved in the test signal output data area (A9506).

After the steps A9504 and A9506, the gaming control device 100 updates -1 if the security signal control timer is not 0 (A9507), and determines whether the security signal control timer is 0 (whether the time is up or not). The determination is made (A9508). The initial value of the security signal control timer is stored in the RAM by operating the initialization switch (setting value change switch 102) or the like.
When the data stored in is initialized or when the setting change is completed, a predetermined time (for example, 256
msec) is set (A1044, A2419 of the main process). Then, the security signal control timer is clocked from the time of RAM initialization or the end of setting change. Also,
The initial value of the security signal control timer is the setting key switch 93 or the setting value change switch 1.
Setting variable state (setting change mode) or setting confirmation state (setting confirmation mode)
Is set (main processing A1037, A2507), the probability setting value changing flag is set, the setting is changing (setting variable state), or the probability setting value confirmation mode in-setting is set. The security signal may be continuously output during the confirmation state. The security signal control timer is set to 0 when the probability setting value changed flag is set (A2414), not when the probability setting value changing flag is cleared (A2418), and the security signal is output. A configuration that terminates is also possible.

When the security signal control timer is not 0 (the result of A9508 is “N”), the game control device 100 saves the ON data of the security signal in the external information output data area (A
9509) and the process proceeds to step A9510. That is, the fact that the data stored in the RAM has been initialized is output as external information.

When the security signal control timer is 0 (result of A9508 is “Y”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not a magnet malfunction is occurring (A9510). It should be noted that it can be determined that a magnet malfunction is occurring when the magnet malfunction flag is saved in the magnet malfunction flag area. If the magnet malfunction is not occurring (the result of A9510 is “N”), it is further determined whether the board radio wave malfunction is occurring (A9511). It should be noted that it can be determined that the board radio wave irregularity is occurring when the board radio wave irregularity flag is saved in the board radio wave irregularity flag area.

If the board radio wave is not occurring, the game control device 100 (the result of A9511 is “N”)
Further, it is determined whether or not the frame radio wave irregularity is occurring (A9512). If the frame radio wave irregularity is not occurring (the result of A9512 is “N”), it is further determined whether or not the universal communication irregularity is occurring (A9513). In the case where the ordinary telephone fraud is not occurring (the result of A9513 is “N”), it is further determined whether or not the special winning opening fraud is occurring (A9514). In addition, when the fraudulent prize winning flag for the special winning opening is saved in the fraud flag area by the fraud & winning prize monitoring process, it can be determined that the special winning portion fraud is occurring. When the special winning opening fraud is not occurring (the result of A9514 is “N”), it is determined whether or not a switch abnormality error is occurring (
A9515).

When the switch abnormality error (the above-mentioned switch abnormality 1 error) such as the disconnection of the switch connector is occurring (the result of A9515 is “N”), the game control device 100 outputs the OFF signal of the gaming machine error state signal as a test signal. The data is saved in the output data area (A9516). When a switch abnormality error is occurring (result of A9515 is "Y"), ON data of the gaming machine error status signal is saved in the test signal output data area (A9518).

On the other hand, in the game control device 100, when the magnet malfunction is occurring (the result of A9510 is “Y”).
)), when the board radio wave irregularity is occurring (the result of A9511 is “Y”), the frame radio wave irregularity is occurring (the result of A9512 is “Y”), and when the universal telephone irregularity is occurring ( The result of A9513 is "Y"), or when the special winning opening fraud is occurring (the result of A9514 is "Y").
Save the ON data of the security signal in the external information output data area (A9517),
Save the ON data of the gaming machine error status signal in the test signal output data area (A9518)
). Depending on the setting of on-data of the security signal, the security signal is output as external information to an external device (such as a hall computer).

After the steps A9516 and A9518, the game control device 100 executes a main prize ball signal editing process for setting information on the number of prize balls to be paid out (A9519). Subsequently, the game control device 100 executes a starting opening signal editing process for editing the winning signal of the starting opening (A952).
0).

Next, the game control device 100, if the symbol fixed number control timer for controlling the output time of the information relating to the number of executions of the special figure variation display game is not 0, it is updated by -1 (A9521). The minimum value of the symbol determination number control timer is set to 0.

Then, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the symbol fixed number control timer is 0 (A9522). If the value of the symbol determination frequency control timer is 0 (the result of A9522 is "Y"), that is, if the time has expired or has already expired, the OFF data of the symbol determination frequency signal is the external information output data. The data is saved in the area (A9523), and the external information editing process ends.

Further, the game control device 100, if the value of the symbol fixed number control timer is not 0 (A952
If the result of 2 is "N"), that is, if the time has not expired, the ON data of the symbol determination frequency signal is saved in the external information output data area (A9524), and the external information editing process is terminated.

[Display of batch display device during setting change]
FIG. 34 shows the display of each display unit of the collective display device 50 during the probability setting change (during the setting variable state in which the setting can be changed), that is, each light emitting unit (LED lamp D1-D18 of the collective display device 50.
FIG. 6 is a diagram for explaining a light emission mode (lighting/lighting out mode) of FIG.

During the probability setting change, the game control device 100 displays a predetermined display for the special figure variation display game of the collective display device 50 regardless of the state of the game machine 10 at the time of power-off before power-on (game state or the like). Are displayed on the display units 51 and 52 of. For example, even if the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed when the power is cut off before the power is turned on, the game control device 100 collectively displays a predetermined display during the probability setting change regardless of the state of the collective display device 50 when the power is cut off. Display units 51 and 5 of the display device 50
2 can be displayed. Therefore, while the probability setting is being changed (variable setting state), the probability setting is being changed by the predetermined display on the display portions 51 and 52 for the special figure variation display game which are easily visible from the front of the gaming machine 10, It can be suggested that the gaming machine 10 is in a state in which a game (for example, a variable display game) cannot be played.

In FIG. 34A, when the probability setting is being changed (during the setting variable state), the predetermined special variable display portion 51 (7-segment LED lamp D1) for the special figure 1 variable display game of the collective display device 50 has a predetermined value. As a display, the probability setting value (here, 6) is displayed. As described above, while the probability setting is being changed, the game machine 10 cannot perform a game (for example, a variable display game) by displaying a different display (a display different from the normal display) on the first special map variation display section 51 from that when the variation is stopped. It can be clearly shown on the front of the gaming machine 10. It should be noted that the numbers 1 to 6 indicating the probability setting values are not used in the stop display when the fluctuation is stopped in the first special figure fluctuation display section 51 and the second special figure fluctuation display section 52.

For example, the game control device 100, the probability setting value display data (corresponding to the work probability setting value
A2409) or probability setting value display data (A2413) corresponding to the probability setting value,
Output data is output to the third output port 135 and the fourth output port 136, and the working probability setting value and the probability setting value are displayed on the first special figure variation display portion 51 (LED lamp D1) in a lighting or blinking manner. Good (A1603-A1608 of output processing).

In addition, the probability setting value may be lit or blinked on the second special figure variable display section 52 (7-segment LED lamp D2) for the special figure 2 variable display game of the collective display device 50. Further, the probability setting value may be lit or blinked by using both the first special figure variation display section 51 and the second special figure variation display section 52.

Further, even if the probability setting value is set to be lighter than usual so that the probability setting value is lit or blinked so that it is difficult for a person who does not have the authority to change the setting to visually recognize the probability setting value in a place away from the gaming machine 10. Good.

In FIG. 34B, the first special map variation display portion 51 (LED lamp D1
), a change information display (for example, the letter “P”) indicating that the probability setting is being changed (during setting change state) is displayed as a predetermined display. In this way, while changing the probability setting,
By displaying on the first special figure fluctuation display section 51 different from the time when fluctuation is stopped (display different from normal), it is possible to clearly show on the front of the gaming machine 10 that the gaming machine 10 cannot play. In addition, in the stop display at the time of the fluctuation stop of the 1st special figure fluctuation display part 51 and the 2nd special figure fluctuation display part 52, the same identification information (special symbol) as the change information display (for example, character "P") is not used. I shall.

For example, when it is determined that the probability setting is being changed, the game control device 100 (A240
1 is “Y”), a process for generating output data related to the information display during change to the third output port 135 and the fourth output port 136 is executed (processing step is added to FIG. 10), and the change is in progress. The information display may be lit or blinked on the first special figure variation display section 51 (A in output processing).
1603-A1608). In addition, for example, the game control device 100, the front frame 12 (main body frame)
When the setting key switch 93 is on in the open state (the result of A1024 is “Y”),
When the probability setting value changing flag is set (A1038), output data is output to the third output port 135 and the fourth output port 136 to display the changing information display on the first special figure variation display portion 51.
The (LED lamp D1) may be lit or blinked.

The changing information display may be lit or blinking on the second special figure changing display section 52 (7-segment LED lamp D2) of the special display 2 changing display game of the collective display device 50. In addition, both the first special figure variation display section 51 and the second special figure variation display section 52 may be used to illuminate or blink the changing information display.

In FIG. 34C, during the change of the probability setting, the same display as the stop result (outcome result) of the variable display game other than the special result (other than the big hit) is displayed as the predetermined display on the first special map fluctuation display portion 51. .. In the present embodiment, the deviation result (deviation pattern) is a display in which the central segment of the first special figure fluctuation display portion 51 (7-segment LED lamp D1) is turned on.
In this way, by displaying a predetermined display on the first special figure variation display section 51 during the probability setting change, it is possible to suggest on the front of the gaming machine 10 that the gaming machine 10 is not executing a game. In addition, although the RAM area is cleared to 0 upon completion of the setting change (A2418), the initial result of the data displayed on the first special figure variation display unit 51 is displayed by displaying the result of the deviation (deviation pattern) during the probability setting change. In some cases, the value setting (A2419) becomes unnecessary.

For example, when it is determined that the probability setting is being changed, the game control device 100 (A240
The result of 1 is "Y"), and a process of generating output data relating to the display of the deviation result (deviation pattern) to the third output port 135 and the fourth output port 136 is executed (a processing step is added to FIG. 10). ), the display of the deviation result may be lit and displayed on the first special figure variation display portion 51 (A1603-A1608 of the output processing). Further, for example, when the front frame 12 (main frame) is open and the setting key switch 93 is on, the game control device 100 (the result of A1024 is “Y”).
)), when the probability setting value changing flag is set (A1038), the third output port 13
The output data may be output to the fifth output port 136 and the fourth output port 136, and the display of the disconnection result may be lit and displayed on the first special figure variation display portion 51 (LED lamp D1).

In addition, the second special figure fluctuation display section 52 (LED for special figure 2 fluctuation display game of the collective display device 50
The lamp D2) may be lit up to display the result of disconnection. In addition, the display of the deviation result may be lit and displayed using both the first special figure variation display section 51 and the second special figure variation display section 52.

In FIG. 34D, the first special figure variation display portion 51 (LED lamp D1
), an extinguishing display is displayed as a predetermined display. In this way, while the probability setting is being changed, by displaying the first special figure variation display section 51 differently from the time when the variation is stopped (an unusual display), the gaming machine 10 is in a state in which it cannot play. It can be clearly shown on the front of 10. In addition, in the stop display when the fluctuation of the first special figure fluctuation display section 51 and the second special figure fluctuation display section 52 is stopped, the extinguished display is not used.

For example, the game control device 100, until the probability setting value has been changed from the power-on (power restoration) (result of A2406 is “Y”), the first characteristic to the third output port 135 and the fourth output port 136. The output data for the figure variation display unit 51 may not be generated, and the turn-off display may be displayed on the first special figure variation display unit 51.

It should be noted that the second special figure variable display section 52 (7-segment LED lamp D2) for the special figure 2 variable display game of the collective display device 50 may be turned off. Also, the first special map variation display section 5
The display may be turned off on both the first and second special figure variation display portions 52.

34A to 34D described above, LED lamps other than the display portions 51 and 52 (D1, D2) for the special figure variation display game (for example, LED lamps D3-D) are being displayed while the probability setting is being changed.
Step 18) may be turned off or may be turned on cyclically to display the animation.

In FIG. 34E and FIG. 34F, all the display units (that is, all the light emitting units: the LED lamps D1 to D18) of the collective display device 50 are lit or blinked during the change of the probability setting so that the predetermined display is performed. The all-on display or all-blinking display is displayed on the collective display device 50. As described above, during the change of the probability setting, the display different from that at the time of the fluctuation stop (
By performing a display different from the normal one, it is possible to clearly show in the front of the gaming machine 10 that the gaming machine 10 cannot play.

The all-blinking display in FIG. 34F is executed by repeating the all-off display and all-on display of the collective display device 50 at predetermined time intervals.

For example, when it is determined that the probability setting is being changed, the game control device 100 (A240
1 is “Y”), a process for generating output data relating to the all-lit display or all-blink display to the third output port 135 and the fourth output port 136 is executed, and all-lit display or all-blink display is collectively performed. It may be displayed on the display device 50 (A1603-A1608 of output processing). Further, for example, when the front frame 12 (main frame) is open and the setting key switch 93 is on (result of A1024 is “Y”), the game control device 100 sets the probability setting value changing flag. At some time (A1038), output data may be output to the third output port 135 and the fourth output port 136 to display the all-lit display or all-blinking display on the collective display device 50 (LED lamps D1-D18). ..

FIG. 34G shows another configuration example of the collective display device 50 of FIGS. 34A to 34F. In FIG. 34G, the performance of the gaming machine 10 around the LED lamps D1 to D18 of the collective display device 50 (
Performance display regarding specifications) is displayed. The performance indicator is printed, but L
It may be displayed by light emission from an ED lamp or a liquid crystal display. As a performance display, a big hit probability display 85 at the time of low probability in setting 1 (lowest setting) and setting 6 (highest setting)
a “1/300 and 1/200”, prize ball display 85b “3&2&10&14”, round number upper limit display 85c “2,6,16”, model (official name) display 85d “CRxxx”
xx", display 85e of whether or not there is a limit regarding the probability variation big hit (here, "no limit")
Is displayed.

In the display 85b of the number of prize balls, the starting winning opening 36, the normal variation winning device 37, the general winning opening 35,
And the number of prize balls of the special variation winning device 39 are displayed in order. The limit related to the probability variation big hit means that the number of consecutive probability variation big hits is limited to a predetermined limit number of times (a single big hit can generate a predetermined number of limit hits (number of consecutive games). Become).

Since the jackpot probability display 85a at the time of low probability is displayed only for the setting 1 (minimum setting) and the setting 6 (maximum setting), it can be displayed so as to fit in the empty area around the collective display device 50. It should be noted that the jackpot probability display 85a at low probability is displayed only for the setting 3 (intermediate setting), or the jackpot probability display 85a at low probability is set 1 (minimum setting) and setting 6 (maximum setting). Only one of them (one of the lowest value 1/300 and the highest value 1/200) may be displayed, or the range of the jackpot probability at low probability (1/300 to 1/200) may be displayed.

In addition, the LED lamps D1-D of the collective display device 50 are included in the jackpot probability at the time of low probability.
Those that cannot be displayed around 18 (big hit probability of settings 2, 4, 5, etc.) may be displayed outside the game area 32 in an empty area of a member different from the collective display device 50. It should be noted that what is displayed on the collective display device 50 may be overlapped and displayed on this separate member. For example, the big hit probability at the time of low probability for settings 2, 4, 5, etc. is displayed in the empty area at the upper right, lower left, upper left of the game board of FIG. 2A, the member (guide rail 31) that partitions the game area 32, and the like. May be. Alternatively, the jackpot probability at a low probability with respect to the settings 2, 4, 5, etc. may be displayed in an empty area in the game area (for example, the surface of the lower left general winning opening 35). Further, the display 85e indicating whether or not there is a limit regarding the probability variation big hit is displayed as "with limit" only when there is a limit, and does not have to be displayed when there is no limit. Thus, the LED lamps D1-D1 of the collective display device 50 are
Items displayed as performance indicators around 8 can be changed as appropriate. For example, the display 85c of the maximum number of rounds at the time of a big hit is displayed in another area or the display device 41, and some or all of the items displayed as the performance display are displayed on the collective display device 50 as necessary, It does not have to be displayed.

In addition, the production control device 300 may display the jackpot probability at a low probability for the settings 2, 4, 5, etc. on the display device 41 during the setting change, the setting confirmation, and/or the customer waiting. .. The production control device 300 stores the jackpot probability at the time of low probability in a memory (program ROM) in advance.
321) and the like. It should be noted that what is displayed on the collective display device 50 may be redundantly displayed on the display device 41. To switch the jackpot probability display for each setting, use the production button 2
The operation may be performed by operating the operation unit such as 5 or the cross key.

35A and 35B show a predetermined display (probability set value 6 here) on the first special figure variation display section 51 or the second special figure variation display section 52 of the collective display device 50 while the probability setting is being changed. In the case of displaying, a configuration that makes it difficult to visually recognize a predetermined display from an oblique direction other than the front of the gaming machine 10 is shown. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent a person who is not authorized to change the setting from visually observing a predetermined display (especially the probability setting value) from the diagonal direction of the gaming machine 10 while changing the probability setting.

In FIG. 35(A), two recesses 51a and 51b (recesses) are provided on the front surface of the collective display device 50, and the first special view variation display unit 51 or the second special view is provided in each of the recesses 51a and 51b. The variable display section 52 is arranged. In FIG. 35(B), an annular wall 50 a (projection) surrounding the first special figure variation display portion 51 and the second special figure variation display portion 52 is provided on the front surface of the collective display device 50. This makes it difficult to visually recognize the display on the first special figure variation display section 51 or the second special figure variation display section 52 from an oblique direction.

[Control of production control device]
The control (process) executed by the effect control device 300 according to the effect control program will be described below.

[Main processing (production control device)]
First, the details of the main process executed by the effect control device 300 will be described. Fig. 36
6 is a flowchart showing a procedure of a main process (main program) executed by the effect control device 300. The main processing is executed by the main control microcomputer 311 (production microcomputer) when the game machine 10 is powered on. In addition, in the flowchart of the process executed by the performance control device 300, the code (number) of the step is represented as “B***”.

When the execution of the main process is started, effect control device 300 first prohibits interruption (
B0001). Next, the CPU 311 and VDP 312 are initialized (B0002, B
0003) and permit interrupts (B0004). When the interruption is permitted, the game control device 1
The command reception interrupt process for receiving the command transmitted from 00 is ready to be executed.

Next, the production control device 300 permits generation of display data to be displayed on the display device 41 or the like (B0005), and sets a random number seed used for random number generation (B0006). Then, the initial value at power-on is saved in the area to be initialized (B0007).

Then, production control device 300 clears the WDT (watchdog timer) (B0).
008). The WDT is started by the above-mentioned CPU initialization (B0002), and the CPU 311
Monitor whether is working properly. If the WDT is not cleared even after the lapse of a certain period, the WDT times out and the CPU 311 is reset.

After that, the effect control device 300 uses the RTC (real time clock) 3 as a time measuring means.
The RTC reading process for reading the time information from 38 is executed (B0009).

In the RTC reading process, the time information may be read from the RTC 338 at a predetermined cycle (eg, every one minute), and it is not necessary to read the time information each time the process moves to step B0009. Moreover, when the power supply to the effect control device 300 is turned on (that is, the power supply to the game machine 10 is turned on), the RTC reading process may be executed only once (by changing the position of the RTC reading process, for example, step B0003). Between B and B0004). The production control device 300 sets a time timer (time measuring means) for measuring the time in the timer area in the RAM, and reads the time information from the RTC 338 only once when the time information is read from the RTC 338 at a predetermined cycle or when the power is turned on. When reading the information, the time timer may be adjusted to match the time of the RTC 338. And production control device 300 may perform various processes using a timer for time instead of RTC338. By doing so, the number of times of processing for reading the time from the RTC 338 can be reduced, and the load on the CPU 311 is reduced.

In the RTC reading process, if the read time matches any of a plurality of predetermined times (first predetermined time, second predetermined time,... ), a predetermined effect may be executed. The player can estimate the set value from the time interval by randomly selecting the time interval of the predetermined time according to the set value. For example, the selection rate for a long time interval may be drawn so that the larger the set value, the smaller the selection rate. In addition, the player can estimate the set value from the execution period of the predetermined effect by drawing the execution period of executing the predetermined effect with a probability according to the set value. For example, the selection rate for a long execution period may be selected so that the larger the set value, the larger the selection rate.

Next, the effect control device 300 detects an operation signal of the effect button 25 (signal of the effect button switch 25a or the touch panel 25b) by the player, and changes effect contents (setting) according to the detected signal. Performance button input processing is executed (B0010). continue,
A hall/player setting mode process is executed for accepting operations such as changing the brightness and volume of the LED and liquid crystal by the person in charge of the game hall (game shop) or the player (B0011). In the hall/player setting mode process, the player can customize the effect according to the effect points described later.

Next, the production control device 300 executes production point control processing for executing addition and clearing of production points (B0012). In the production point control processing, the production points to be added to the production points by performing the productions and the operations to be added to the production points are performed, and at the end of the game, the production points can be carried over to the next game. For example, information including information on effect points is displayed on the display device 41 as a QR code (registered trademark). For example, the effect control device 300 can display the QR code (registered trademark) on the display device 41 in the hall/player setting mode process. In addition, the player can estimate the set value from the added value by lottery the value to be added to the effect points (added value) with a probability according to the set value. For example, the lottery may be performed such that the selection rate of a large addition value increases as the setting value increases.

Next, the production control device 300 executes a random number update process for updating a random number such as a production random number (B0013), analyzes the received command received from the game control device 100, and executes the corresponding received command check process. (B0014). The details of the received command check processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the effect control device 300 updates various data in accordance with the contents displayed on the display device (display means) such as the display device 41 and sets the drawing to be displayed on the display device 41 in the display frame buffer. Perform effect display edit processing (B0015). The drawing data set at this time can update the image on the display device 41 without any problem as long as the VDP 312 can complete the drawing within a frame period of 1/30 second (about 33.3 msec). Then, the drawing preparation for the display frame buffer is completed and the drawing command preparation end setting is executed (B0016).

Next, the production control device 300 determines whether or not it is the frame switching timing (B
0017). If it is not the frame switching timing (result of B0017 is “N”), the process of B0017 is repeated until the frame switching timing is reached. If it is the frame switching timing (result of B0017 is “Y”), the display device 41 is displayed. Instruct screen drawing (B0
018). Since the frame cycle of the present embodiment is 1/30 seconds, for example, when the periodic V blank (image update) is executed twice every 1/60 seconds (1/2 of the frame cycle), the frame switching is performed. .. The image may not be updated in 1/60 seconds, and the interval may be further increased.

Moreover, the production control device 300 executes a sound control process for controlling the sound output from the speaker 19 (B0019).

In addition, the production control device 300 executes a decoration control process for controlling the decoration device (the board decoration device 46, the frame decoration device 18) including the LED (B0020). In the decoration control process, for example, light emission control of a decoration device such as an LED is executed.

Furthermore, the performance control device 300 executes a movable body control process for controlling a performance device (a panel performance device 44, a frame performance device) such as an electric accessory driven by a motor and a solenoid (B002).
1). In the movable body control process, for example, the accessory motion effect for driving the motor is set.

And production control device 300 will return to the processing of B0008, after finishing the processing of B0021 mentioned above. After that, the processing from B0008 to B0021 is repeated.

[Reception command check processing]
Next, the details of the received command check process (B0014) in the above-described main process (FIG. 36) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the received command check process executed by the production control device 300.

The production control device 300 first loads the value of the command reception counter in the command reception counter area of the RAM as the command reception number in order to check the number of commands received from the game control device 100 (B1101). Then, it is determined whether the command reception number is not 0 (B1102). If the number of received commands is 0, that is, if there is no command received from the game control device 100 (result of B1102 is “N”), there is no command to analyze, and the received command check process ends.

On the other hand, the effect control device 300, when the command reception number is not 0, that is, when the command is received from the game control device 100 (the result of B1102 is “Y”), the command reception counter in the command reception counter area. After subtracting the value by the number of received commands (B1103
), the contents of the received command buffer of RAM are copied to the command area for analysis (B11).
04). Here, since the received command buffer is a ring buffer, there is no problem in subtracting the number of received commands before copying the contents of the buffer to the command area. Further, even if a new command is received during copying, the data will not be overwritten.

Then, production control device 300 updates the command read index by +1 within the range of 0 to 31 (adds 1) (B1105). The received command buffer stores the received command to 32
It is configured to store up to individual items. The received commands are stored in the received command buffer in the order of command read indexes 0 to 31, and here the commands received in the order of index are read and copied to the command area for analysis. It should be noted that at the timing when copying to the command area for analysis is completed, the storage area of the received command buffer corresponding to the read command read index is cleared.

Rendering control device 300 determines whether or not the copying of the command for the number of received commands loaded in the process of step B1101 is completed (B1106), and when the copying is not completed (the result of B1106 is “N )), the processes of steps B1104 to B1106 are repeated.

When the effect control device 300 receives the command transmitted from the game control device 100, the content of the received command is stored in the received command buffer, and at the same time, the command reception counter value in the command reception counter area is added and updated. Although 32 commands can be stored in the received command buffer, the received command is separately analyzed in the command area for analysis. Then, when the content of the received command is copied to the analysis command area, the reception command buffer and the command reception counter value are cleared. As described above, by always allocating a free area in the received command buffer without directly analyzing it, it is possible to prepare for a large number of commands to be received.

Subsequently, the effect control device 300 determines that the result of B1106 is “Y” when the copying is completed.
]), the received command content in the analysis command area is loaded (B1107), and a received command analysis process for analyzing the content is executed (B1108). The details of the received command analysis processing will be described later with reference to FIG. Also, the address of the command area for analysis is updated (B1109). After that, it is determined whether or not the analysis of the commands corresponding to the number of received commands loaded in the process of step B1101 is completed (B1110), and if the analysis is not completed (result of B1110 is “N”), step The processing from B1107 to B1110 is repeated. When the analysis is completed (the result of B1110 is “Y”), the received command check processing ends.

[Reception command analysis processing]
Next, the details of the received command analysis processing (B1108) in the received command check processing (FIG. 37) described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 38 shows the production control device 30.
6 is a flowchart showing a procedure of a received command analysis process executed by 0.

The production control device 300 first separates the upper byte of the received command into the MODE part and the lower byte into the ACTION part (ACT part) (B1201). The command transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 is a MODE section (MODE command) and A.
It is composed of a CTION section (ACTION command), and is normally continuously transmitted from a MODE section indicating the type of command. Therefore, the upper and lower parts of the received command are M
The ODE section and the ACTION section are arranged in this order.

Next, the production control device 300 determines whether the MODE part is within the normal range (B12).
02). That is, it is determined whether or not it is a value that can be taken by the MODE part indicating the command type (value assigned as the command specification indicating the type). If the MODE part is within the normal range (result of B1202 is “Y”), it is similarly determined whether or not the ACTION part is within the normal range (B1203). That is, it is determined whether or not the value is a value (a value assigned as a command specification indicating the content) that can be taken by the ACTION section indicating the content of the command (a concrete effect instruction or the like). If the ACTION part is within the normal range (B1203
Result of "Y"), and further, the ACTION section for the MODE section determines whether or not the combination is correct (B1204). That is, it is determined whether or not the value of the ACTION section is a value that can be taken by the command of the type specified by the MODE section. If the combination is correct (the result of B1204 is “Y”), the command processing corresponding to the command system is executed in the processing of B1205 and thereafter.

The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the value of the MODE part is within the range of the variable system command (B1205). The variation system command is a command for instructing a variation pattern of the decorative special symbol, and there is a variation command (set by the variation start information setting process of FIG. 42). And
If the MODE part represents a variable system command (result of B1205 is “Y”), the variable system command process is executed (B1206), and the received command analysis process ends.

Production control device 300, if the MODE section does not represent a variation system command (B12
The result of 05 is “N”), and then it is determined whether or not the MODE part is within the range of the big hit system command (
B1207). In addition, the big hit system command is a command for instructing an operation (display of a fanfare screen or a round screen) related to the performance during the big hit. For example, a fanfare command (set in the special figure display process), a round command (fanfare/interval). These are an intermediate command (set in middle processing), an interval command (set in big winning opening opening processing), an ending command (set in big winning opening opening processing), and the like. When the MODE part indicates a big hit type command (the result of B1207 is "Y"), the big hit type command processing is executed (B1
208), and ends the received command analysis process.

Production control device 300, if the MODE part does not represent a big hit system command (B1
The result of 207 is “N”), and then it is determined whether or not the MODE part is within the range of the symbol type command (
B1209). Note that the symbol-based commands include a decoration special drawing 1 command (A4018) and a decoration special drawing 2 command (A4112) corresponding to the stop design pattern. Then, when the MODE part represents a symbol type command (result of B1209 is "Y"), symbol type command processing is executed (B1210), and the received command analysis processing is ended.

Production control device 300, in the case where the MODE part does not represent the symbol type command (B12
The result of 09 is "N"), and then it is determined whether the MODE part is within the range of the single-shot system command (B
1211). If the MODE part indicates a single-shot system command (result of B1211 is “Y”), single-shot system command process is executed (B1212), and the received command analysis process is terminated.

Production control device 300, if the MODE part does not represent a one-shot system command (B12
The result of 11 is “N”), and then it is determined whether or not the MODE part is within the range of the prefetch symbol type command (B1213). The prefetch symbol system command includes the prefetch stop symbol command (see FIG. 15).
A3014). Then, when the MODE part represents a prefetching symbol type command (B
The result of 1213 is “Y”), the prefetch symbol type command processing is executed (B1214), and the received command analysis processing is ended.

Production control device 300, if the MODE part does not represent the look-ahead symbol system command (
The result of B1213 is "N"), and then it is determined whether or not the MODE part is within the range of the prefetch variable system command (B1215). The look-ahead variation-type commands include the above-mentioned look-ahead variation pattern command (A3018 in FIG. 15). Then, when the MODE part represents the prefetching variable system command (the result of B1215 is “Y”), the prefetching variable system command process is executed (B1216).
), the received command analysis processing ends.

On the other hand, if the MODE part does not represent the look-ahead variation system command (the result of B1215 is “N”), the effect control device 300 may have received an unexpected command (for example, a command used only in the test mode). Therefore, the received command analysis processing ends. When the MODE part is not in the normal range (result of B1202 is “N”), the ACTION part is not in normal range (result of B1203 is “N”), or the AC for the MODE part is
Even when the TION unit is not the correct combination (the result of B1204 is “N”), the received command analysis processing is ended.

[Single command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 39, details of the one-shot system command processing (B1212) in the above-described received command analysis processing (FIG. 38) will be described. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the procedure of single-shot system command processing executed by the performance control device 300.

The production control device 300 first determines whether or not the MODE section represents a model designation command indicating the type of gaming machine (B1301). When the MODE part indicates a model designation command (result of B1301 is "Y"), model setting processing for setting the type of gaming machine is executed (B
1302), single-shot system command processing ends.

Production control device 300, if the MODE part does not represent the model designation command (B1
The result of 301 is "N"), and then it is determined whether or not the MODE section represents a RAM initialization command (B1303). If the MODE part represents a command for RAM initialization, (
When the result of B1303 is "Y"), the RAM initialization setting process for notifying the RAM initialization is executed (B1304), and the single-shot system command process ends.

When the MODE section does not represent the RAM initialization command (the result of B1303 is “N”), the effect control device 300 next determines whether or not the MODE section represents the power failure recovery command. (B1305). If the MODE part indicates a command for power failure recovery (result of B1305 is “Y”), power failure recovery setting processing is executed (B1306), and the single-shot system command processing ends.

Production control device 300, if the MODE part does not represent the command at the time of power failure recovery (
The result of B1305 is "N"), and then it is determined whether or not the MODE section represents a customer waiting demo command (B1307). If the MODE part indicates a customer waiting demo command (B1
The result of 307 is "Y"), the customer waiting demo setting process is executed (B1308), and the single-shot system command process ends.

Production control device 300, if the MODE section does not represent the customer waiting demo command (B
The result of 1307 is "N"), and then the MODE section displays the decoration special figure 1 hold number command (A2917).
, A3207) is represented (B1309). If the MODE part indicates the decoration special figure 1 reservation number command (result of B1309 is "Y"), the special figure 1 reservation information setting process is executed (B1310), and the single-shot system command process is ended.

When the MODE part does not represent the decoration special figure 1 hold number command (the result of B1309 is “N”), the MODE control unit next causes the MODE part to display the decoration special figure 2 hold number command (A2
917, A3203) is determined (B1311). When the MODE part indicates the decoration special figure 2 reservation number command (the result of B1311 is "Y"), the special figure 2 reservation information setting process is executed (B1312), and the single command system command process is ended.

When the MODE part does not represent the decoration special figure 2 hold number command (result of B1311 is “N”), the effect control device 300 next determines whether or not the MODE part represents a probability information command. (B1313). If the MODE part represents the probability information command (B1
The result of 313 is "Y"), the probability information setting process is executed (B1314), and the one-shot system command process is ended.

Production control device 300, if the MODE part does not represent the probability information command (B1
The result of 313 is “N”), and then it is determined whether or not the MODE part represents an error/illegal command (B1315). Examples of error/illegal commands include a fraud generation command (set by fraud & prize monitoring process when fraud occurs), fraud cancellation command (set by fraud & prize monitoring process when fraud is released), There are a state off command (A2204) and a state on command (A2207). As the state on command, the glass frame opening detection switch 63
From the front frame opening detection switch 64 (main frame opening detection switch) (body frame opening error, front frame opening error). The status off command indicates that no error has occurred.

When the MODE part indicates an error/illegal command (result of B1315 is “Y”), an error/illegal setting process for notifying or canceling the error or fraud is executed (
(B1316), terminates the single-shot command processing.

When the MODE section does not represent an error/illegal command (the result of B1315 is “N”), the MODE control section 300 then causes the MODE section to execute a command for effect mode switching (special figure displaying process). Etc.) is determined (B1317). When the MODE part indicates a command for effect mode switching (result of B1317 is “Y”), effect mode switching setting processing is executed (B1318), and the single shot system command processing ends.

When the MODE part does not represent the command for effect mode switching (the result of B1317 is “N”), the effect control device 300 next determines whether or not the MODE part represents an out-ball number command. (B1319). If the MODE part indicates the out-ball number command (result of B1319 is “Y”), the out-ball number receiving process is executed (B1320), and the single shot system command process is ended.

Production control device 300, if the MODE part does not represent the out-ball number command (B
The result of 1319 is “N”), and then the MODE part counts the command (A3107, A3).
It is determined whether or not to represent 111 special winning opening count command) (B1321). And
If the MODE part indicates a count command (result of B1321 is “Y”), count information setting processing is executed (B1322), and the single-shot system command processing ends.

If the MODE part does not represent the count command, the effect control device 300 (B
The result of 1321 is "N"), and it is determined whether the MODE part represents a setting value information command (probability setting value information command) (B1323). The set value information command is step A in FIG. 5B.
It is included in the command at the time of power recovery from 1035 and the command at the time of RAM initialization transmitted in the process of step A1045. When the MODE part represents the set value information command (
The result of B1323 is "Y"), the set value reception process is executed (B1324), and the single-shot system command process ends. In the set value reception process, the set value (probability set value) is stored in a storage unit such as a RAM and necessary processing is executed.

Production control device 300, if the MODE part does not represent the set value information command (B
The result of 1323 is “N”), and it is determined whether or not the MODE part represents a setting change type command (B1325). As a setting change command, for example, a setting change command (A1
029), command for changing probability setting (A1041), command for changing probability setting value (A2)
415), and a command (A2421) for ending the probability setting change. Then, when the MODE part indicates a setting change type command (result of B1325 is “Y”), the setting change type information setting process is executed (B1326), and the one-shot type command process is ended. In the setting change type information setting process, the contents of the setting change type command are stored and the process corresponding to the command is executed. For example, when a command for setting change is received, in the setting change system information setting process, a setting change instruction display for urging the player to change the setting is displayed on the display device 41.

Production control device 300, if the MODE part does not represent the command of the setting change system (
The result of B1325 is "N"), and it is determined whether or not the MODE part represents a command of the setting confirmation system (B1327). Examples of setting confirmation commands include a command for confirming probability setting value (A2508) and a command for confirming probability setting value (A2512). And MOD
When the E section represents the command of the setting confirmation system (the result of B1327 is "Y"), the setting confirmation system information setting process is executed (B1328), and the single-shot system command process is ended. In the setting confirmation system information setting process, the contents of the setting confirmation system command are stored and the process corresponding to the command is executed.

Next, it is determined whether or not the MODE part represents a symbol stop command (B1329). Note that the symbol stop command includes, for example, the symbol stop command of special figure 1 and the symbol stop command of special figure 2. Then, when the MODE part represents the command of the symbol stop (the result of B1329 is “Y”), the production control device 300 next determines whether or not the command of the MODE part is a normal command ( B1330).

When the command of the MODE part is a normal command (the result of B1330 is “Y”)
The production control device 300 sets the stop mode of the corresponding special figure (B1331), sets the game state flag to the normal state after all the symbols stop (B1332), and ends the single-shot command processing. In the process of B1332, as an example, the game state flag is set to the normal state, but the game state flag is a flag of “in fluctuation”, “in big hit”, “in small hit” depending on the timing of execution of this process. Is set.

On the other hand, when the MODE part does not represent the command to stop the symbol (the result of B1329 is "N
)) or when the command of the MODE part is not normal (result of B1330 is “N”)
Then, effect control device 300 ends the single-shot system command process.

[Read-ahead command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 40, the details of the prefetching symbol type command processing (B1214) in the above-described received command analysis processing (FIG. 38) will be described. FIG. 40 shows the production control device 30.
It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the pre-reading symbol type command processing performed by 0.

The production control device 300 first determines whether or not the latest pending information is information of special figure 1 hold (special figure 1 starting memory), for example, the latest received special special figure hold number command is the decoration special figure 1 hold number. It is determined whether the command is a command (B1601). If the latest hold information is the special figure 1 hold information (the result of B1601 is “Y”), the prefetch symbol system command (prefetch stop symbol command) is placed in the special figure 1 prefetch symbol command area corresponding to the special figure 1 hold number. It is saved (B1602).

Production control device 300, if the latest pending information is not the information of special figure 1 pending (the result of B1601 is "N"), that is, the latest decorative special figure pending number command received is the decorative special figure 2 pending number command. In this case, the prefetch symbol system command (prefetch stop symbol command) is saved in the special figure 2 prefetch symbol command area corresponding to the special figure 2 reservation number (B1603).

Rendering control device 300, after steps B1602 and B1603, sets a readahead variable system command reception wait flag indicating that it is waiting to receive a readahead variable system command (B160).
4). This is because the pre-reading symbol system command and the pre-reading variable system command are set, so that the pre-reading variable system command is transmitted from the game control device 100 following the pre-reading symbol system command. After that, the prefetching symbol type command processing is ended.

[Prefetch variable system command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 41, the details of the prefetching variable system command process (B1216) in the received command analysis process (FIG. 38) described above will be described. FIG. 41 shows the production control device 30.
7 is a flowchart showing a procedure of a prefetching variable system command processing executed by 0.

The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not it is waiting to receive a prefetching variable system command (B1701). When the read-ahead variable system command reception wait flag (B1604) is set, it can be determined that the read-ahead variable system command is waiting to be received. If the prefetch variable system command is not waiting (the result of B1701 is “N”), the prefetch variable system command processing is ended. When waiting to receive a prefetching variable command (the result of B1701 is "
Y”), and clear the prefetch variable system command reception wait flag (B1702).

Next, the effect control device 300 (sub-board), the design of the latest pending information (Special Figure 1 or Special Figure 2)
Of the pre-reading variable MODE conversion table corresponding to the number of reservations of (B1703), and the sub pre-reading variable command MODE part is acquired corresponding to the MODE part of the pre-reading variable system command (
B1704). Next, the look-ahead variation ACT conversion table is set (B1705), and the pre-read variation command ACT in the sub corresponding to the ACTION section (ACT section) of the look-ahead variation system command is set.
The copy is acquired (B1706).

Next, the production control device 300 determines whether or not both the converted MODE part and the ACT part (that is, the intra-sub prefetch change command MODE part and the ACT part) are other than 0 (B1707).
.. If the command is normal (valid), it is converted to a value other than 0. MODE part after conversion, A
If both CT parts are not 0 (result of B1707 is "Y"), the converted MODE part and A
The converted command composed of the CT section is saved in the pre-reading variable command area (special figure 1 pre-reading variable command area or special figure 2 pre-reading variable command area) corresponding to the latest pending information and pending number (B1708). Then, the prefetch command consistency check process is executed (B170
9), it is determined whether or not the combination of the converted MODE part and ACT part is normal (B1710).
).

Note that the time of the first half fluctuation corresponding to the MODE part changes depending on the number of holds when the hold is started when the variable display game is started. When the hold starts the variable display game, if there is no other hold, the first half change becomes longer, and if a new hold occurs and the number of hold is large, the first half change becomes shorter. Therefore, even if the time value of the first-half variation is changed, the MODE part of the received prefetching variation type command is converted into the sub-internal prefetching variation command MODE section so that the internal command of the effect control device 300 can be treated the same.

Further, since the type of reach does not relate to the number of holdings, the latter half fluctuation corresponding to the in-sub prefetch change command ACT unit does not depend on the number of holdings. However, since there are different types of reach in the same system,
Temporarily, without changing the ACT section (the value of the latter half fluctuation) of the look-ahead fluctuation system command, the effect control device 30
If 0 is used as it is, the number increases and it becomes difficult to check. For example, for normal reach,
There are types such as normal reach-1 stop deviation and normal reach+1 stop deviation.
Therefore, by converting the ACT units showing the reach of the same system into the same sub-prefetch variable command ACT units, the number is reduced and the load of the check process such as the prefetch command consistency check process is reduced.

Next, the production control device 300 determines that at least one of the converted MODE part and ACT part (that is, the sub prefetch change command MODE part and ACT part) is 0 (the result of B1707 is “N”), or , When the combination of the converted MODE part and ACT part is not normal (B171
If the result of 0 is “N”), it is determined that the converted command is abnormal, and the prefetching variable system command processing is ended.

When the combination of the converted MODE part and ACT part is normal, the performance control device 300 (B
If the result of 1710 is “Y”), the prefetch target hold information (latest hold information) is loaded from the preread variable command area (B1711), and the prefetch lottery process regarding the latest prefetch effect is executed (B1712). Examples of the prefetching effect include a continuous notice effect (including a chance eye prefetching effect), a prefetch zone effect, and a pending change notice. Then, it is determined whether or not the latest read-ahead notice effect (holding change notice) is generated (B1713). When the latest pending look-ahead notice effect occurs (the result of B1713 is "Y"), the point information corresponding to the selected look-ahead effect is set (B1714).

Next, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the generated look-ahead notice effect (holding change notice) is an effect that starts immediately (B1715). When the pre-reading notice effect that occurs is an effect that starts immediately (the result of B1715 is "Y"), the display corresponding to the selected pre-reading effect is set (B1716). Then, the prefetching variable system command processing is ended.

On the other hand, the effect control device 300 does not generate the latest pending look-ahead notice effect (B171).
The result of 3 is "N"), or when the prefetching notice effect that occurs is not an effect that starts immediately (
The result of B1715 is "N"), as it is. The prefetching variable system command processing ends.

[Design command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 42, details of the symbol system command processing (B1210) in the above-described received command analysis processing (FIG. 38) will be described. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the procedure of symbol-based command processing executed by the effect control device 300.

The production control device 300 receives the received symbol-based command (decorative special figure 1 command or decorative special figure 2
The special figure type corresponding to the MODE part of (command) is set (B1801). The special map type is special map 1 or special map 2. Then, the MODE part and the ACTION part (ACT
Set the symbol type corresponding to the combination of (part) and save it in a predetermined area such as RAM (B180).
2). Here, in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, since the distribution ratio of the symbols changes, the symbol type is set using the table for each MODE. In the present embodiment, the symbol type is a deviating symbol or the 2R certainty variation jackpot symbol (2R-A1 etc.) shown in FIG. 27, 2R normal jackpot symbol (2
R-A2, etc.), 6R probability variation big hit pattern (6R-A1, etc.), 6R normal big hit pattern (6R-A2)
Etc.), 16R probability variation big hit pattern (16R-A1 etc.), 16R normal big hit pattern (16R-A2)
Etc.).

[Variable command processing]
Next, the details of the variable command processing (B1206) in the received command analysis processing (FIG. 38) described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing a procedure of variable system command processing executed by the effect control device 300.

Production control device 300, the special figure type (special figure 1 of the fluctuation command which is received (fluctuation command).
Alternatively, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2) is undetermined (B1901). When the special figure type is undetermined (the result of B1901 is “Y”), the variable system command processing ends. If the special figure type is not undetermined (the result of B1901 is "N"), the combination of the received variable system command and the symbol system command is checked (B1902), and whether the variable system command and the symbol type are inconsistent or not. Is determined (B1903). Here, the inconsistency is a contradiction in performing the production, such as when a symbol system command of a big hit symbol is received although an outlying variable system command is received. If the variable type command and the symbol type do not match (the result of B1903 is "Y")
, The variable system command processing ends.

Production control device 300, if the variation type command and the symbol type is not inconsistent (the result of B1903 is "N"), it determines the variation pattern type from the variation type command (variation command) (B1).
904), the variable effect setting process for setting the variable effect which is the effect during change is executed (B19).
05). There are a plurality of effects for the same variable command. Subsequently, the special state is set to change in the game state flag indicating the game state (P machine state) (B1906), and if the number of pre-reading effects of the continuous notice effect (the remaining number of continuous notice effects) is not 0, -1 is updated. Yes (B1907
).

[Variation effect setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 44, details of the variation effect setting process (B1905) in the above-described variation system command process (FIG. 43) will be described. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the variable effect setting process executed by the effect control device 300.

The production control device 300 first determines whether or not the variation pattern type is a variation without reach (variation that does not reach the reach state) (B2001). When the variation pattern type is variation without reach (result of B2001 is “Y”), the number of production points, model code,
Set the first half notice distribution group address table corresponding to special figure type, effect mode, and set value (probability set value) (B2002), and support the MODE part of variable system commands (variable command) and the number of pending special figure types Obtain the address of the first half notice distribution group table (B200
3). In the case of the fluctuation without reach, the fluctuation time is shortened as the number of reservations is large, and therefore the address of the table corresponding to the number of reservations is acquired.

When the variation pattern type is not the reachless variation (the result of B2001 is “N”), that is, when the reachable variation, the effect control device 300, the number of effect points, the model code, the special figure type, the effect mode, The first half notice distribution group address table corresponding to the symbol type and the setting value (probability setting value) is set (B2004), and the first half notice distribution group table corresponding to the MODE part of the variation system command (variation command) and the variation pattern type The address of is acquired (B2005).

After the steps B2003 and B2005, the effect control device 300 performs the lottery of the notice that appears during the first half fluctuation (before the reach) (B2006). In addition, the probability of the advance lottery depends on the set value. Subsequently, the second half notice distribution group address table corresponding to the number of production points, model code, special figure type, production mode, symbol type, and set value (probability set value) is set (B2007), and the variation system command The address of the latter half notice distribution group table corresponding to the ACT section is acquired (B2008), and the notice lottery that appears during the second half change (during reach) is performed (B2009). In addition, the probability of the advance lottery depends on the set value. After that, the contents of the variation effect corresponding to the MODE part and the ACT part of the variation system command (variation command) are determined (B2010). It should be noted that the variation time command and main reach contents can be known from the variation system command.

Next, the effect control device 300 determines the content of the effect (advance effect) corresponding to the result of the advance notice lottery (B2011). Then, for example, a stop symbol setting process for determining a stop symbol of the decorative special figure variable display game is executed according to the contents of the variable effect such as the reach effect and the notice effect (B20).
12). Here, the decorative stop design is specifically determined, such as determining the separation in the case of the outlying design.

Next, the performance control device 300 performs the display setting of the variable performance such as the reach performance (B2013).
), display setting of notice production is performed (B2014). Then, hold reduction (
(Hold shift) is set, and, for example, a display in which the number of held displays corresponding to the decorative special figure that changes this time is reduced is set (B2015). Then, a voice number that determines the effect mode (sound output mode) by the sound of the speaker and a decoration number that determines the effect mode by the light emission of the decoration device are set (B
2016). The decorating device (board decorating device 46, frame decorating device 18) has a plurality of decorative light emitting portions (decorative LEDs, etc.), and emits light in a light emitting mode (color of each LED, light emitting timing, etc.) determined by a decoration number. ..

The voice number and the decoration number can be set not only based on the contents of the effect, but also by lottery with a lottery probability according to the set value (probability set value). In this way, the player can change the light emitting mode of the decoration device, that is, the light emitting mode of the decorative light emitting unit (LED) from the game machine 10
You can enjoy guessing the setting value (probability setting value) of.

Next, the effect control device 300 performs display setting of the decoration special map variation corresponding to the special drawing type (B
2017), in addition to the above-mentioned first to third special symbols that fluctuate on the display device 41, the display setting of the fourth symbol variation regarding the fourth special symbol (fourth symbol, identification information) is performed (B2018). In addition,
The fourth symbol variation is the lamp display unit 1 of the above-described lamp display device 80 provided in addition to the display device 41.
2 (LED).

[Big hit type command processing]
Next, the details of the big hit command processing (B1208) in the above-described received command analysis processing (FIG. 38) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the big hit system command processing executed by the effect control device 300.

First, production control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE part of the received big hit system command represents fanfare (B2101). When the MODE part of the big hit system command represents a fanfare (the result of B2101 is “Y”), that is, when the big hit system command is a fanfare command, a fanfare production setting process for setting a fanfare production is executed (B2102). .. It should be noted that the fanfare command includes information on the maximum number of rounds for this big hit. Then, the current gaming state of the gaming machine 10 (P machine state)
The fanfare is set to the game state flag indicating (B2103), and the big hit system command processing is ended. The upper limit number of rounds can also be obtained from the symbol type determined from the symbol system command (decorative special command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern).

If the MODE part of the received big hit system command does not represent fanfare (the result of B2101 is “N”), production control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE part of the big hit system command represents a round ( B2104). When the MODE part represents a round (B210
If the result of 4 is “Y”), that is, if the big hit system command is a round command, the effect control device 300 executes the round effect setting process and indicates the current gaming state (P machine state) of the gaming machine 10. The game status flag is set to be in a round (B2105, B2106), and the big hit system command processing is ended.

When the MODE part of the received big hit system command does not represent a round (the result of B2104 is “N”), the production control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE part of the big hit system command represents an interval ( B2107). When the MODE part represents an interval (B21
If the result of 07 is “Y”), that is, if the big hit system command is an interval command, the effect control device 300 executes the interval effect setting process and indicates the current gaming state (P machine state) of the gaming machine 10. Set the game status flag to the interval (B2108, B2109
), the big hit system command processing ends.

If the MODE part of the received big hit system command does not represent the interval (B210
7 is “N”), the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE part of the big hit system command indicates the ending (B2110). When the MODE part indicates the ending (B
When the result of 2110 is “Y”), that is, when the big hit system command is the ending command, the effect control device 300 executes the ending effect setting process for setting the ending effect, and the current gaming state of the gaming machine 10. The ending state is set in the game state flag indicating (P machine state) (B2111, B2112), and the big hit system command processing is ended.

If the MODE part of the received big hit system command does not indicate the ending (B
If the result of 2110 is “N”), the effect control device 300 ends the big hit system command processing without executing any processing.

[Operation/Effect of First Embodiment]
According to the first embodiment, the gaming machine 10 satisfies the starting condition (for example, winning at the starting winning opening).
A game control means (game control device 100) capable of displaying a variable display game in which the identification information is variably displayed on the display section (for example, the first special figure fluctuation display section 51 or the second special figure fluctuation display section 52) based on
When the stop result of the variable display game is a special result, a special game state advantageous to the player is generated. The setting changing means (for example, the setting key switch 93 and the setting value changing switch 102) can change the setting related to the game condition (or the setting related to the game) when the game machine 10 is powered on. The game control means (game control device 100) can shift to a setting variable state where the setting can be changed when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on, and the power is cut off before shifting to the setting variable state. A predetermined display is displayed on the display unit regardless of the state of the gaming machine 10 (FIG. 34).

Therefore, in the setting variable state (during setting change), the setting is being changed and the game machine 1 is being displayed by a predetermined display on the display unit for the special figure variation display game which is easily visible from the front of the game machine 10.
It can be indicated that 0 is a state in which a game (for example, a variable display game) cannot be performed.
Even in the setting variable state, the state of the gaming machine 10 at the time of power-off is maintained, and the normal display at the time of stoppage of fluctuations (outlier symbol, big hit symbol) etc. is displayed on the display part for the special figure variation display game. Then, for example, when the front frame 12 (main frame) is closed before the setting change is completed,
There is a possibility that the player will be mistaken for playing.

According to the first embodiment, the game control means (game control device 100) emits a variable display game in which the identification information is changed and displayed based on the establishment of the start condition, such as a light emitting section (for example, LED lamps D1 and D).
It can be displayed in 2). The gaming machine 10 includes the light emitting unit and a display device (collective display device 50) including another light emitting unit different from the light emitting unit. The game control means may blink all the light emitting units of the display device in the setting variable state in which the setting can be changed (FIG. 34F).
..

Therefore, in the setting variable state (during setting change), it is possible to clearly show on the front of the gaming machine 10 that the gaming machine 10 is in a state in which it cannot play, by displaying an unusual display on the display device (collective display device 50). ..

According to the first embodiment, the game control means (game control device 100), in the setting variable state (during setting change), the display unit (for example, the first special figure fluctuation display) indicating information indicating that the setting variable state is set. It may be displayed on the section 51 or the second special figure variation display section 52) (FIG. 34B).

Therefore, in the setting change state (during setting change), by displaying an abnormal display on the display unit for the variable display game, the game machine 10 is in a state in which it cannot play.
Can be clearly displayed in front of.

According to the first embodiment, the game control means (game control device 100), in the setting variable state (setting change), the display unit (for example, the first special figure variation display section 51 and the second special figure variation display section 5).
2) may be turned off (FIG. 34D).

Therefore, in the setting change state (during setting change), the display unit for the variable display game is displayed differently from the normal display (display different from that when the variable display game is stopped changing), whereby the gaming machine 10 is operated.
It can be clearly shown on the front of the gaming machine 10 that the game cannot be played.

According to the first embodiment, the game control means (game control device 100) displays the same display as the stop result (disappearance result) of the variable display game other than the special result (other than the jackpot result) in the setting variable state. , May be displayed on the first special figure variation display section 51 or the second special figure variation display section 52) (FIG. 34C).

Therefore, by displaying a predetermined display on the display unit for the variable display game in the setting variable state (during setting change), it is possible to suggest in front of the gaming machine 10 that the gaming machine 10 is not playing a game. By displaying the stop result (outcome result) of the variable display game other than the special result (other than the jackpot result) while the setting is being changed, the data displayed on the display unit for the variable display game is initially set at the end of the setting change. No need to set values.

[Second Embodiment]
The second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 46 to 49. The configuration other than that described below may be the same as that of the first embodiment. Further, in the following embodiments, the same reference numerals are used for the configurations that perform the same functions as those of the first embodiment, and redundant description will be appropriately omitted.

The first embodiment relates to a chance eye prefetching effect (a chance eye preliminary notice) based on a missing pattern. It is possible to select or select the chance eye that is a specific stop result mode (specific outlier stop pattern mode) of the decorative special figure variation display game according to the set value (probability set value), and suggest or notify the set value by the chance eye enable.

[Stop symbol setting process]
A stop symbol setting process according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 46. FIG. 46 shows the effect control device 30 in the change effect setting process (FIG. 44) when the special figure change display game is executed.
It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of stop design setting processing (B2012) performed by 0. In the stop symbol setting process, the stop symbol (stop result) of the decorative special figure variable display game is determined.

The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the special figure variation display game related to the variation command received is a big hit (B2301). When the special figure fluctuation display game is a big hit (the result of B2301 is “Y”), a big hit stop symbol (“2
, 2, 2”, etc.) is randomly selected (B2302).

When the special figure variation display game is not a big hit (the result of B2301 is “N”), the effect control device 300 sets the number of pre-reading effects (remaining number of continuous notification effects) of the chance eye pre-reading effect as continuous notification effect to 0. It is determined whether there is any (B2303). When the number of pre-reading effects (the number of remaining continuous announcement effects) is 0 (the result of B2303 is “Y”), step B2308
Process shifts to. The initial value of the number of pre-reading effects (the number of remaining continuous notice effects) depends on the expectation of the jackpot of the pre-reading target, that is, the expectation of the big hit of the special figure variation display game executed by the holding of the pre-reading target. You may set it.

Production control device 300, if the number of prefetching effects (the remaining number of continuous notice effects) is not 0 (the result of B2303 is “N”), the chance eye stop symbol aspect (chance eye aspect, outlier symbol group) is set as the prefetch target. It is set according to the expectation level of the big hit of hold (B2304). The chance eye stop pattern mode is a normal mode in which the set value cannot be suggested or notified, a special mode in which the set value can be suggested (setting suggestive mode), and a definite mode in which the set value can be definitely notified. (Setting notification mode) (see FIG. 47).

For example, when the special 1 reach (SP1 reach) occurs in the special figure variation display game relating to the hold (starting memory) of the prefetch target, the chance eye stop symbol aspect is set to the normal aspect, and the special 2 reach (SP2 reach) Can be set to the special mode when the occurrence of "3" occurs, and can be set to the fixed mode when the special 3 reach (SP3 reach) occurs. As described above, the expectation level (expected value) of the big hit is in the order of SP1 reach<SP2 reach<SP3 reach, so the chance eye stop symbol aspect can be set according to the expectation degree of the big hit of the pre-reading object. In addition,
On the contrary, when SP3 reach occurs in the special figure variation display game related to the hold of the prefetch target, the chance stop symbol design mode is set to the normal mode, and when the SP2 reach occurs, the special mode is set to the SP3 reach. When the occurs, the confirmation mode may be set.

As described above, by setting the chance eye stop symbol mode in correspondence with the reach type (reach effect system) of the prefetch target hold, the chance eye stop symbol mode depends on the expectation of the jackpot of the prefetch target hold. Can be set. Therefore, the expectation level of the jackpot of the pre-reading object can be notified as the pre-reading effect by the chance eye stop symbol mode. The reach type generated in the special figure variation display game relating to the hold of the prefetch target is the prefetch variation type command (B121
This can be understood from the content of the look-ahead variation pattern command and variation effect (52010) as 5).

Next, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not to execute a setting suggestion effect (setting related effect) that suggests or notifies the setting value (B2305). Chance eye stop pattern mode is a normal mode, when the setting suggestion effect is not executed (the result of B2305 is "N"), the stop pattern regardless of the set value from the normal mode off pattern mode (off pattern group) Lottery (B2
306), the stop symbol setting process ends. When the chance eye stop symbol mode is a special mode or a fixed mode and the setting suggestion effect is executed (the result of B2305 is “Y”), if it is a special mode, the special pattern is out of the special pattern (outside pattern group). With the lottery probability according to the set value, the deviation stop symbol is selected by lottery, and if it is the confirmation mode, the deviation stop symbol according to the set value is confirmed (determined) from the deviation symbol mode (defect symbol group) of the confirmation mode (B2307). ..

When the number of prefetch effects (the remaining number of continuous notice effects) is 0 (the result of B2303 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 executes the setting suggestion effect (setting related effect) that suggests or informs the set value. It is determined whether to perform (B2308). For example, if you win a lottery,
It may be determined to execute the setting suggestion effect. When the setting suggestion effect is not executed (B2308
Result is "N"), and the stop symbols are selected by lot regardless of the set value (B2309). When executing the setting suggestion effect (the result of B2308 is “Y”), the deviation stop symbol is selected by lottery with the selection probability according to the set value (B2310). In this way, even when the number of prefetch effects (the number of remaining consecutive notice effects) is 0 and the chance eye prefetch effect is not executed (the result of B2303 is “Y”), the setting suggestion effect is independent of the chance eye prefetch effect. I can do it.

Note that the processes from steps B2308 to B2310 are optional and may not be executed.

[Chance eye stop pattern mode]
FIG. 47 is a diagram illustrating a chance eye stop symbol aspect in the chance eye prefetching effect. The chance eye stop symbol mode includes a normal mode, a special mode (setting suggestion mode), and a confirmation mode (setting notification mode).

In the out-of-order symbol mode (outside symbol group) of the normal mode, for example, out of “2,4,6” (blue), “1,5,9” (green), “3,7,7” (red) There is a stop pattern. In the out-of-specification pattern aspect (outside symbol group) of the special mode, for example, "2, 4, 6" (green),
There are detachment stop symbols of "1, 5, 9" (red) and "3, 7, 7" (blue). In the out-of-confirmation pattern mode (out-of-court pattern group) of the fixed mode, "○, 1, 1""○, 2, regardless of color
There are out-of-stop symbols of "2", "○, 3, 3", "○, 4, 4", "○, 5, 5", "○, 6, 6". It should be noted that ◯ indicates an arbitrary symbol different from the two symbols on the right and left of the three decorative identification symbols (identification information) on the left and right (Zero eyes).

It should be noted that the deviating stop pattern of the fixed mode (setting notification mode) has a color (for example, blue, green, gold other than red, iridescent, etc.) or shape that is not used in the normal mode and the special mode, and is understood. You may distinguish so that it may become easy.

In the normal mode, the selection rate (assignment rate) in the lottery of each out-of-stop symbol is set to the same value regardless of the setting (setting value). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 47, the probability (expectation) of each setting is the same when one out-of-stop symbol in the normal mode is selected (100/6≈17%).
Becomes The probability of FIG. 47 is the degree of expectation of each set value that can be guessed by the player when a specific out-of-stop symbol is displayed. Therefore, the normal mode is a mode in which the player cannot estimate the setting value, that is, a mode in which the setting value cannot be suggested or notified. Note that FIG.
In the example, the selection ratio of the out-of-order stop symbols in the normal mode in one lottery is 100/
It is 3 (≈33.3)%.

In the special mode, the selection rate in the lottery for each out-of-stop symbol is determined to be different depending on the setting (setting value). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 47, the probability (expectation) of each setting when one out-of-stop symbol of a special mode is selected is different (may be the same for some settings).
.. Therefore, the special mode is a mode in which the player can estimate the set value, that is, a mode in which the set value can be suggested.

In the confirmation mode, the selection rate in the lottery of each out-of-stop symbol is set to 100% for only one predetermined setting (setting value). Therefore, as shown in FIG.
When one out-of-stop symbol is selected, the probability (expected degree) of one predetermined setting is 10
It becomes 0%, and the probability (expected degree) of other settings becomes 0%. Therefore, the confirmed mode is a mode in which the player can recognize the set value, that is, a mode in which the set value can be definitely notified.

It should be noted that the three decorative identification patterns in the special mode can suggest the setting value by having a specific color. For example, the out-of-order stop design “2, 4, 6” (blue) in the normal mode is
I can't suggest a set value. However, in the special mode, the disengagement stop design "2, 4, 6" (blue) and the special part, which has the same number part but different color,
The setting value can be suggested by having a specific color (green). The three decorative identification patterns in the special mode may have a specific shape to suggest the set value.

FIG. 48 is a diagram showing another example of selecting a chance eye stop symbol aspect (chance eye aspect, outlier symbol group) in step B2304. In the example of FIG. 48, the chance-stop symbol design mode is set by lottery with different selection rates (assignment rates) depending on whether the special figure variation display game relating to the hold of the prefetch target is a big hit or a big hit. Therefore, similarly to the case where the chance eye stop symbol mode is set corresponding to the hold type of the prefetch target, in the example of FIG. 48 as well, by the chance eye stop symbol mode, the jackpot of the prefetch target is held as a prefetch effect. The degree of expectation can be reported. Whether or not the prefetch target is a big hit or a big hit is determined by the symbol type (B18
02).

As shown in FIG. 48(A), the expectation level of the jackpot of the pre-reading object may be increased in the order of normal mode<special mode<determined mode. Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 48(B), the expectation of the jackpot of the pre-reading object pending may be increased in the order of fixed mode <special mode <normal mode. In the case of FIG. 48B, even if the confirmation mode or the special mode is selected and the player recognizes that the expectation of the jackpot of the prefetch target is small, the setting (setting value) is determined by the confirmation mode. The player will not be discouraged because it is notified.

If the selection rates of the normal mode, the special mode, and the final mode of FIG. 48 are set to be the same as the selection rates of SP1 reach, SP2 reach, and SP3 reach, as described above, the special figure variation display game relating to the hold of the prefetch target is achieved. This is the same as setting the normal mode, the special mode, and the fixed mode corresponding to the case where SP1 reach, SP2 reach, and SP3 reach occur.

In addition, according to the number of big hits from turning on the power of the game machine 10 or the start of the game, the number of consecutive big hits from the start of the big hit to the return to the normal game state (the number of consecutive chan), and the operating time of the game machine 10 becomes large, A configuration in which the selection rate of the confirmation mode is increased is also possible. Since the confirmation mode is a privilege for the player, the operation of the gaming machine 10 can be increased by this configuration.

As described above, the chance eye stop symbol pattern is associated with the expectation of the jackpot of the prefetch target, and the outlier stop symbol of the chance eye stop symbol pattern (particularly the special mode, the fixed mode) is randomly selected according to the set value. it can. As a result, the out-of-stop symbol is drawn by the result (big hit or out) of the special figure variation display game relating to the hold of the prefetch target, and the probability (selection rate) according to the set value.

〔Screen transition〕
49A and 49B are screen transition diagrams showing the display screen of the display device 41 in time series in the second embodiment.

FIG. 49A (A) is a display screen during execution of the decorative special figure variable display game. The variation (↓↓↓) of the decoration special symbol (large symbol) is being executed in the variation display area 610, and the variation (↓↓↓) of the ornament reduced symbol (small symbol) is being executed in the variation display area 615. The special figure 1 reserved number display section 650 and the special figure 2 reserved number display section 660 in the upper right corner of the display screen of the display device 41 respectively show the number "2" indicating the special figure 1 reserved number and the special figure 2 reserved number. The indicated number “0” is displayed.

The hold display unit 630 (starting memory display unit) displays a first starting memory as a first holding display (first starting memory display), and a second holding memory displays a second holding display (first holding display). (2 start memory display). First hold display section 630a
Two hold displays 633 are displayed as the first hold display. The second hold display unit 630b does not currently display the hold display 633. In addition, the reserved digestion area 64 in a rectangular frame
0 is displayed at the lower center of the display screen. A pending change display 633a indicating a hold (starting memory that was the right to execute this special map change display game) relating to the special figure change display game being executed,
It is displayed in the reserved digestion area 640.

After that, in (a), a hold (first starting memory) is generated due to the winning in the start winning opening 36, and the hold display 633 (black) corresponding to the generated hold is changed from the normal mode by the hold change notice ( The color is changed to a pending display. Then, the chance eye pre-reading effect (continuous notice effect) is set with the generated hold having a high expectation of a big hit as the pre-reading target hold (B1712, B1716). Further, the number is increased to “3” indicating the number of special figure 1 reservations in the special figure 1 reservation number display portion 650.

Then, in (c), the decorative special figure variation display game ends, and the first chance chance look-ahead effect is executed with the display of the off-stop symbol "2, 4, 6" (blue) in the normal mode. .. Here, in order to let the player recognize that it is a chance look-ahead effect, all or part of the deviation stop symbol may be blinked. The changing pending display 633a is erased at the end of the decorative special figure variable display game. In the normal mode, the player cannot estimate the setting (setting value).

After that, in (d), the next decorative special figure variation display game is in execution. The hold display 633 moves to the right (hold shift), and the first hold display portion 630a is displayed in the hold exhaustion area 640.
The hold display 633 at the right end of is moved. Further, the number indicating the number of special figure 1 reservations in the special figure 1 reservation number display portion 650 is reduced to “2”.

Then, in (e), the decorative special figure variation display game ends, and the second chance eye look-ahead effect has the special mode (setting suggestion mode) of the off stop symbols “1, 5, 9” (red). Run on display. Here, in order to let the player recognize that it is a chance look-ahead effect, all or part of the disengagement stop symbol may be blinked. The special mode of the out-of-stop symbol suggests the setting (setting value), and the player can estimate the setting (setting value) (according to FIG. 47, the probability is setting 4 is high).

Then, in (F), the next decorative special figure variation display game is in execution. The hold display 633 moves to the right (hold shift), and the first hold display portion 630a is displayed in the hold exhaustion area 640.
The hold display 633 at the right end of is moved. Further, the number indicating the number of special figure 1 reservations in the special figure 1 reservation number display portion 650 is reduced to “1”.

Then, in (B) of FIG. 49B, the decorative special figure variation display game ends, and the third chance eye prefetching effect is the fixed stop pattern “1, 6, 6” of the finalized mode (setting notification mode). Run on display. Here, in order to let the player recognize that it is a chance look-ahead effect, all or part of the disengagement stop symbol may be blinked. The setting (setting value) is definitively notified by the definite stop pattern of the setting mode, and the player can recognize the setting (setting value) (setting 6 is set according to FIG. 47).

Further, in the case of the confirmation mode, the dialogue 635 as a character image may be displayed. The serif 635 is selected according to the setting (setting value) determined by the deviating stop symbol in the determination mode. For example, when the setting 6 (setting value 6) is confirmed by the deviation stop design “○, 6, 6” like (ki), “Congratulations!” is displayed, but the deviation stop design “○, 1” is displayed. , 1” to confirm the setting 1 (setting value 1), “sorry” may be displayed.

Thereafter, in (H), the next decorative special figure variable display game is in execution due to the hold of the prefetch target. The hold display 633 moves to the right (hold shift), and the hold digestion area 640
The hold display 633 (black) of the prefetch target at the right end of the first hold display portion 630a moves to. Further, the number indicating the special figure 1 reserved number in the special figure 1 reserved number display portion 650 is decreased to “0”.

After that, in (K), the decoration special figure variation display game ends, the variation pending display 633a is erased, and the jackpot stop symbol "5, 5, 5" is displayed. And in (ko),
The jackpot round starts as a special game state.

Regarding the above screen transition, the dialogue as the character image may be displayed even in the special mode of (e) of FIG. 49A. The serif may be selected in accordance with the special mode out-of-stop symbol. Further, a configuration that suggests the setting is also possible by combining the serif and the special mode disengagement stop symbol. For example, in the combination of the detachment stop symbol “1,5,9” (red) and the line “Congratulations!”, the probability of setting 6 (setting value 6) is increased, and the detachment stopper symbol “1,5”.
, 9” (red) and the line “sorry”, the probability of setting 1 (setting value 1) may be increased.

Further, regarding the screen transition of FIG. 49 described above, only when the definite stop pattern is displayed, all or a part of the deviated stop pattern may be blinked so as to be conspicuous. Furthermore, FIG.
In the three chance chance look-ahead effects, the chance eye stop symbol aspect is different every time, but the chance eye stop symbol aspect may be the same every time. And this same aspect is
You may decide according to the expectation degree of the big hit of the hold of a prefetch target.

[Operation/Effect of Second Embodiment]
According to the second embodiment, the gaming machine 10 satisfies the starting condition (for example, winning at the starting winning opening).
On the display device 41, there is a production control means (production control device 300) capable of displaying a variable display game (decorative special diagram variable display game) on which a plurality of pieces of identification information (decorative special symbols) are variably displayed based on When the stop result mode is the special result mode (big hit result mode), a special game state advantageous to the player is generated. The setting changing means (for example, the setting key switch 93 and the setting value changing switch 102) can change the setting (setting value) related to the game condition. The start storage means (for example, the game control device 100) can store the start storage that is the right to execute the variable display game based on the establishment of the start condition. The prior determination means (for example, the game control device 100) executes the variable display game execution information regarding the starting memory (for example, the variable display game) before the variable display game based on the starting memory stored by the starting storage means is executed. (The result of (1), the variation pattern, etc.) are determined before the variation display game based on the starting memory is executed.

Further, according to the second embodiment, the effect control means (effect control device 300) determines whether the stop result mode of the variable display game (decorative special figure variable display game) is not the special result mode (big hit result mode). By setting the stop result mode to a specific stop result mode (for example, a special mode or a final mode), it is possible to execute a notice effect (chance prefetch effect, chance prefetch notice) based on the determination result of the pre-determination means. Furthermore, production control means (production control device 300)
Can execute a setting-related effect (setting suggestion effect) that suggests or notifies a setting (setting value) by using the specific stop result mode (for example, special mode, final mode).

Therefore, in the notice production based on the determination result of the preliminary determination means, it is possible to suggest or inform the setting (setting value), so that the player not only estimates whether or not it is a big hit but also sets (setting value). Can be guessed, and the notice production can be prevented from becoming monotonous. Therefore, the interest of the game is improved. Furthermore, in the notice production, even if the expectation of a big hit is low, the player has more fun in guessing the setting (setting value), and the enjoyment of the game is improved.

According to the second embodiment, the effect control means (effect control device 300) can execute the setting-related effect by having a plurality of pieces of identification information (decorative special symbols) of a specific stop result mode have a specific color. .. Therefore, the player also pays attention to the color of the identification information (decoration special pattern) of the stop result mode, and the interest of the game is improved.

According to the second embodiment, the effect control means (effect control device 300) determines a plurality of pieces of identification information (disappearance stop pattern) of a specific stop result mode (for example, a special mode, a final mode) as the specific stop result mode. Select when executing the derived variable display game (FIG. 43, FIG. 44, FIG. 46)
.. Therefore, a plurality of pieces of identification information (offset stop symbols) can be selected when the variable display game is executed, not at the time of pre-determination, and the burden of processing (control) at the time of pre-determination is reduced.

[Third Embodiment]
The third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 50 to 54. The configurations other than those described below may be the same as those in the first and second embodiments. Further, in the following embodiments, the same reference numerals are used for the configurations that perform the same functions as those of the first and second embodiments, and the duplicate description will be appropriately omitted. The third embodiment relates to the initial operation of the accessory (movable member) when the power is turned on.

[Back side of game machine]
First, with reference to FIG. 50, a configuration of the game control device 100 (main board) and the like arranged on the back surface side of the gaming machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 50 is a back view of the gaming machine 10 according to the third embodiment.

On the back surface of the game board 30, a game control device 100 (main board) that comprehensively controls the game via a switch base 738 is arranged, and the game control device 100 via a control base 733 above the switch base 738. An effect control device 300 that controls the display device 41 and the like based on the effect control command (effect command) transmitted from the device is provided. Behind the effect control device 300, a protective cover 737 that covers the back surface of the effect control device 300 and the upper part of the back surface of the game control device 100.
Is provided. In a state where the game board 30 configured as described above is stored in the storage portion of the front frame 12, the protective cover 737 and the game control device 100 arranged on the back surface of the game board 30 project rearward of the front frame 12. To do.

A storage unit 750 that stores game balls supplied from a supply device (not shown) provided in the island facility on the upper rear surface of the front frame 12 and that causes the stored game balls to be aligned and flow down.
Is provided. A payout unit 790 for paying out the game balls flowing down from the storage unit 750 to the upper plate 21 (see FIG. 1) is arranged on one inner side of the front frame 12.

In addition, a payout control device 200 that controls the operation of the payout unit 790 based on the data transmitted from the game control device 100, and a game ball based on the turning operation of the operation handle 24 are provided on the lower back surface of the front frame 12. A ball launch device 742 for launching, a connection terminal 743 for connecting to a card unit (not shown), and a power supply device 400 for supplying power to various devices are provided.

Further, on the lower back surface of the game control device 100, a setting key switch 93 (key switch) and a setting value changing switch 102 (setting value changing button switch) of a setting changing device 42 (setting changing means) capable of changing settings relating to game conditions. , Button switch) and a 7-segment type probability set value display device 143 (display unit, LED lamp). As described above, the setting key switch 93, the setting value change switch 102, and the probability setting value display device 143 are provided inside the gaming machine 10, and cannot be operated (accessed) without opening the front frame 12, for example. That is, a general player cannot access and operate the setting changing device 42, and cannot confirm the display of the probability setting value display device 143. Further, the setting key switch 93, the setting value change switch 102, and the probability setting value display device 143 are the gaming machine 10.
Since it is provided inside, it is not concealed (overlapped) by the initial operation of the internal accessory 44a, 44b and the external accessory 95a described later.

The probability setting value display device 143 may be provided at a position where it is not hidden by the initial operation of the internal accessory 44a, 44b or the external accessory 95a, and may be provided exclusively on the front surface of the game board 30, for example. Further, when the probability set value is visibly displayed from the front of the game board 30, the display (LED lamp) of the collective display device 50 may be used as the probability set value display device 143, and the display device 41. May be used as the probability setting value display device 143. Further, even when the probability setting value display device 143 is provided so as to be visible from the front surface of the game board 30 as described above, it is preferable that only the operator can see the probability set value display device 143 without being visible to the player. For example, the display of the probability setting value display device 143 may be made visible by the operator performing a specific operation on the effect button 25. The display of the probability setting value display device 143 may be made visible by the player using a special member (for example, a polarization filter) or by receiving a specific signal from a hall computer (not shown). Similarly, the setting changing device 42 is supposed to be accessible when the front frame 12 is opened. However, the setting changing device 42 is provided on the front face of the game board 30, the display device 41, or the like, and the operator performs a specific operation or the like. It may be operable.

Further, the accessory ratio display unit 68 of the state display device 152 for displaying the accessory ratio described later in FIG. 78(A) may be used as the probability set value display device 143, or as the probability set value display device 143. When the character ratio display unit 68 of 152 is used, four 7-segment types (8-segment type including the dot portion) of the character ratio display unit 68 during setting change or setting confirmation.
The probability setting value may be displayed on any one of the indicators 900 (for example, the indicator 900 at the left end or the right end). The character ratio is displayed on the character ratio display portion 68 except when the setting is being changed or the setting is being confirmed. Therefore, the accessory ratio display portion 68 can be used together for displaying the accessory ratio and the set value.

Further, a cover member may be provided so as to cover the front surface of the setting key switch 93. By providing the cover member in this manner, it is possible to prevent an operation of the setting key switch 93 by a person who does not have the setting key or an unauthorized person, and it is possible to enhance the crime prevention effect. further,
When the cover member is provided, a detection sensor may be provided to detect whether or not the cover member covers the setting key switch 93. When the detection signal from the detection sensor is input to the second input port 123 as shown in FIG. 3, for example, the game control device 100 can determine whether or not the cover member covers the setting key switch 93. .. For example, when the front frame 12 is closed but the cover member does not cover the front surface of the setting key switch 93, the game control device 100 notifies the display device 41 and the speaker 19 of an error.
It is possible to take crime prevention measures and fraudulent measures by using the LED, the lamp, or the like.

[Production control device according to third embodiment]
Next, with reference to FIG. 51, a configuration of the effect control device 300 (sub-board) according to the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 51 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of the effect control system of the gaming machine 10 according to the third embodiment.

In the effect control device 300 of the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. 51, the board effect movable body control 33
4 is different from the effect control device 300 (see FIG. 4) of the first embodiment in that a movable body control circuit 334a is provided.

The effect control device 300 includes a board decoration LED control circuit 332 for driving and controlling the board decoration device 46.
And a frame decoration LED control circuit 333 for driving and controlling the frame decoration device (for example, the frame decoration device 18 or the like).
In addition, a movable body control circuit 334a is provided.

The movable body control circuit 334a drives and controls the board effect device 44 provided in the game board 30 (including the center case 40), and the frame effect device 9 provided in the glass frame 15.
5 is controlled.

For example, as shown in FIG. 52A, the board effect device 44 includes internal accessory parts 44a and 44b (inner movable member) and a motor (not shown) that cooperate with the effect display on the display device 41 to enhance the effect effect.

FIG. 52A is a front view when the board effect device 44 of the game board 30 according to the third embodiment operates.

The internal accessory 44a of the board production device 44 is housed on the back surface of the center case 40 so as not to be seen by the player, and is located in front of the display device 41 by the moving operation and covers the upper side of the display device 41. .. The character "intense heat" is drawn on the internal accessory 44a to notify that the expectation of a big hit is particularly high. Similarly, the internal accessory 44b of the board effect device 44 is located in front of the display device 41 by moving and covers the lower left side of the display device 41. In addition, the character “♪” is drawn on the internal accessory 44b to inform that the expectation of a big hit is high. A voice may be generated from the speaker as the internal accessory 44b moves.

In addition, the effect control device 300, in the advance notice lottery of steps B2006 and B2009 of FIG. 44, if the internal accessory items 44a and 44b are operated by lottery at the selection rate (probability) according to the set value, the set value is set. Can be suggested. And the player has more fun guessing the set value,
The interest of the game is improved.

Further, as shown in FIG. 52B, for example, the frame effect device 95 includes an external accessory 95a (outer movable member), a motor (not shown), and the like that cooperate with the effect display on the display device 41 to enhance the effect effect.

FIG. 52B is a front view when the frame production device 95 of the glass frame 15 (opening part) according to the third embodiment operates.

The external accessory 95a of the frame rendering device 95 is housed inside the glass frame 15 so as not to be seen by the player, and becomes a hemispherical member above the glass frame 15 when the frame rendering device 95 is driven. Project. On the external accessory 95a, a character 95b for notifying that the expectation of a big hit is high is drawn. The frame effect device 95 is not limited to the glass frame 15, but may be the front frame 1.
2 may be provided.

Note that the effect control device 300 can suggest the set value by causing the external accessory 95a to be selected by lottery at a selection rate (probability) according to the set value in the advance notice lottery in steps B2006 and B2009 of FIG. .. Then, the player has more fun in guessing the set value, and the interest of the game is improved.

Then, the effect control device 300 executes the movable body control process in order to drive and control the board effect device 44 and the frame effect device 95 using the movable object control circuit 334a.

[Movable body control processing]
FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the movable body control process according to the third embodiment.

The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the power is on (B3001). Note that it may be determined whether or not the power is being restored.

When the effect control device 300 determines that the power is not turned on (the result of B3001 is “
N”), the normal control process according to the effect contents set in the variable effect setting process (FIG. 44) and the like is started (B3003). On the other hand, when the effect control device 300 determines that the power is on (the result of B3001 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the command for which the probability setting is being changed is received (B3002).

It is determined that the command whose probability setting is being changed has been received when the MODE part indicates the setting changing system by the command whose probability setting is being changed in the one-shot command processing (FIG. 39) (the result of B1325 is “Y”). To be done. That is, the front frame 12 (main body frame, main body portion) is opened (the result of A1023 or A1027 of FIG. 5A is “Y”), and the setting key switch 93 of the setting change device 42 is set.
Is turned on (the result of A1024 or A1028 is “Y”), the command during the probability setting change is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 (A in FIG. 5B).
1041). By pressing the set value change switch 102 of the setting change device 42 while changing the probability setting, the set value regarding the game condition is changed. In addition, the information of the set value regarding the changed game condition is displayed on the probability set value display device 143.

When the effect control device 300 determines that the command for which the probability setting is being changed is received (the result of B3002 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the command for ending the probability setting change is received ( B3004).

The probability setting change end command is a command in the one-shot system process (FIG. 39), when the MODE part indicates the setting change system by the probability setting change end command (the result of B1325 is “Y”),
It is determined that it is being received. That is, the probability setting value has been changed (A2406 in FIG. 10).
Result of "Y"), and the setting key switch 93 is turned off (result of A2416 is "Y"), the command of probability setting change end is sent from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 30.
0 (A2421).

On the other hand, if the effect control device 300 determines that the command for which the probability setting is being changed is not received (the result of B3002 is “N”), that is, when the power is turned on normally, the main body frame opening error occurs. It is determined whether or not it is occurring (B3006). For example, when a state-on command indicating a body frame opening error (front frame opening error) is received as an error/illegal command (B1315), it can be determined that the body frame opening error is occurring.

Production control device 300, when it is determined that the command of the probability setting change end is received (
When the result of B3004 is “Y”), that is, when the probability setting change is completed, it is determined whether or not a mainframe opening error is occurring (B3006). On the other hand, when the effect control device 300 determines that the command for ending the probability setting change has not been received (the result of B3004 is “N”).
), that is, when the probability setting is being changed, the initial operation control processing is started only for the internal accessories 44a and 44b (B3005).

In the initial operation control processing (B3005) of the internal accessory products 44a and 44b, for example, the motors that move the internal accessory product 44a and the motors that operate the internal accessory product 44b of the board effect device 44 are driven to drive the internal accessory products 44a and 44b, respectively. After operating the display device 41 in front of the display device 41, control to operate the display device 41 to the initial position is performed (initial operation control). Further, for example, after the initial operation control of the internal accessory 44a is completed, the initial operation control of the internal accessory 44b is performed. In this way, the internal accessory 44
The initial operation control of a and the initial operation control of the internal accessory 44b are sequentially executed. Similarly, when another internal accessory different from the internal accessory 44a, 44b is further attached, the initial operation control of each internal accessory is sequentially executed. The initial operation control of the internal accessory 44a and the initial operation control of the internal accessory 44b may be simultaneously executed in parallel.

When the production control device 300 determines that the main frame opening error is occurring (the result of B3006 is “Y”), that is, when the front frame 12 (main frame) is open, the internal accessory Initial operation control processing is started only for 44a and 44b (B3005). In this way, the effect control device 300 starts only the initial operation control processing of the internal accessory parts 44a and 44b when the setting change device 42 is operated or the front frame 12 is opened, and the external effect part 300 is operated. It functions as a restricting means that restricts the initial movement of the object 95a and does not execute it.

On the other hand, when the effect control device 300 determines that the main body frame opening error is not occurring (B3
If the result of 006 is “N”), that is, if the front frame 12 (main body frame) is closed, the restriction of the initial operation of the external accessory 95a is released, and the internal accessory 44a, 44b and the external accessory are removed. Thing 95a
The initial operation control process is started (B3007).

In the initial operation control processing (B3007) of the internal accessory 44a, 44b and the external accessory 95a, the internal accessory 44a, 44b of the board effect device 44 performs the same initial operation control as the processing of B3005. In the external accessory 95a of the frame production device 95, a motor for moving the external accessory 95a is driven to cause the external accessory 95a to project from above the glass frame 15 (opening portion), and then to the initial position. Control to operate is performed (initial operation control). In this way, the performance control device 300 functions as a control unit that controls the operations of the internal accessory 44a, 44b and the external accessory 95a. When another external accessory different from the external accessory 95a is further attached, the initial operation control of the external accessory 95a and the initial operation control of the other external accessory are sequentially executed.

Further, in the initial operation control processing (B3007) of the internal accessories 44a, 44b and the external accessory 95a, the time required for the initial operation control of the internal accessories 44a, 44b having a large number of movable accessories is larger than that of the external accessory 95a. It takes longer than the initial operation control time. In addition, regardless of the number of movable accessory parts, even when there are a plurality of effect modes of the internal accessory parts 44a and 44b and the operation becomes complicated, the time required for the initial operation control of the internal accessory parts 44a and 44b is shorter than that of the external accessory parts. It takes longer than the time required for the initial operation control of the object 95a. In addition, the center case 40 and the glass frame 15 (
Between the open part) (for example, a position intermediate between the internal accessory 44a, 44b and the external accessory 95a),
For example, when a movable accessory that moves toward the center side of the gaming machine 10 is provided, it is desirable to perform initial operation control on the movable accessory in the same manner as the external accessory 95a. That is, when the front frame 12 (main body frame, main body portion) is opened, the initial operation of the movable accessory is restricted and is not executed, like the initial operation of the external accessory 95a.

In addition, when the front frame 12 (main body frame, main body portion) is opened, the initial action of the external accessory 95a is restricted so as not to be executed, but the external accessory 95a (first rendering unit, first effect unit) Only the initial operation of the entire movable member) is restricted, that is, without performing the initial operation of the entire external accessory 95a,
Other than the initial motion, the operation mode (for example, vibration or swing) of the movable member (the second effect part, the second movable member, the character 95b) of the external accessory 95a and the light emitting member (the second effect part, the second movable member). The initial mode such as the light emission mode of () (for example, the eyes (LED) of the character 95b emit light) may be executable. That is, such a second effect unit can switch the effect mode to the initial mode in the initial state before the predetermined operation (normal operation) of the second effect unit. By doing so, the external accessory 95a allows the second effect part to be inside the opened front frame 12 (main body frame, main part) even when the initial operation of the first effect part is restricted and is not executed. Can be performed in advance.

[Timing chart of initial operation control processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 54A and FIG. 54B, the timing of the initial operation control process of the effect control device 300 according to the third embodiment will be described. 54A is a timing chart showing an example of the timing of the initial operation control process according to the third embodiment, and FIG. 54B is a timing chart showing an example of the timing of the initial operation control process of the comparative example.

First, the timing of the initial operation control process according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 54A.

When the power is turned on at time T1, the probability setting value changing flag and the front frame opening detection switch 6
When the signal 4 (main frame opening detection switch) is turned on, the initial operation of the internal accessory 44a is started. Before turning on the power, the front frame 12 (main body frame) is opened and the setting key switch 93 is turned on, but since the game control device 100 and the like are not operating, probability setting is performed until the power is turned on. The signal of the value changing flag and the front frame open detection switch 64 (main frame open detection switch) are not turned on. Further, the initial operation control process of the internal accessory 44a is executed (B3005 in FIG. 53). The initial operation of the external accessory 95a is restricted and is not executed.

The probability setting value changing flag is set in the main process (FIG. 5B) (A1038).
, And the probability setting value confirmation mode flag is set in the probability setting value confirmation processing (FIG. 11) (A2505) to be turned on. Commands corresponding to these flags are transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 (A1041 in FIG. 5B, A2 in FIG. 11).
508). Moreover, when the signal of the front frame opening detection switch 64 (main frame opening detection switch) is turned on (A2202), a state on command indicating a main frame opening error (front frame opening error) is transmitted to the effect control device 300 ( A2207, A2217).

When the change of the probability setting value by the operator is completed at time T2 (A2414, A24 in FIG. 10).
15), the probability setting value changing flag is cleared and turned off, and the probability setting value confirmation mode flag is set and turned on (A2505 in FIG. 11). In the first embodiment, the probability setting value changing flag is on until the setting key switch 93 is turned off.
In the embodiment, it is assumed that the probability setting value changing flag is turned off and the probability setting value confirming mode flag is turned on when the change of the probability setting value is completed. As in the first embodiment, the probability setting value confirmation mode flag may be omitted and the probability setting value changing flag may be turned on until the setting key switch 93 is turned off.

Then, by turning off the setting key switch 93 at time T3, the probability setting value confirmation mode flag is cleared and turned off (A2510 in FIG. 11).

At time t1 after time T3, the initial operation control process for the internal accessory 44a is completed, and the initial operation control process for the internal accessory 44b is executed (B3005 in FIG. 53).

In the present embodiment, the time required for the initial operation of the internal accessory 44a, 44b and the external accessory 95a (initial operation time) is the same, but they may be different. For example, the initial operation time of the internal accessory 44a, 44b, which tends to be a complicated operation mode, is determined by the external accessory 9
It may be longer than the initial operation time of 5a. In addition, the production control device 300 increases the motor output to increase the speed of the initial operation of the internal accessory products 44a and 44b, so that the internal accessory products 44a and 44b.
The initial operation time of b may be shorter than the initial operation time of the external accessory 95a.

When the front frame 12 (main frame) is closed at time T4, the signal of the front frame open detection switch 64 (main frame open detection switch) is turned off, and the state off command (A2204) indicating that the main frame open error has not occurred. ) Is an error/unauthorized command as an effect control device 300
Sent to. Then, the restriction of the initial operation of the external accessory 95a is released, and the initial operation control processing of the external accessory 95a is executed (B3007 in FIG. 53). As described above, in the initial operation control processing of this embodiment, the initial operation control processing of the external accessory 95a is not executed when the front frame 12 is opened.

At time t2 after time T4, the initial operation control process of the internal accessory 44b ends. As described above, in the initial operation control process of the present embodiment, the initial operation control process of the internal accessories 44a and 44b is
The process starts before the initial operation control process of the external accessory 95a and ends before the initial operation control process of the external accessory 95a.

After that, at time t3, the initial operation control processing of the external accessory 95a ends, and thus the gaming machine 1
You can play with 0.

Next, the timing of the initial operation control process according to the comparative example of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 54B. Note that the probability setting value changing flag, the probability setting value confirmation mode flag, and the signal of the front frame opening detection switch 64 of the comparative example are also from the time T1 to the time T4 at the same timing as the initial operation control process of the third embodiment. Turned on and off.

Here, the internal accessory 44a of the comparative example does not execute the initial operation control process even when the power is turned on at time T1, and the initial operation is performed by closing the front frame 12 (main body frame) at time T1. The control process is executed. Therefore, the internal accessory 44a and the external accessory 95a of the comparative example.
The initial operation control process of is started at the same timing (time T4).

After that, at time t3, when the initial operation control processing of the internal accessory 44a and the external accessory 95a ends, the initial operation control processing of the internal accessory 44b is executed. On the other hand, the time t3 is the time at which the game can be played on the gaming machine 10 according to the initial operation control process according to the present embodiment as described above.

Then, at time t4, the initial operation control process of the internal accessory 44b ends, so that the gaming machine 10 of the comparative example can also play a game. Thus, in the gaming machine 10 of the comparative example, the time at which the game can be played is later than that of the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment.

Although the internal accessory parts 44a and 44b of the present embodiment perform the initial operation control process by being turned on at time T1, the external accessory part 95a is closed when the front frame 12 is closed at time T4.
An internal accessory that executes the initial operation control process at the same timing as may be provided. For example, the operation mode of the movable member (internal accessory) that affects the game, such as the opening/closing door 39c of the special winning opening and the movable member 37b of the normal variation winning device 37, may be changed in accordance with the set value. Is
After the set value is set, the initial operation control process may be executed according to the operation mode of the set value. By executing the initial operation control processing after the set value is set in this way, movable members that affect the game (opening/closing door 39c of the special winning opening or movable member 37b of the normal variation winning device 37,
It is possible to confirm whether or not the movable member that opens and closes the V winning opening (predetermined region) operates normally according to the operation mode of the set value. The V winning opening (predetermined area) is a winning device that may be provided in the special variation winning device 39, and when a game ball enters the V winning opening, the V winning is notified and the big hit ends. The later probability change state (one of high probability state, specific game state, and predetermined game state) is determined. In addition, the initial operation control processing of the movable member that influences such a game,
It may be executed not only when the front frame 12 is closed at time T4, but also when the setting key switch 93 is turned off at time T3. Furthermore, the initial operation control process of the movable member may be executed when the change of the probability setting at time T2 is completed.

In addition, the front frame 12 (main body frame) is opened for a command whose probability setting is being changed (A1 in FIG. 5A).
023 or the result of A1027 is “Y”), and the setting key switch 93 of the setting change device 42 is turned on (the result of A1024 or A1028 is “Y”), the game control device 1
00 is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (A1041 in FIG. 5B), but it may be transmitted by turning on the setting key switch 93 of the setting changing device 42 regardless of the open state of the front frame 12. Good. Further, after the setting key switch 93 is turned on, the command for changing the probability setting may be transmitted at the timing when the setting value change switch 102 is first pressed.

Further, when the setting key switch 93 is turned on after the power is turned on or the front frame 12 is opened, the probability setting value changing flag is set (a command during the probability setting changing is transmitted. State) The probability setting value may be a variable setting state in which the probability setting value may be changed, and the probability setting value may be confirmed by setting the probability setting value confirmation mode flag in the setting variable state. When the probability setting value confirmation mode flag is set, both the operations of the internal accessory 44a, 44b and the external accessory 95a may be restricted so as not to be executed, or may be returned to the initial position. .. In the same manner as when the command during changing the probability setting of the present embodiment is transmitted, when the probability setting value confirmation mode flag is set, the initial operation control processing of the internal accessory parts 44a and 44b is executed. On the other hand, the initial operation of the external accessory 95a may be restricted so as not to be executed.

[Operation/Effect of Third Embodiment]
The game machine 10 including the openable frame (for example, the glass frame 15 or the front frame 12 (main body frame)) in which the game board 30 having the game area 32 according to the third embodiment is provided is predetermined inside the frame. The inner movable member (internal accessory 44a, 44b) that executes the operation of the above, the outer movable member (external accessory 95a) that performs the predetermined operation outside the frame, and the setting related to the game is changed by the establishment of the predetermined condition. Possible setting changing means (setting changing device 42) and control means (production control device 300) for controlling the operation of the inner movable member and the outer movable member are provided. The control means can execute the initial operation of the inner movable member and the outer movable member by turning on the power of the gaming machine 10, and can change the setting when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on. When in the state, the initial operation of the inner movable member can be executed without executing the initial operation of the outer movable member.

According to such a gaming machine 10, when the gaming machine 10 is powered on, the control means (production control device 300) is in a state in which the setting can be changed (for example, the setting changing means). Is operated (when the setting key switch 93 is turned on) or the frame is opened), the initial operation of the outer movable member is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the outer movable member from coming into contact with the operator or interfering with the frame when operating the setting changing means or when opening and closing the frame, and the initial operation of the movable member is appropriately performed in the gaming machine. Can be run to

Further, the gaming machine 10 according to the third embodiment further includes a setting display device (probability set value display device 143) capable of displaying a set value corresponding to the setting related to the game. The setting display device is provided at a position not hidden by the initial movement of the inner movable member (internal accessory 44a, 44b) and the outer movable member (external accessory 95a). According to such a gaming machine 10, it is possible to prevent the setting display device from being concealed by the initial operation of the inner movable member or the outer movable member during the probability setting change, so that it is possible to prevent the operation of the operator from being interrupted. it can.

In the gaming machine 10 according to the third embodiment, the control means (production control device 300) releases the restriction on the initial operation of the outer movable member (external accessory 95a) when the state in which the setting can be changed ends. It is possible. According to such a gaming machine 10, when operating the setting changing means,
It is possible to prevent the outer movable member from coming into contact with the operator or interfering with the frame when the frame is opened and closed.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 according to the third embodiment, the control unit (production control device 300) takes a time longer than the time required for the initial operation of the outer movable member (external accessory 95a) to move the inner movable member (internal). The initial operation of the accessory 44a, 44b) is executed. According to such a gaming machine 10, the initial operation of the inner movable member, which takes a long time for the initial operation control, is started during the probability setting change, and the initial operation of the outer movable member, which takes a short time for the initial operation control, It is started by closing the frame (front frame 12, main frame) after the probability setting is changed. Therefore, compared with the case where the initial operation of the inner movable member and the outer movable member is started at the same time after the frame is closed, the time-consuming initial operation of the inner movable member can be started in advance, so that the game can be started. It is possible to shorten the time until.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 according to the third embodiment, is the control means (production control device 300) operating the setting changing means (setting changing device 42) even when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on? Alternatively, when the frame (the front frame 12, the main frame) is opened, a regulation unit (production control device 300) that regulates the initial operation of the outer movable member (external accessory 95a) is provided. According to such a gaming machine 10, since the outer movable member does not move while the probability setting is being changed or the frame is opened, it is possible to prevent the outer movable member from contacting the operator or interfering with the frame. ..

In addition, the gaming machine 10 according to the third embodiment includes an opening portion (glass frame 15) that is openably and closably attached to the main body (front frame 12, main frame). The gaming machine 10 includes a first effect unit (external accessory 95a and a first movable member) that performs a predetermined operation outside the opening portion, and a setting changing unit (setting) that can change the settings related to the game when a predetermined condition is satisfied. The change device 42) and the control means (production control device 300) for controlling the operation of the first effect unit. The first effect unit has a second effect unit (a character 95b, a second movable member) capable of switching the effect mode in an initial state before performing a predetermined operation (normal operation). The control means is capable of executing the initial aspect of the second effect part and the initial operation of the first effect part by turning on the power of the game machine 10, and changing the setting when the power of the game machine 10 is turned on. When it is in a state where it is possible,
The initial aspect of the second effect unit can be executed without executing the initial operation of the effect unit. According to such a gaming machine 10, the second effect part (the character 95b, the second movable member) that is less likely to come into contact with the operator or interfere with the frame is changed to the first effect part (the external accessory 95a, the second effect member 95a). (1 movable member) can be initialized in an initial manner prior to the initial operation of (1 movable member).

[Fourth Embodiment]
The fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 55 to 67. The configurations other than those described below may be the same as those of the first to third embodiments. The fourth embodiment relates to a setting suggestion effect that can suggest a setting value.

[Process when setting value is received]
First, with reference to FIG. 55, the details of the set value reception process (B1324) in the above-described single-shot system command process (FIG. 39) will be described. FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the process at the time of receiving the set value according to the fourth embodiment.

First, production control device 300 determines whether the received setting value is a normal command (B4001). If the command is not a normal command (result of B4001 is "N"), the process at the time of receiving the set value is ended. If it is a normal command (result of B4001 is “Y”), the setting value is stored in the RAM or the like of the effect control device 300 (B4002). Then, the effect control device 300 randomly selects the light emission mode (color) of the predetermined light emitting unit according to the received set value in order to perform the setting suggestion effect that can suggest the set value in the predetermined light emitting unit (B4003). .. The predetermined light emitting unit is
For example, in the projecting effect unit 13 (see FIG. 1), the light emitting mode (color) of the predetermined light emitting unit is
It becomes a setting discriminating element that allows the player to estimate the setting (setting value). It should be noted that the predetermined light emitting unit (production device) is not limited to the projecting production unit 13, and can emit light members (frame decoration device 18, decoration device 22, board decoration device 46, special winning opening LED 39d, etc.) and display device 41. The display screen of can be used.

[Lottery table for initial light emission mode]
Next, with reference to FIG. 56, the selection rate of the initial light-emission mode (initial color) of the setting suggestion effect that the effect control device 300 performs lottery when the setting value is received will be described. FIG. 56 is a table for determining the initial light emission mode of the setting suggestion effect of the fourth embodiment (determining the initial color).

As shown in FIG. 56, the initial color of the setting suggestive effect is selected from, for example, six types of white, blue, yellow, green, red, and rainbow, and is set according to the received setting values 1 to 6 (settings 1 to 6). The selection rate and selectable types change.

First, it will be described that the types of selectable initial colors change according to the received setting values. When the received setting value is the setting 1 to 3, the initial color of the setting suggestive effect is selected from white, blue, and green. On the other hand, if the received setting value is setting 4, green can be selected as the initial color, if setting 5, both green and red can be selected, and if setting 6, all types are selected. It will be possible. Therefore, the player sets the initial color of the predetermined light emitting unit of the gaming machine 10 to 4 or more when it is green, 5 or more when it is red, and sets it when it is rainbow. It can be estimated to be 6.

Next, it will be described that the selection rate of the initial color selected by the lottery changes according to the received setting value.

When the received setting value is the setting 1, the initial color has a white selection rate of 80%, the blue selection rate of 15%, and the yellow selection rate of 5%. Then, the selection rate of white as the initial color is set to 75% in the case of setting 2, 70% in the case of setting 3, etc., so that the selection rate becomes lower as the received set value becomes higher. .. In the present embodiment, the white selection rate is set to decrease in 5% increments each time the received set value increases by one, but a certain set value range (for example, settings 4 to 6) Then, they may be set to be the same. Thus, the lower the set value, the higher the selection rate of white as the initial color. Therefore, when the player finds the gaming machine 10 in which the initial color of the predetermined light emitting unit is white, the gaming machine concerned. It is easy to estimate that 10 is highly likely to be a low setting table.

On the other hand, the selection rate of yellow as the initial color is 5% in the setting 1 and 10 in the setting 2.
%, and 15% in the case of the settings 3 to 6, so that the selection rate becomes higher as the received set value becomes higher. Note that, in the present embodiment, the selection rate of yellow in the case of the settings 3 to 6 is fixed to 15%, but the selection rate may be set higher as the set value becomes higher.

The selection rates of the initial colors (green, red) that can be selected by setting 4 or 5 and the initial colors (green, red, rainbow) that can be selected by setting 6 are set to 5%, respectively. Therefore, the higher the set value, the higher the probability that a color other than white will be selected as the initial color. Therefore, when the player finds the gaming machine 10 in which the initial color of the predetermined light emitting unit is other than white, It is easy to estimate that the gaming machine 10 is highly likely to be a high setting table.

The selection rate of each initial color is not limited to the mode shown in FIG. 56, and may be changed appropriately. For example,
The rainbow selectivity in setting 6 is not limited to 5%, and may be 1% or 10%. In this case, the selection rates of the other colors are appropriately adjusted so that the overall selection rate becomes 100% according to the change of the selection rate of the rainbow.

[Fanfare production setting processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 57, details of the fanfare production setting process (B2102) in the above-described big hit system command process (FIG. 45) will be described as a mode in which the light emission mode of the setting suggestion effect changes. FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing a procedure of fanfare production setting processing according to the fourth embodiment.

The effect control device 300 first determines whether the received fanfare command is a normal command (B4101). If the command is not a normal command (result of B4101 is “N”), the fanfare effect setting process ends. If the command is normal (B4
When the result of 101 is “Y”), the number of jackpots stored in the RAM or the like of the effect control device 300 is updated by +1 (B4102).

And production control device 300 determines whether or not the number of jackpots reaches a predetermined number (B
4103). When the number of big hits is a predetermined number (the result of B4103 is “Y”),
The effect control device 300 randomly selects the light emission mode (color) of the predetermined light emitting unit according to the received setting value (B4104), and sets the fanfare display on the display device 41 and the fanfare sound from the speaker according to the setting value. (B4105). The predetermined number of times is 3, 6, 9...
Can be set for each specific (eg, 3) multiple. The predetermined number of times may be a natural number, for example, every odd number of times (1 time, 3 times...) or every integer number of times (2 times, 4 times...
) Or a specific number sequence (for example, a Fibonacci number sequence of 1, 2, 3, 5, 8, 13...).

On the other hand, when the number of big hits is not the predetermined number (the result of B4103 is “N”),
The effect control device 300 sets the fanfare display and the fanfare sound according to the set value (B4105). Here, the fanfare display and the fanfare sound may be set by lottery at a selection rate (probability) according to the set value. After that, when the process of B4105 ends, the effect control device 300 ends the fanfare effect setting process.

[Promotion lottery table for light emission mode]
Next, with reference to FIG. 58, regarding the selection rate of the light emission mode (promotion lottery color) in the promotion (step-up) of the setting suggestive production determined by the lottery (B4104) in the fanfare production setting process at the time of the big hit start explain. FIG. 58 is a table for determining a light emission mode by promotion lottery (promotion lottery color determination) of the setting suggestion effect of the fourth embodiment. Figure 5
8(A) is a table for determining a promotion lottery color when the current color of a predetermined light emitting unit is white, and FIG. 58(B) is a table for determining a promotion lottery color when the current color is blue. is there.

As shown in FIG. 58(A), the promotion lottery colors of the setting suggestion effect when the current color of the predetermined light emitting unit is white are, for example, no promotion (continuation of white), blue, yellow, green, red, and rainbow. It is selected from six types, and the selection rate and selectable types change according to the current set value (settings 1 to 6).

First, it will be described that the types of the promotion lottery colors that can be selected change according to the current set value. When the current set value is the settings 1 to 3, the promotion lottery color of the setting suggestive effect is selected from no promotion, blue, and yellow. On the other hand, if the current setting value is setting 4, green can also be selected as the promotion lottery color, if setting 5 the green and red colors can be selected, and in the case of setting 6, all types can be selected. It becomes selectable. Accordingly, the player has a setting of 4 or more when the promotion lottery color of the predetermined light emitting unit of the gaming machine 10 is green, a setting of 5 or more when the promotion color is red, and a setting of 5 or more when it is rainbow. It can be estimated to be 6.

Next, it will be described that the selection rate of the promotion lottery color selected in the lottery changes according to the current set value.

When the current setting value is setting 1, the selection rate of no promotion (continuation of white) is 8 as the promotion lottery color.
0%, blue selectivity is 15%, and yellow selectivity is 5%. The selection rate without promotion as the promotion lottery color is set to 75% in the case of setting 2 and 70% in the case of setting 3, etc., so that the selection rate decreases as the current set value increases. To be done. In the present embodiment, the selection rate without promotion is set to decrease in 5% increments each time the current set value increases by one, but a certain set value range (for example, settings 4 to 6) is set. ), they may be set to be the same.
In this way, the lower the set value, the higher the selection rate of no promotion (continuation of white) as the promotion lottery color. Therefore, the player is in a state where the promotion lottery color of a predetermined light emitting unit is not promoted during the game. By confirming that the gaming machine 10 is playing, it is easy to estimate that the gaming machine 10 in the game is likely to be a low-set base.

On the other hand, the selection rate of yellow as the promotion lottery color is 5% in the case of setting 1, 10% in the case of setting 2, and 15% in the cases of setting 3 to 6, and the current setting value is high. The higher the selection rate, the higher the selection rate. Note that, in the present embodiment, the selection rate of yellow in the case of the settings 3 to 6 is fixed to 15%, but the selection rate may be set higher as the set value becomes higher.

In addition, the selection rates of the promotion lottery colors (green, red) that can be selected in setting 4 or setting 5 and the promotion lottery colors (green, red, rainbow) that can be selected in setting 6 are set to 5%, respectively. .. Therefore, the higher the set value, the higher the probability that a non-promotion (white continuation) will be selected as the promotion lottery color. Therefore, the player may change the promotion lottery color of a predetermined light emitting part during the game by promotion. By confirming that the gaming machine 10 is playing, it is easy to estimate that the gaming machine 10 in the game is highly likely to be a platform with a high setting. In addition, since it is possible to estimate that the gaming machine 10 in the game is likely to be a high setting table by the promotion lottery, it is possible to motivate the player to continue playing the game.

Next, the promotion lottery color of the setting suggestion effect when the current color of the predetermined light emitting portion is blue is shown in FIG.
As shown in B), for example, it is selected from five types of no promotion (blue continuation), yellow, green, red, and rainbow,
As in the case where the current color is white as described above, the selection rate and the selectable types change according to the current setting values 1 to 6 (settings 1 to 6).

First, it will be described that the types of the promotion lottery colors that can be selected change according to the current set value. When the current setting value is setting 1 or setting 2, either no promotion or yellow is selected as the promotion lottery color of the setting suggestive effect. On the other hand, if the current setting value is setting 3, green can be selected as the promotion lottery color, and in the case of setting 4 or setting 5, both red and green can be selected, and in the case of setting 6, All types can be selected. Therefore, the player has setting 3 or more when the promotion lottery color of the predetermined light emitting unit of the gaming machine 10 is green, and setting 4 when the promotion lottery color is red.
Above, it can be estimated that it is setting 6 when it is a rainbow.

Next, it will be described that the selection rate of the promotion lottery color selected in the lottery changes according to the current set value.

When the current setting value is setting 1, the selection rate of no promotion (blue continuation) is 9 as the promotion lottery color.
5%, and the yellow selectivity becomes 5%. The selection rate without promotion as the promotion lottery color is 80% in the case of setting 2 or setting 3, 75% in the case of setting 4, and the selection rate decreases as the current set value increases. Is set as follows. In this embodiment, the selection rate without promotion is set to the same value or decreases every time the current set value increases by one. In this way, the lower the setting value, the higher the selection rate of no promotion (blue continuation) as the promotion lottery color.
By confirming that the promotion lottery color of the predetermined light emitting unit is in the state of no promotion during the game, the player estimates that the gaming machine 10 in the game is highly likely to be a low setting table. Easier to do.

On the other hand, the selection rate of yellow as the promotion lottery color is 5% in the case of setting 1, 20% in the case of setting 2, 15% in the case of setting 3 or setting 4, and the setting rate of setting 5 or setting 6. In this case, it is set to 20%. Here, the selection rate of yellow as the promotion lottery color is in the case of setting 3 or setting 4 (15%)
In comparison with (2), setting 2 which is a low setting (20%) has a higher selectivity. However, in the case of setting 3, the selection rate for promotion is yellow selection rate (15%) and green selection rate (20%).
%), which is equivalent to the selection rate with promotion in the case of setting 2. Furthermore, setting 2
Compared to the case of setting 3, in the case of setting 3, there is a possibility that it may be promoted to two levels at a stretch and become green.
In the case of, there is a possibility that it will be promoted to 3 levels and become red. It should be noted that in the case of setting 5, the promotion lottery color may be promoted to three levels all at once in red, and in the case of setting 6, there is a possibility of promotion to four levels to the rainbow. Therefore, the player can easily presume that the gaming machine 10 in the game is highly likely to be a highly-set base by confirming that the promotion lottery color of the predetermined light emitting unit has been promoted in multiple stages during the game. Become.

In addition, the promotion lottery color (not shown) of the setting suggestion effect when the current color of the predetermined light emitting part is green or later is the same as when the current color is blue. It is possible to determine the promotion lottery color that changes to. According to such a mode, the player confirms that the promotion lottery color of a predetermined light emitting unit has been promoted to a higher rank (red or rainbow) during the game, so that the gaming machine 10 in the game is set to a high setting. It is easy to estimate that there is a high possibility that this is a platform.

In addition, although the case where the promotion lottery is performed in the lottery (B4104) in the fanfare production setting process has been described in the present embodiment, the demotion lottery may be performed. By performing the demotion lottery, for example, when the current color of the predetermined light emitting unit is blue, it can be changed to white.

Further, in the case where the relegation lottery is performed, for example, the relegation lottery may not be performed after the promotion to the rainbow. By not performing the relegation lottery after reaching the rainbow in this way, the player can continue to have a sense of accomplishment that the high setting (setting 6) has led to the setting suggestion production, and the enjoyment of the game is improved. Can be made.

Further, although the promotion lottery allows multi-stage promotion, it is also possible to demote each stage to a lower color in the demotion lottery. As described above, in the demotion lottery, it is possible to avoid the player from being discouraged by the setting suggestion effect dropping to a low setting all at once by avoiding the mode of multi-stage demotion, and it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

Further, the selection rate of each promotion lottery color is not limited to the mode of FIG. 58 and can be appropriately changed, like the selection rate of the initial color described in FIG. For example, the rainbow selectivity in setting 6 is not limited to 5%, and may be 1% or 10%. Further, the higher the current color becomes, the higher the selection rate of the higher color may be. Specifically, for example, setting 6
In this case, if the current color is green, the rainbow selectivity is set to 10%, and if the current color is red, the rainbow selectivity is set to 35%. The selectivity of can be increased.

[Ending effect setting process]
The manner in which the light emission mode of the setting suggestion effect in the big hit system command process (FIG. 45) described above is not limited to the fanfare effect effect setting process (B2102) (see FIG. 57), and the ending effect setting as shown in FIG. 59. It may be generated in the process (B2111). FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing a procedure of ending effect setting processing according to the modified example of the fourth embodiment.

First, production control device 300 determines whether the received ending command is a normal command (B4201). If the command is not normal (the result of B4201 is "
N"), ending the ending effect setting process. If the command is normal (B420
The result of 1 is “Y”), and the number of jackpots stored in the RAM of the effect control device 300 is +1.
It is updated (B4202).

And production control device 300 determines whether or not the number of jackpots reaches a predetermined number (B
4203). When the number of big hits is a predetermined number (the result of B4203 is “Y”),
The effect control device 300 randomly selects the light emission mode (color) of the predetermined light emitting unit according to the received setting value (B4204), and sets the ending display on the display device 41 and the ending sound from the speaker according to the setting value. (B4205). Here, the ending display and the ending sound may be set by lottery at a selection rate (probability) according to the set value. The predetermined number of times may be a natural number, and may be set for each specific multiple, every odd number or every integer number, or set to be a specific sequence.

On the other hand, when the number of big hits is not the predetermined number (the result of B4203 is “N”),
The effect control device 300 sets the ending display and the ending sound according to the set value (
B4205). After that, when the process of B4205 ends, the effect control device 300 ends the ending effect setting process.

In addition, regarding the selection rate of the light emission mode (promotion lottery color) by the promotion lottery of the setting suggestion effect determined by the lottery (B4204) in the ending effect setting process at the start of the jackpot, in the fanfare effect setting process described above with reference to FIG. 58. It may be similar to the lottery (B4104).

[Processing when the number of out balls is received]
Further, the light emitting mode of the setting suggestive effect may be changed when the number of out balls is received. FIG. 60 shows
It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of processing (B1320 of Drawing 39) at the time of reception of out-of-balls concerning a 4th embodiment.

First, production control device 300 determines whether or not the received out-ball number command is a normal command (B4301). If the command is not normal (the result of B4301 is "N
)), the process at the time of receiving the number of out balls is ended. When it is a normal command (result of B4301 is “Y”), the number of out balls is stored in the RAM or the like of the effect control device 300 (B4302).
The number of out balls can be counted, for example, in the winning opening switch/state monitoring process (FIG. 8).

Then, effect control device 300 determines whether or not the number of out balls has reached a predetermined number (B4).
303). When the number of out balls is the predetermined number (the result of B4303 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 randomly selects the light emitting mode (color) of the predetermined light emitting unit according to the received setting value (
B4304). The predetermined number may be a natural number, and can be set, for example, in multiples of a specific number (every 1000 balls, that is, 1000, 2000, 3000... ). In addition,
The selection rate of the light emission mode (promotion lottery color) by the lottery (B4304) may be the same as that of the lottery (B4104) in the fanfare production setting process described above with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, when the number of out balls is not the predetermined number (result of B4303 is “N”), the effect control device 300 ends the process at the time of receiving out balls.

[RTC reading process]
Furthermore, the light emission mode of the setting suggestive effect may be changed during the RTC reading process (B0009) in the main process (FIG. 36). 61. FIG. 61 shows the RTC reading process (B
9 is a flowchart showing a procedure of (0009).

First, production control device 300 determines whether the received signal from RTC 338 is a normal signal (B4401). When the signal is not normal (B4401 result is "N")
, RTC reading processing ends. When the signal is normal (result of B4401 is “Y”),
Production control device 300 acquires information indicating the current time (B4402). The information indicating the current time is generated by a signal from the RTC 338 which is a time measuring means.

Then, the effect control device 300 calculates the elapsed time from the start of the game (or power-on) (
(B4403), it is determined whether the elapsed time has reached a predetermined time (B4404). When the elapsed time is the predetermined time (the result of B4404 is “Y”), the effect control device 300
The light emitting mode (color) of a predetermined light emitting unit is selected in accordance with the received set value (B4405). The predetermined time can be set, for example, every 2 hours (for example, 11:00, 13:00, 15:00...). The selection rate of the light emission mode (promotion lottery color) by the lottery (B4405) is shown in FIG.
This may be the same as the lottery (B4104) in the fanfare production setting process described above.

On the other hand, when the elapsed time has not reached the predetermined time (the result of B4404 is “N”), the effect control device 300 ends the RTC reading process.

[Count information setting process]
Also, during count information setting processing in single-shot command processing (FIG. 39) (B1322)
Alternatively, the light emission mode of the setting suggestion effect may be changed. FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the count information setting process according to the fourth embodiment.

Rendering control device 300 first determines whether the received count command (special winning opening count command) is a normal command (B4501). When the command is not a normal command (result of B4501 is “N”), the count information setting process ends. When it is a normal command (result of B4501 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 determines whether or not it is a big hit operation (B4502). When the jackpot operation is not in progress (result of B4502 is “N”), the count information setting process is ended.

When the jackpot operation is in progress (result of B4502 is “Y”), effect control device 300 updates the count number by +1 (B4503). Add the number of prize balls of the big winning opening to the number of coins obtained (B45
04), update setting of the display of the number of obtained coins and the display of the count (display of the number of counts) is made (B45).
05). Here, the number of counts and the number of coins to be acquired are the number of counts and the number of coins to be acquired in the condominium (run chan) from the start of the big hit to the return to the normal game state. It may be the number of coins obtained, or the total number of counts and the number of coins acquired since the game machine 10 was powered on.

Then, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the number of acquired balls has reached a predetermined number (B4).
506). When the number of winning balls is a predetermined number (the result of B4506 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 promotes the emission mode (color) of the special winning opening LED 39d according to the received setting value. (B4507). The predetermined number may be a natural number, and can be set, for example, in multiples of a specific number (every 5000 balls or the like, that is, 5000, 10000, 15000... ). The selection ratio of the light emission mode (promotion lottery color) by the promotion lottery (B4507) may be the same as that of the lottery (B4104) in the fanfare production setting process described above with reference to FIG.
Next, the acquired payout number display, the count display, and the like are set to display settings according to the set values as will be described later with reference to FIGS. 63A, 63B, and 64 (B4508). Here, the display modes such as the display of the number of obtained coins and the count display are randomly selected at a selection rate according to the set value.

On the other hand, when the acquired number of payouts is not the predetermined number (the result of B4506 is “N”), the effect control device 300 ends the count information setting process.

In the count information setting process, when the jackpot operation is in progress (the result of B4502 is "Y"), the number of winning balls is added to the number of winning balls (B4504), and the winning hole LED 3
Although the light emitting mode (color) of 9d was promoted by lottery (B4507), by adding the winnings to the start winning port 36 and the normal variation winning device 37 to the winnings number in the normal gaming state,
You may make the light-emitting part (LED) provided in the starting winning opening 36 and the normal variation winning device 37 emit light according to a set value.

Here, setting the display setting according to the set value to the update setting of the acquired payout number display and the count display will be described with reference to FIGS. 63A and 63B. FIG. 63A is a diagram showing an example of a display screen of the display device 41 when a big hit occurs in the fourth embodiment, and FIG. 63B is a diagram showing another example. In the example of FIG. 63A and FIG. 63B, when the number of acquired coins reaches a predetermined number, the display mode of the display of the number of acquired coins, the count display, and the display of other information is selected by a selection rate according to the set value. Display settings.

If the number of coins won has not reached the specified number (eg 5000) (the result of B4506 is "N
The display screen of the display device 41 during the big hit round of “”) is as shown in FIG. 63A, for example.

In the upper left corner of the display screen, a round number display 676 for displaying the current number of big hit rounds is displayed, for example, as “1”R in a numerical notation (Arabic numerals (“1, 2, 3,... ”)). Further, right-handing instruction notification 691 which is an instruction to instruct right-handing is displayed in the upper right corner and the lower left corner of the display screen. Furthermore, at the left end of the display screen, the big hit result mode (big hit stop design,
The jackpot stop symbol "7,7,7" (stop result, stop symbol) of the special variation display game immediately before the special result mode) is displayed, for example, as "7" by numeral notation (Arabic numeral). And
In the lower right corner of the display screen, an effect point display 678 for displaying effect points is displayed, for example, "00".
It is displayed in 30"pt and numerical notation (Arabic numerals). In the middle right corner of the display screen, the number-of-winning-balls display 681 and the count display 682 are numbered as "4910" and "150", for example.
It is displayed in Arabic numerals.

Next, the display screen of the display device 41 during the jackpot round when the number of obtained coins is a predetermined number (for example, 5000) (the result of B4506 is “Y”) is as shown in FIG. 63B, for example.

Here, for example, as the set value is lower, as shown in FIG. 64(a), the current big hit round number display 676 (“I” R) and effect point display 678 (“30” pt) are written in Kanji (
It becomes easier to display in Kanji (“I, Ni, San...”). In addition, the current number of coins won 68
1 (“5,000” both) and count display 682 (“10057”) are written in Kanji (Kanji (“I, Ni,
It is easier to display with "...")).

FIG. 64 is for determining the display mode of the display of the number of winning balls 681, the count display 682, and other information (big hit round number display 676, effect point display, etc.) as the setting suggestive effect in the fourth embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the table of FIG. FIG. 64(A) is a table showing that the selection rate (sorting rate) of Arabic numerals (numerical notation) or kanji (kanji notation) changes according to the set value, and FIG. 64(B) shows the set value. 8 is a table showing that the color selection rate changes in accordance with the above.

For example, in the case of setting 1, the selection rate for numeral notation is 45%, and the selection rate for kanji notation is 5%.
It will be 5%. On the other hand, in the case of setting 6, the selection rate of numeral notation is as high as 75% and the selection rate of Chinese character notation is as low as 25%. Therefore, the player can estimate the set value by confirming whether the display on the display screen is in the numerical notation or the Chinese character notation when the setting suggestion effect is being performed.

In the case of numerical notation, the display screen is the same as that when the number of obtained coins is not the predetermined number as shown in FIG. 63A. In addition, when the number of coins to be won reaches a predetermined number, the jackpot stop design 677 may be displayed in Kanji notation (“7 (or lacquer)”) according to the set value, such as “setting suggestive effect occurrence!” The characters such as “” may be displayed on the display screen to notify the player that the setting suggestion effect has occurred. Furthermore, in addition to numeral notation and kanji notation, other notation formats (for example, Roman numeral (
The selection rate may be set to be displayed as "I, II, III...")).

Further, in determining the display mode of the setting suggestive effect, the selection rate of the number notation, the Chinese character notation, etc. is changed, and the selection rate of the color displayed according to the set value is changed as shown in FIG. 64(B). You may.

For example, in the case of setting 1, the black selectivity is 35% and the blue selectivity is 45%. On the other hand, in the case of setting 6, the black selectivity is as high as 70% and the blue selectivity is as low as 20%. Therefore, the player can estimate the set value by confirming what color is displayed on the display screen when the setting suggestion effect is being performed.

When the set value is an odd number (1, 3, 5), the red selection rate is 20%, and the even number (2, 4,
In the case of 6), the red selectivity is 10%. Therefore, the player can estimate that the set value is an odd number or an even number by confirming whether or not the display on the display screen is red when the setting suggestion effect is being performed.

In this way, the player can estimate the set value from the display screen by determining the display mode of the display screen of the display device 41 during the big hit round according to the set value and performing the setting suggestion effect. The display mode of the display screen is not limited to numbers and the like and colors, and may be changed by changing the size and font of characters. Further, it is possible to display a predetermined symbol, figure or the like according to the set value on the display screen by the setting suggestion effect.

[Modification of light emission mode change (promotion, etc.)]
The light emitting mode (color) of the predetermined light emitting unit may be changed (promoted) from the initial light emitting mode (initial color) during execution of the special figure variation display game. Regarding the relationship of the expectation degree of the big hit in this case, when it is not the big hit (when the expectation degree is low), the light emission mode (initial color) corresponding to the set value
It is also possible to adopt a mode that does not change as it is, or a mode that changes from a light emitting mode (initial color) corresponding to the set value to a light emitting mode corresponding to the expectation of the effect. It should be noted that, after the end of the special figure variation display game, the predetermined light emitting unit may be returned from the light emitting mode corresponding to the expectation to the light emitting mode (initial color) corresponding to the set value. Further, when the jackpot is not a big hit (when the degree of expectation is low), it is easy to promote the light emission mode of a predetermined light emitting unit at a low set value so as to suppress a decrease in game motivation. The player is set to a mode in which the selected ratios of the settings 1 to 6 of the promotion lottery table such as 58 are reversed (for example, the ratios of the selected settings 1 to 3 and the settings 4 to 6 are reversed). May be interested in.

On the other hand, in the case of a big hit (when the degree of expectation is high), similarly, the light emission mode corresponds to the set value and does not change as it is, or from the light emission mode corresponding to the set value to the light emission mode corresponding to the expectation of the effect. It may be changed to In addition, after the special figure variation display game is over,
The predetermined light emitting unit may be returned from the light emitting mode corresponding to the expected degree to the light emitting mode (initial color) corresponding to the set value. In this way, in the execution period in which the setting suggesting effect can be executed (for example, during the execution of the special map variation display game), the set value is set according to the degree of expectation that the result of the special figure variation display game will be a big hit (special result). It is possible to switch between a corresponding light emission mode (setting suggestion effect) and a light emission mode corresponding to the expectation level of the effect (expectation degree notification effect for notifying the expectation level).

Therefore, when the expectation of the big hit is high, if the expectation of the big hit is notified by changing from the setting suggestion effect to the expectation notification effect, the game can be excited and the enjoyment of the game is improved.
On the contrary, when the degree of expectation is low, if the degree of expectation notification effect is changed to the setting suggestion effect, it is possible to make the player have high expectations, which may improve the interest of the game and improve the operation of the gaming machine. There is.

Furthermore, in the case of a big hit (when the degree of expectation is high), it is difficult to promote the light emission mode of a predetermined light emitting unit at a high set value so that the effect on the display device 41 can be closely watched. In the mode in which the selection ratios of the settings 1 to 6 in the promotion lottery table in FIG. 58 and the like are reversed (for example, the ratios in the settings 1 to 3 and the settings 4 to 6 are reversed) The light emitting mode of the predetermined light emitting unit at the time of high setting may be of no interest to the player. In this way, it is possible to make it difficult to promote the light emission mode of a predetermined light emitting unit at a high set value. As a result, with the high-expectation effect on the display device 41 and the low-expectancy light-emission mode of the predetermined light-emitting portion, it is possible to balance the player's expectation with a good balance without excessively encouraging expectation. Since the effect on the display device 41 does not correspond to the light emission mode of the predetermined light emitting unit, the effect is surprising and the interest can be improved.

Further, in other cases (when the player pays attention to the display device 41 such as at the time of notification of a winning or when a big hit starts), the predetermined light emitting portion is once made into a light emitting mode based on the effect and does not gaze at the display device 41. By changing to a state (situation), the light emission mode may be returned to a ratio based on the set value. Further, even when an effect that is watched by the display device 41 is being performed, the light emission mode may be a ratio based on the set value regardless of the effect. In addition, the light emitting mode (color) with a low expectation may be temporarily set, and then the light emitting mode based on the effect may be changed.

[Hall/player setting mode processing]
Next, the details of the hall/player setting mode process (B0011) in the above-described main process (FIG. 36) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the hall/player setting mode process according to the fourth embodiment executed by the effect control device 300.

By the hall/player setting mode process, the hall setting mode in which the person in charge of the hall (game shop) or the like can perform various settings of the gaming machine 10 or the player setting mode in which the player can perform various settings of the gaming machine 10 is activated. Can be made.

Rendering control device 300 first determines whether or not in the hall setting mode (B4601).
). When the hole setting mode flag, which will be described later, is set, it can be determined that the hole setting mode is being executed. When in the hall setting mode (result of B4601 is “Y”), B4
Performing the processing of 606-B4616, the production button 25 by the person in charge of the hall (game shop)
Various settings and various adjustments are performed based on the operation of (effect button switch 25a, touch panel 25b).

When the effect control device 300 is not in the hall setting mode (the result of B4601 is “N”).
), it is determined whether or not the player setting mode is in progress (B4602). When a player setting mode flag, which will be described later, is set, it can be determined that the player setting mode is being executed. When in the player setting mode (the result of B4602 is “Y”), the processes of B4620-B2425 are performed, and various settings and various adjustments are performed based on the operation of the effect button 25 by the player.

Production control device 300, when the player setting mode is not in (the result of B4602 is "N").
), it is determined whether the hall setting mode start condition is satisfied (B4603). For example, when an operation of the effect button 25 to enter the hall setting mode is detected as an operation signal in the effect button input process (B0010) while waiting for a customer, it can be determined that the hall setting mode start condition is satisfied. It should be noted that “waiting for customers” means a state in which a video for customer waiting (customer waiting demo) is displayed on the display device 41, for example. When the hall setting mode start condition is not satisfied (the result of B4603 is “N”), the process of B4617 is executed.

The effect control device 300 draws a screen to start screen drawing (drawing of the hall setting screen) on the display device 41 in the hall setting mode when the hall setting mode start condition is satisfied (the result of B4603 is “Y”). Start setting is made (B4604). Then, the hall setting mode flag is set (B4605).

Next, the effect control device 300 adjusts the volume of the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b based on the operation of the effect button 25 by the person in charge of the hall, etc. (B4).
606), Hall LED adjustment processing (B4607) for adjusting the brightness (brightness) and emission color of the LEDs of the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration device 46, the display unit (liquid crystal display, etc.) of the display device 41.
A liquid crystal brightness adjustment process (B4608) for adjusting the brightness of B, and a power saving setting process (B4609) for setting power saving are executed. Next, effect control device 300 executes a logo color setting process for setting the emission color and the like of the logo accessory (B4610).

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not there is a setting confirming operation input (B4611). When the operation signal by the setting confirmation operation of the effect button 25 is detected in the effect button input process (B0010),
It can be determined that the setting confirmation operation input has been made. When there is no setting confirmation operation input (the result of B4611 is “N”), the hall/player setting mode process is ended.

Then, when there is a setting confirming operation input (result of B4611 is “Y”), effect control device 300 determines whether or not the setting has been confirmed by the factory default setting (B4612). When there is no operation of the effect button 25 other than the setting confirmation operation, it can be determined that the setting has been confirmed with the factory settings. If it is not confirmed in the factory default settings (the result of B4612 is “N”), B461
Go to step 4. When it is confirmed by the factory default setting (the result of B4612 is “Y”), the factory default setting process for performing various settings and various adjustments with the factory default setting is executed (B4613).
). The factory settings are the default settings stored in the memory such as the ROM 321. Next, the hall setting data (or the hall adjusting data) such as the volume and various brightness determined in B4606-B4610 or B4613 is backed up in the backup memory (for example, FeRAM32).
It writes in 3) (B4614).

Next, effect control device 300 performs screen drawing end setting for ending screen drawing on display device 41 in the hall setting mode (B4615). Then, the hole setting mode flag is cleared (B4616).

Production control device 300, if the hall setting mode start condition is not satisfied (B460.
The result of 3 is "N"), and it is determined whether or not the player setting mode start condition is satisfied (B4617).
). It can be determined that the player setting mode start condition is satisfied when the operation of the effect button 25 to enter the player setting mode is detected as an operation signal in the effect button input process (B0010) while waiting for the customer. If the player setting mode start condition is not satisfied (B
The result of 4617 is “N”), and the hall/player setting mode process is ended.

When the player setting mode start condition is satisfied (result of B4617 is “Y”), effect control device 300 performs screen drawing start setting for starting screen drawing on display device 41 in the player setting mode ( B4618). Then, the player setting mode flag is set (B4619).

Next, the effect control device 300, based on the operation of the effect button 25 by the player, the player volume adjustment processing (B4620) for adjusting the volume of the upper speaker 10a and the lower speaker 10b, and the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration. A player LED adjustment process (B4621) of adjusting the brightness (brightness) of the LED of the device 46 is executed.

Subsequently, the performance control device 300 executes a performance customizing process for customizing (individual setting) the performance based on the operation of the performance button 25 or the like by the player (B4622). Then, it is determined whether or not there is a setting confirmation operation input (B4623). When there is no setting confirmation operation input (result of B4623 is “N”), the hall/player setting mode process is ended. When there is a setting confirmation operation input (result of B4623 is “Y”), screen drawing end setting for ending screen drawing on the display device 41 in the player setting mode is made (B4624).
.. Then, the player setting mode flag is cleared (B4625). B4620-
The player setting data (or the player adjustment data) such as the volume and the brightness determined in B4622 may be erased, and thus is not written in the backup memory.

[Example of display screen in hall setting mode]
FIG. 66A shows the display device 4 in the hall setting mode in the fourth embodiment.
It is a figure which shows an example of the display screen of No. 1.

Rendering control device 300 starts screen drawing in the hall setting mode (B4604) when the hall setting mode start condition is satisfied (the result of B4603 is “Y”), and the volume is displayed on the display screen as shown in FIG. 66A. Setting window 711, emission color setting window 712, and brightness setting window 713
Is displayed. The volume setting window 711 is a display used for the hall volume adjustment processing (B4606), and the brightness setting window 713 is the hall LED adjustment processing (B4607) and liquid crystal brightness adjustment processing (B4607).
4608). The emission color setting window 712 displays the hall LED adjustment processing (B
4607), and is a display for switching the setting suggestive effect that is performed according to the lottery table in the predetermined light emitting unit to the hole emission color selected in the hall setting as described above. As described above, the operation of the volume setting window 711, the emission color setting window 712, and the brightness setting window 713 is performed by the person in charge of the hall or the like of the effect button 25 (touch panel 25b.
(Including the operation of)).

By selecting one of the colors as the hole emission color in the emission color setting window 712, the hole emission color can be preferentially displayed in the predetermined light emitting portion. Therefore, for example, by setting the hole emission color to red or rainbow (specific emission color) that suggests that it is high setting, it is possible to make it appear that a lot of high setting stands are lined up at events etc. it can. As described above, the light emission color setting window 712 and the hall LED adjustment process serve as a second setting means that cannot be set by the player regarding the light emitting mode of the predetermined light emitting unit and can be set only by the person in charge of the hall. Function. In the hall setting mode, the decorative special symbol (identification information), the hold display portion 630, the hold display 633, the hold exhaustion area 640, the special figure changing hold display 64.
The display related to the game such as 3 may be hidden. Since the hall setting mode is not performed during the game, it is possible to make the display relating to the hall setting mode easy to see and reduce the processing load by excluding unnecessary ones. In addition, when hiding the display related to the game, only the decoration reduced design (small design) 616 may be displayed.

Also, in the setting suggestion effect, the hall emission color is displayed with priority over that performed according to the lottery table, but it is displayed preferentially only while waiting for customers, so that the actual game is being played. Can prioritize the setting suggestion effect performed according to the lottery table over the hole emission color. Therefore, the player can estimate the setting of the gaming machine 10 during the game in more detail by actually playing the game.

[Example of display screen in player setting mode]
FIG. 66B shows the display device 4 in the player setting mode in the fourth embodiment.
It is a figure which shows another example of the display screen of No. 1.

When the player setting mode start condition is satisfied (result of B4617 is “Y”), effect control device 300 starts screen drawing in the player setting mode (B4618), and as shown in FIG. 66B, the display screen is displayed. A light emission presence/absence setting window 714 is displayed together with the volume setting window 711 and the brightness setting window 713. The operation of the volume setting window 711, the brightness setting window 713, and the light emission presence/absence setting window 714 is performed based on the operation of the effect button 25 by the player (B4620, B462).
1). In the player setting mode, the volume setting window 711 displays the player volume adjusting process (B4620).
), the brightness setting window 713 and the light emission presence/absence setting window 714 are player LEDs.
This is a display used for the adjustment processing (B4621).

With the light emission presence/absence setting window 714, it is possible to select whether or not to emit light from a predetermined light emitting unit. For example, when the player selects no light emission, light emission related to the setting suggestion effect of the predetermined light emitting unit is not performed. it can. In this way, the light emission presence/absence setting window 714 and the player LED adjustment processing function as a first setting unit that allows the player to set the settings related to the light emitting mode of a predetermined light emitting unit. Note that, during the game, the light emission mode (color) of the predetermined light emitting unit is controlled according to the set value as described above (FIG. 55-FIG. 62), and therefore, unlike the hall setting mode, in the player setting mode The emission color setting window 712 is not displayed.

In the player setting mode, only the presence or absence of light emission of a predetermined light emitting unit can be selected, but the production mode of the production device including the light emitting mode (color) of the predetermined light emitting unit can be selected according to the set value. It may be possible to set whether it can be displayed in the range or not, as in the hall setting mode.
The effect mode (color) of a predetermined light emitting unit of the effect device may be set by 12. The rendering mode of the rendering device is control depending on the set value of the rendering control device 300 (FIG. 44, FIG. 55-FIG. 62).
), the light emitting mode of the lighting member, the internal accessory 44a, 44
b, an operation mode of the external accessory 95a, an effect mode on the display screen of the display device 41, and the like. Also,
In the player setting mode, it is possible to confirm in what range the effect mode of the effect device has been set by the player so that it can be displayed, or whether the setting suggestion effect depending on the set value is being performed. You may

In addition, the effect control device 300 may not perform the setting suggestion effect when the injustice is detected by the magnet injustice monitoring process (A1315), the radio wave injustice monitoring process (A1316), or the like. Reset the promotion lottery colors, etc. to the default colors (eg white)
May be displayed with.

[Customer waiting demo setting process]
Further, during the customer waiting demo setting process (B1308) in the single shot command process (FIG. 39), the hall setting mode (the emission color setting window 712 and the hall L) is set instead of the light emission mode of the setting suggestive effect.
A predetermined light emitting portion is caused to emit light with the hole emission color set in the ED adjustment process). FIG. 67 shows the fourth
It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the customer waiting demo setting process which concerns on embodiment.

Rendering control device 300 first determines whether or not the received setting value is a normal command (B4701). If it is not a normal command (result of B4701 is "N"), the customer waiting demo setting process is ended. When the command is normal (result of B4701 is “Y”),
The effect control device 300 sets the light emission mode (color) of a predetermined light emitting unit to the light emission mode (hole light emission color) set in the hall setting mode (B4702). Then, the customer waiting demo start setting is made (B4703), and the customer waiting demo setting process is ended.

In this way, during the waiting for customers (during the customer waiting demonstration), the light emission mode (color of the hall) set in the hall setting mode is preferentially used instead of the light emission mode (the color) of the setting suggestive effect.
Therefore, by setting the light emission mode (hall light emission color) to a specific light emission mode (specific color = red, rainbow, etc.), it is possible to make it appear that a lot of high setting stands are lined up at an event or the like. it can. Further, while waiting for customers, the light emission mode (color) of the setting suggestion effect is not displayed on a predetermined light emitting part, and the player tries to check the light emission mode (color) of the setting suggestion effect by playing the game machine. Operation of 10 may be improved.

When the light emission mode (color) is set in the player setting mode, the light emission mode (color) set in the player setting mode is preferentially used while waiting for customers (during customer waiting demonstration). It is also possible to have a configuration.

In the above-described fourth embodiment, an example in which the color is controlled mainly depending on the set value is shown as the light emission mode of the rendering device (predetermined light emitting unit). Brightness), turning on or off, or blinking. When blinking, it also includes a blinking period. If the effect device is a movable body, the operation mode of the effect device may be controlled depending on the set value, similarly to the light emission mode.

[Operation/Effect of Fourth Embodiment]
The gaming machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment includes an effect device (for example, a predetermined light emitting unit) capable of executing a predetermined effect, and effect control means (effect control device 300) that controls the effect device. The gaming machine 10 is provided with setting changing means (setting changing device 42 (setting key switch 93 and setting value changing switch 102)) capable of changing the setting value according to the setting related to the game. The effect control means can execute the setting suggestion effect that can suggest the set value by changing the effect mode of the effect device according to the set value.

According to such a gaming machine 10, it becomes possible for the player to estimate the setting of the gaming machine 10 before or during the game only from the state of the gaming machine 10, and to appropriately suggest the set value. Since it can be executed, the interest of the game can be improved. Further, since the player can estimate the setting of the gaming machine 10 only from the gaming machine 10 in this way, a setting suggestion tag (for example, setting 4 is suggested) that implicitly suggests the setting value around the gaming machine 10 in the hall business. Shark bill,
It is no longer necessary to install shrimp bills that suggest setting 5 and salmon bills that suggest setting 6, and it is possible to secure a wide space around the gaming machine 10 to improve the appearance and reduce the burden on the person in charge of the hall. can do.

The effect control means (effect control device 300) of the gaming machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment, the first setting means (light emission presence/absence setting window 714) by which the player can set the settings relating to the effect mode of the effect device.
, Player LED adjustment processing), and second setting means (emission color setting window 712, hall LED adjustment processing) that cannot be set by the player with respect to the effect mode of the effect device. The effect control means can change the effect mode of the setting suggestion effect by the set value or the second setting means.
According to such a gaming machine 10, the person in charge of the hall or the like uses the second setting unit or the like to suggest a high setting as the presentation mode of the setting suggestion production in the production device (for example,
By setting the hall emission color (red, rainbow, etc.), the appearance of the gaming machine 10 can be made to look as desired, and it is possible to make it appear as if there are a lot of high setting stands lined up at events, etc. The interest can be improved. In addition, since the player can set an effect mode that suits the taste of the player, the interest can be improved. As a result, it becomes possible to execute a performance mode that takes into account the needs for setting on both the hall side and the player side.

The gaming machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment, in the execution period in which the setting suggestion effect can be executed, the setting suggestion effect and the expectation according to the degree of expectation that the result of the game (for example, the special figure variation display game) is the special result. It is possible to switch between the expected degree notification effect that notifies the degree. Therefore, when the degree of expectation of the special result is high, if the setting suggestion effect is changed to the expectation notification effect and the expectation degree of the special result is notified, the game can be excited and the enjoyment of the game is improved. On the contrary, when the degree of expectation is low, if the degree of expectation notification effect is changed to the setting suggestion effect, it is possible to make the player have high expectations, which may improve the interest of the game and improve the operation of the gaming machine. There is.

[Fifth Embodiment]
The fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 68 to 69B. The configurations other than those described below may be the same as those of the first to fourth embodiments.

[Screen transition example when the starting memory of the reserved digestion area changes]
FIG. 68 is a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device 41 in time series in the fifth embodiment, and the screen of the entire game when the special figure changing pending display 643 of the pending digestion area 640 changes pending. It is an example of a transition. It should be noted that the lottery for the pending change of the special figure changing pending display 643 (digesting pending change) is, for example, the advance notice drawing (B2006 or B20) of the variation effect setting process (FIG. 44).
09).

FIG. 68A shows the display screen of the display device 41 before the decorative special figure variable display game is started.

A plurality of variable display areas 610 (left area 610A, right area 610B, middle area 610C) are provided in the center of the display screen of the display device 41, and the first decorative pattern A is placed in the right area 610B in the left area 610A. The decoration first symbol B is enlarged and the decoration first symbol C is displayed in the middle area 610C in an enlarged manner, and the symbols "2, 4, 5" are stopped and displayed.

In the lower center part of the display screen, a hold exhaustion area 640 (specific display portion, changing hold display area) and a hold display portion 630 are displayed as a start memory display area. The pending display area 640 and the pending display area 630 are displayed prior to the variable display in the variable display area 610 on the front surface (upper layer). The setting of such a priority display may be executed, for example, in the effect display editing process (B0015).

In the pending digest area 640, a pending special figure pending display 643 (starting memory display, special figure pending pending display) corresponding to the running special game variation display game is displayed. Further, in the reserved digestion area 640, on the back surface (lower layer) of the special figure changing pending display 643, a starting memory display background 640A as a pedestal of the special figure changing pending display 643 is displayed in a low image quality state. .. 68 to 69B, rough hatching of the starting memory display background 640A indicates that the starting memory display background 640A is displayed in a low image quality state (first display mode).

Here, the low image quality state (first display mode) is a state in which the improvement of the power saving performance and the reduction of the graphic processing load are prioritized over the improvement of the visibility for the player. The number is low (for example, displayed with less than 921,600 pixels), the brightness, contrast, gamma, saturation, etc. are suppressed (for example, less than 50 in 100 steps,
Displayed at less than ±0 when adjustable from -100 to +100, low resolution (for example, displayed at a resolution less than 720p (1280 x 720)), frame rate per second (fps) Is low (for example, less than 30 fps) or a highly compressed image is displayed. For example, by performing a low image quality process on the image of the original high-quality starting memory display background 640A in the gaming machine 10 by the process of the VDP 312 or the like,
Instead of a high quality image, a low image quality start memory display background 640A can be displayed on the display screen of the display device 41. Further, for example, both the low-quality image and the high-quality (or normal-quality) image of the starting memory display background 640A are stored in the image ROM 325, and the low-quality image and the high-quality image are replaced depending on the situation. By using the starting memory display background 640A with low image quality (or high image quality).

A background object 640B that changes in conjunction with the starting memory display background 640A is arranged above the starting memory display background 640A. The background object 640B is displayed in two bilobal display modes arranged at the left and right ends as shown in (a) of FIG. 68, for example. The background object 640B is also displayed in a low image quality state like the starting memory display background 640A. Further, the background object 640B is displayed with the same priority (same layer) as the starting memory display background 640A, that is, in an integrated form. The starting memory display background 640A and the background object 640B may be set and displayed in step B2013 of the variation effect setting process (FIG. 44), for example. In addition, the background object 640B is displayed as a starting memory display background 640.
It may be displayed in priority to the front surface of A (upper layer). In addition, conversely, the starting memory display background 640A may be displayed preferentially to the front surface (upper layer) of the background object 640B.

In the hold display unit 630, a hold display 633 (starting memory display,
Up to four special figure reservation displays) are displayed, and in FIG. 68A, three reservation displays 633 are displayed on the reservation display unit 630. The hold display 633 is arranged so as to overlap a part of the starting memory display background 640A and is displayed in front of the starting memory display background 640A. In this way, the production control device 300 functions as a start memory display control unit that executes the control of displaying the hold display 633 on the hold display unit 630 and displaying the special figure changing hold display 643 in the hold exhausting area 640. Production control device 300 executes display setting of hold display 633 and special figure changing hold display 643 in step B2015 of the change effect setting process (FIG. 44) at the time of hold shift, and when the hold occurs, a single-shot command. It may be executed in the special figure 1 pending information setting process (B1310) or the special figure 2 pending information setting process (B1312).

FIG. 68B shows the display screen of the display device 41 when the decorative special figure variation display game is being executed corresponding to the special figure variation pending display 643. Multiple variable display areas 6 on the display screen
In FIG. 10, the decorative first symbols A to C are variably displayed in a normal variation mode. In the following figures, when the decoration first designs A to C are variably displayed in a normal variation mode, the decoration first designs A to C that are variably displayed are indicated by "↓".

FIG. 68 (u) is a display screen of the display device 41 when a pending change is made due to the establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, a pending change during digestion or a look-ahead notice) during execution of the special figure variation display game.
Here, the special figure changing pending display 643 changes to pending, but the pending display 633 may change to pending as a prefetching notice effect. In the case of a pending change during digestion, the special figure changing pending display 643 suggests that there is a high degree of expectation from the normal round display mode due to the pending change, as shown in FIG. It becomes a star-shaped display mode.

Further, the display of the starting memory display background 640A is switched from the low image quality state to the high image quality state at the same time as the hold change. 68 to 69B, the starting memory display background 64
The fine hatching of 0A indicates that the starting memory display background 640A is displayed in a high image quality state. Similar to the starting memory display background 640A, the background object 640B is also displayed in a high image quality state (second display mode). The background object 640B changes from a normal bilobal display mode to a flower-shaped display mode that suggests that the degree of expectation is high. It should be noted that the change in the image quality and the display mode of the starting memory display background 640A and the background object 640B is executed at the same timing as the holding change (during-holding change) of the special figure changing holding display 643 that is drawn as a notice. For example, the display may be set in step B2013 of the variation effect setting process (FIG. 44).

Here, the high image quality state (second display mode) is a state in which the improvement of the visibility for the player is prioritized over the improvement of the power saving performance and the reduction of the graphic processing load. The number is high (for example, displayed with 921,600 pixels or more), and the brightness, contrast, gamma, saturation, etc. are high (for example, 50 or more in 100 steps, −
When it can be adjusted from 100 to +100, it is displayed at ±0 or more), the resolution is high (for example, it is displayed at a resolution of 720p (1280×720) or more), and the frame rate (fps) per second is Higher (for example, 30 fps or more), or an uncompressed image or an image with a low compression rate is displayed.

FIG. 68E shows the display of the display device 41 when the special figure variation display game being executed ends and the stop result (stop symbol) of the variable display area 610 becomes the disengagement result mode (disengagement stop symbol). It is a screen. In the decoration first symbols A to C of the variable display area 610, "
"3, 7, 2" is stopped and displayed. Further, the special figure changing pending display 643 is consumed and disappears, and the starting memory display background 640A and the background object 640B are switched from the high image quality state to the low image quality state and displayed. The background object 640B returns from the flower-shaped display mode to the bilobal display mode. Special map change display Background display of starting memory at the end of game 6
The display setting of the 40A and the background object 640B may be executed based on the symbol type (delayed symbol or jackpot symbol), for example, as a part of the stop setting (B1331) of the single command system command processing. Then, the oldest starting memory of the hold display 633 moves to the special figure changing pending display 643, and the next special figure changing display game is started. The timing at which the startup memory display background 640A and the background object 640B are switched from the high image quality state to the low image quality state is not limited to the time when the special figure changing pending display 643 is exhausted and becomes non-display, but a predetermined effect. May be finished, or the first decorative symbols A to C may be stopped and displayed, or the next special figure variation display game may be started.

(O) of FIG. 68 is a display in the case where the special figure variation display game being executed is finished and the stop result (stop pattern) of the variation display area 610 becomes the big hit result mode (big hit stop pattern, special result mode) 3 is a display screen of the device 41. "3, 3, 3" is stopped and displayed as a big hit stop symbol in the decoration first symbols A to C in the variable display region 610, and "big hit!
!! Character is displayed. Further, although the special figure pending display 643 is consumed and disappears, the starting memory display background 640A and the background object 640B are maintained in high image quality. The flower-like display mode of the background object 640B is maintained as it is. After that, the big hit round game is started, and the big hit round effect is executed.

It should be noted that switching the starting memory display background 640A and the background object 640B from low image quality to high image quality is performed when the special figure changing pending display 643 is changed to a star-shaped display mode (FIG. 68).
Not only ((u)), but the previous stage, that is, when the special map variation display game is started (FIG. 68).
(Immediately after (a)) or immediately before the during-digestion pending change occurs ((i) in FIG. 68), the image quality may be switched to high image quality. Further, in the case where the hold change is made in stages or during continuous production (during continuous notice production or pseudo continuous production), the image quality of the starting memory display background 640A may be switched in stages.
Further, for example, when the special display changing pending display 643 or the holding display 633 is displayed in a bright color such as white, the color of the starting memory display background 640A is switched to a darker color such as black to change the special drawing. You may make it easy to distinguish from the hold display 643 and the hold display 633. Further, when the start memory is stored and a new hold display 633 is generated, for example, the hold display has an upper limit of 4
Even when the number reaches the individual and overflows, or when a game ball is won in the general winning opening 35, the starting memory display background 640A may be switched to a high image quality so that the player can easily recognize it. Also,
Start when the decoration first symbol A to C is stopped or temporarily stopped by a specific symbol (such as when the pending change symbol or the chance eye that suggests or confirms the pending change is stopped) by the execution of the decorative special map variation display game. The memory display background 640A may be switched to high image quality.

In addition, the first display mode is not limited to the mode in which the starting memory display background 640A and the background object 640B are displayed in a low image quality, but is a mode that can be visually recognized but makes the starting memory display background 640A and the background object 640B inconspicuous. May be displayed with. For example, as an aspect of making the above inconspicuous, another image may be displayed in front of the starting memory display background 640A and the background object 640B (front and upper layers) so as to cover the starting memory display background 640A and the background object 640B. it can. Other images in this case include, for example, an image that is the same as the starting memory display background 640A or the background object 640B but is faint or a mosaic image, and the starting memory display background 640A or background of the back (back surface, lower layer). Object 6
It is possible to use a transparent image or the like that allows 40B to be visually recognized. The second display mode is not limited to the mode in which the starting memory display background 640A and the background object 640B are displayed with high image quality, and another image displayed in front of the starting memory display background 640A and the background object 640B is hidden. You may display by a mode.

[Example of screen transition when a predetermined effect occurs in the effect display area]
Next, with reference to FIG. 69A, an example of a screen transition when the effect display area 641 is displayed together with the hold digestion area 640 will be described. FIG. 69A is a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device 41 in time series in the fifth embodiment, and is an example of the screen transition of the entire game when a predetermined effect is generated in the effect display area 641. is there. In addition, the following FIG. 69A and FIG. 69B
In the description of the above, the description overlapping with that of FIG. 68 will be appropriately omitted.

69A is a display screen of the display device 41 before the decorative special figure variable display game is started.

On the display screen of the display device 41, the plurality of variable display areas 610 are decorated with the first decorative patterns A to C.
Is stopped and displayed as a symbol of "2,4,5", and the special figure changing pending display 643 corresponding to the special figure changing display game being executed is displayed in the pending digestion area 640. In addition, the reserved digestion area 64
At 0, the pedestal 640C of the special figure changing pending display 643 and the low-quality start memory display background 640A are displayed on the back surface (lower layer) of the special figure changing pending display 643. The pedestal 640C is displayed with priority over the front surface (upper layer) of the starting memory display background 640A. The starting memory display background 640A is narrower in the upper and left regions than the starting memory display background 640A of FIG.

Furthermore, an effect display area 641 capable of displaying an effect related to the special figure variation display game is displayed at the lower left corner of the display screen of the display device 41, and an effect display area 641 shows a walking girl whose display mode can be changed by the effect. The character 641A is displayed. The effect display area 641 and the character 641A are displayed in a low image quality state. 69A and 69B, the thin line representing the character 641A indicates that the character 641A is displayed in a low image quality state. The effect display area 641 is displayed preferentially to the front surface (upper layer) than the variable display area 610, like the hold exhaustion area 640 and the hold display portion 630. For example, the effect display area 641 is displayed on the same layer as the reserved digestion area 640 and the reserved display unit 630, and has the same display priority order. Further, the character 641A is preferentially displayed on the front surface (upper layer) of the effect display area 641. In addition, character 6
41A and the effect display area 641 may be displayed in the same priority order (layers of the same layer), that is, in an integrated manner. In addition, the character 641A includes the reserved digestion area 640 and the reserved display unit 6
30 may be displayed preferentially to the front surface (upper layer) of the character 30, and conversely, the reserved digestion area 640 and the reserved display portion 630 may be preferentially displayed to the front surface of the character 641A. In this way, the priority order of display can be changed as appropriate.

69A is a display screen of the display device 41 when the decorative special figure variation display game is being executed corresponding to the special figure variation pending display 643. In the plurality of variable display areas 610,
The decorative first patterns A to C are variably displayed (“↓”) in a normal variation mode.

Here, the low image quality character 641A may be displayed as a character different from that shown in FIG. 69A (ki) (a different character from a high image quality character 641B described later).
Further, the low image quality character 641A may be displayed in a mode different from that shown in FIG. 69A (ki). For example, another mode of the low-quality character 641A may be a mode of sleeping while a mode of (Ki) in FIG. 69A is standing, or a mode of walking and operating in (Ki) in FIG. 69A. Alternatively, it may be stationary. It should be noted that the character 641A is in a state of standing and standing before the decorative special figure variable display game is started ((ka) in FIG. 69A).
After the start of the decorative special figure variation display game ((ki) in FIG. 69A), a mode of walking may be used.

In FIG. 69A, the character 641A is changed to the character 641B when the character 641A in the effect display area 641 is fulfilled with a predetermined condition (for example, digestion pending change, pre-reading notice, notice effect, etc.) during execution of the special figure variation display game. It is a display screen of the display device 41 when changed. The character 641B is a girl who is pleased to eat a rice ball that suggests high expectations, and is displayed in a high image quality state. 69A and 69B, the thick line representing the character 641B indicates that the character 641B is displayed in a high image quality state. In addition, the starting memory display background 640A, the pedestal 640C, the reserved digestion area 640, and the effect display area 64.
1 is also displayed in a high quality state. Further, the predetermined condition is, specifically, the character 641A.
(641B) partially enters the starting memory display background 640A and acts on the special figure changing pending display 643 and the holding display, or is displayed near the starting memory displaying background 640A and the special figure changing pending display 643 and the pending display. This is a case of executing a holding change effect of waiting until the timing of acting on the display 633. The timing for switching to the high quality character 641B when the predetermined condition is satisfied may be when the character 641A moves toward the starting memory display background 640A or when it is displayed near the starting memory display background 640A. it can. The character 641A may be switched to the high-quality character 641B when it acts on the special figure changing pending display 643 or the pending display, and when the character 641A moves toward the starting memory display background 640A or the starting memory display background. The character 641B having high image quality may be switched at the time of starting the next special figure variation display game when displayed near 640A.

Here, the high-quality character 641B may be displayed as a character different from that shown in (A) of FIG. 69A (a different character from the low-quality character 641A described later).
Further, the high-quality character 641B may be displayed in a mode different from that shown in (A) of FIG. 69A. For example, another mode of the high-quality character 641B may be that in which the walking speed (movement speed) is increased from (ki) in FIG. 69A. 69A, the low image quality character 641A may be stationary, and the high image quality character 641B may walk in FIG. 69A.

(A) in FIG. 69A is the display of the display device 41 when the special figure variation display game being executed is finished and the stop symbol in the variation display area 610 becomes a detached stop symbol (“3, 7, 2”). It is a screen. The special display fluctuating hold display 643 is consumed and disappears, and the starting memory display background 6
40A, the pedestal 640C, and the effect display area 641 are displayed in a low image quality state. Further, the character 641B returns to the normal character 641A and is displayed in a low image quality state. After that, the starting memory is stored, so that the next special figure variation display game is started.

(C) of FIG. 69 is a display of the display device 41 when the special figure variation display game being executed ends and the stop symbol in the variation display area 610 becomes the jackpot stop symbol (“3, 3, 3”) It is a screen. Below the variable display area 610, the characters “big hit!!” are displayed. Although the special figure changing pending display 643 is consumed and disappears, the starting memory display background 640A, the pedestal 640C,
The high quality image display area 641 is maintained. Further, the effect display of the girl who is happy to eat the rice ball of the character 641B is also maintained. After that, the big hit round game is started, and the big hit round effect is executed.

[Another screen transition example when a predetermined effect occurs in the effect display area]
Next, with reference to FIG. 69B, another example of screen transition when the effect display area 641 is displayed together with the reserved digestion area 640 will be described. FIG. 69B is a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device 41 in time series in the fifth embodiment, and the entire game when a predetermined effect occurs in the holding digestion area 640 or the effect display area 641. 3 is another example of the screen transition of FIG.

69B is a display screen of the display device 41 during the special figure variation display game when a predetermined effect (for example, notice effect) is generated in the effect display area 641 from (K) in FIG. 69A. is there. Due to the occurrence of the predetermined effect, the character 641A in the effect display area 641 changes to the character 641B indicating that the expectation is high. Then, the character 641B and the effect display area 641 are displayed in a high image quality state. On the other hand, the starting memory display background 640A and the pedestal 640C of the reserved digestion area 640 are maintained to be displayed in a low image quality state. After that, when the stop symbol in the variable display area 610 becomes a disengagement stop symbol (for example, "3,7,2"), the process proceeds to (K) in FIG. 69A, and a jackpot stop symbol (for example, "3,3,3"). 6) in the case of
Proceed to 9A (this). In addition, when a predetermined effect is generated in the effect display area 641, the effect display area 641 may be displayed preferentially to the front surface (upper layer) than the reserved digestion area 640. By doing so, for example, the effect display area 641 can be enlarged and displayed in the foreground to emphasize the effect by the character 641B. In addition, the notice effect is provided by the player when the decoration first symbols A to C in the variable display area 610 are reachable or in response to the button operation promotion display (operation promotion image) displayed on the display screen of the display device 41. This can occur when the effect button 25 is operated.

In FIG. 69B, (KU'') is a predetermined effect (in FIG. 69A) in the reserved digestion area 640 (
For example, it is a display screen of the display device 41 during the special figure variation display game when a digest pending change, a look-ahead notice, etc.) occur. Due to the occurrence of the predetermined effect, the special figure pending suspension display 643 changes to a star-shaped display mode that indicates that the degree of expectation is high. Then, the display of the pedestal 640C, the special figure changing pending display 643, and the starting memory display background 640A is switched from a low image quality state to a high image quality state. On the other hand, the character 641A in the effect display area 641 continues to be displayed as it is, and the effect display area 641 and the character 641A are kept displayed in a low image quality state. It should be noted that in response to changing the special figure pending hold display 643 to a star-shaped display mode, the shape of the pedestal 640C is related to the special figure pending hold display 643 such as a crescent moon. You may change into a certain shape. After that, the stop symbol in the variable display area 610 is
When it becomes a detachment stop design (for example, "372"), it proceeds to (K) in FIG. 69A, and when it becomes a big hit stop design (for example, "333"), it proceeds to (C) in FIG. 69A.

In addition, when a predetermined effect is generated in the reserved digestion area 640, the reserved digestion area 640 may be displayed prior to the effect display area 641 on the front surface (upper layer). By doing so, for example, the reserved digestion area 640 can be enlarged and displayed in the foreground, and a change in the display mode of the special figure changing pending display 643 or the pending display 633 can be emphasized.

Further, when a predetermined effect is generated, for example, when the pedestal 640c changes to the same color as the color changed in the effect corresponding to the hold change, the pedestal 640c also has the same high image quality as the special figure pending display 643. However, the degree of high image quality may be set to be lower than that of the special figure changing hold display 643 (lower image quality than that of the special figure changing hold display 643). Even if the image quality of the pedestal 640c is relatively lowered as compared with the image quality of the special figure changing pending display 643 in this manner, the player can easily gaze at the special figure changing pending display 643, which is the main part of the effect, so that the game is played. It is possible to reduce the processing load while maintaining the interest of.

On the other hand, when the predetermined effect is generated, for example, when the pedestal 640c changes to the same color as the color changed by the effect corresponding to the change in the hold, the degree of high image quality of the pedestal 640c is changed from the special figure pending display 643. May be set higher (higher image quality than the suspension display 643 during special figure change). The special figure changing pending display 643 is displayed on the pedestal 640c of high image quality because it is displayed with a relatively low image quality, which may cause unexpectedness. Can be improved.

Furthermore, the pedestal 640c may maintain a low image quality when the special figure pending display 643 has a high image quality. Decoration of special figure pending display 643 and special figure pending display 64
This is because the pedestal 640c only needs to have a function indicating that 3 is being held during digestion, and the function is maintained even when displayed with low image quality.

[Operation/Effect of Fifth Embodiment]
The gaming machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment, based on the establishment of the start condition, a variation display game (special figure variation display game) based on a plurality of pieces of identification information (identification symbol, decorative special symbol, decorative first symbol A to C).
Equipped with a display device 41 capable of displaying, the result of the variable display game is a special result (big hit result mode,
In the case of a big hit stop symbol, a special result mode), it is possible to generate a special game state advantageous to the player. The gaming machine 10 is displayed on the display device 41 in priority to the start storage means (game control device 100) capable of storing a start memory that is the right to execute the variable display game based on the satisfaction of the start condition. A start memory display control means (production control device 300) capable of executing control to display a start memory display (special figure changing hold display 643, hold display 633) corresponding to the start memory in the start memory display area. Prepare The start memory display control means displays the start memory display background 640A in the first display mode (for example, low image quality) on the back side of the start memory display so as to overlap the start memory display in the start memory display area, and the predetermined condition is satisfied. Based on this, the starting memory display background 640A can be switched to the second display mode (for example, high image quality) different from the first display mode.

According to such a gaming machine 10, the start memory display background 640A can be displayed in the second display mode (for example, high image quality) when a predetermined condition is satisfied, such as when the display mode of the start memory display changes, and the like. In this case, the starting memory display background 640A can be displayed in the first display mode (for example, low image quality). Therefore, for example, if there is no pedestal 640c, the special figure changing pending display 64
There is a problem that 3 may be mixed with the decorative first pattern A to C, etc., but when it is necessary for the player to visually recognize the start memory display, it can be easily displayed and can be visually recognized by the player. When the need is relatively small (when the degree of expectation is low), it is possible to improve the power saving performance of the gaming machine 10 and reduce the processing load of graphics and the like. Therefore, it is possible to achieve both improvement of visibility for the player, improvement of power saving performance of the gaming machine 10 and reduction of processing load, and improve display method of the start memory display area in the gaming machine. be able to. In addition, for example, when it is relatively less necessary for the player to visually recognize the start memory display, the identification information (decorative first symbol A to C) of the variable display area 610 which is desired to be relatively conspicuous is higher than the start memory display. Since the image is displayed with high image quality, the player can easily recognize the identification information. In addition, in other cases, since the starting memory display background 640A is displayed with low image quality, it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that there is important information in the starting memory display area, and to display the image on the display screen on the liquid crystal. It is possible to suppress the image sticking.

The gaming machine 10 is capable of executing control for displaying an effect related to the variable display game in the effect display area 641 which is displayed on the display device 41 prior to the variable display game (special figure variable display game). The production control device 300) is further provided. The effect control means can display the effect in the effect display area 641 in the first display mode (for example, low image quality) and switch the effect to the second display mode (for example, high image quality) based on the establishment of the predetermined condition. According to such a gaming machine 10, for example, there is a problem that the effect display area 641 may appear to be mixed with the decorative first symbols A to C, etc. However, the starting memory display (special figure pending display 643, Hold display 633)
Not only that, the effect display area 641 can also be displayed so that it can be easily viewed by the player when the predetermined condition is satisfied, and the same effect as the above effect can be obtained.

In the gaming machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment, an effect game (decorative special figure variable display game) corresponding to the variable display game (variable display game on the collective display device 50) is displayed on the display device 41 based on the establishment of the start condition. Executable effect game means (effect control device 300), a specific display area (effect display area 641) displayed on the display device 41 prior to the effect game (decorative special figure variation display game), and the specific display Specific character displayed in the area (character 641A
, 641B) of the display control means (production control device 300). The display control unit (production control device 300) normally displays the specific display area in the first display mode (
For example, the specific character is displayed in a first effect mode (for example, low image quality) while being displayed in a low image quality, and the specific display area is displayed in a second display mode (for example, in a different manner) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition. It is possible to switch to the second presentation mode (for example, high image quality) while switching to the high image quality).

Therefore, when it is relatively less necessary for the player to visually recognize, the specific display area (effect display area 641) is displayed in the first display mode (for example, low image quality), and the specific character is displayed in the first effect mode (for example, low image quality). ), it is possible to improve the power saving performance of the gaming machine 10 and reduce the processing load of the display control means (production control device 300) such as graphics. On the contrary, when it is necessary for the player to visually recognize (when the predetermined condition is satisfied), the specific display area is switched to the second display mode (for example, high image quality) different from the first display mode (for example, low image quality). ,
The specific character is switched from the first display mode (for example, low image quality) to the second effect mode (for example, high image quality), and the player is provided with a specific display area (effect display area 641) and a specific character (character 6).
41A, 641B) can be easily made visible.

[Sixth Embodiment]
The sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 70 to 88. The present embodiment relates to the driver 150 (here, the LED driver 153) of the status display device 152 and its initial setting. The configurations other than those described below may be similar to those of the first to fifth embodiments.

[Timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing the procedure of timer interrupt processing according to the sixth embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 70, the timer interrupt processing of the sixth embodiment is the same as that of the first embodiment (FIG. 6), but after the status display edit output processing (A1318), the LED driver 153 (FIG. 71).
The LED driver initial setting process (A15001) for initializing is added. Further, after the initial setting of the LED driver 153, an LED data transmission process (A for setting the output mode of the LED driver 153, that is, the display mode of the status display device 152 (A
16001) is performed. In the present embodiment, the configuration of the LED driver 153 will be described, and then the initialization process and the LED data transmission process of the LED driver 153 will be described.

The LED driver initial setting process (A15001) and the LED data transmission process (A16)
The order of (001) may be exchanged. In this case, the LED driver initial setting process (A1
5001) is the LED data transmission process (A16001) in the next timer interrupt process.
Therefore, the LED driver 153 is initialized.

[LED driver]
FIG. 71 is a diagram showing the configuration of the LED driver 153 according to the sixth embodiment. The LED driver 153 of this embodiment is the same as the driver 150 (FIG. 3) of the first embodiment. Further, a collective driver 153a, a combination ratio driver 153b, and a payout rate/discharged ball number driver 153c, which will be described later, are the same as the LED driver 153.

The LED driver 153 is a display device 900 (900-3 (digit 3), 900-2 (digit 2), 900-1 (digit 1) of the digits sequentially selected by the dynamic driving method (dynamic lighting method).
), 900-0 (digit 0)) is energized to light. The digit display 900 that constitutes the status display device 152 is a 7-segment type (or 8-segment type), and also a dot-shaped eight LED.
Includes a collection of lamps. The LED driver 153 may be either common anode or common cathode.

The LED driver 153 has a winning ratio driver 153b and a winning rate/discharging ball number driver 15
In the case of 3c, a 16-bit command is issued from the gaming microcomputer 111 via the LED driver 153 at the preceding stage (the collective driver 153a at the first stage and the driver 153b at the second stage), as indicated by the dotted line. Will be sent. When the LED driver 153 is the batch driver 153a, a 16-bit command is directly transmitted from the gaming microcomputer 111 without passing through the LED driver 153 in the preceding stage.

The LED driver 153 includes a 16-bit shift register 163 and a 16-bit latch circuit 1.
64, latch selector 165, four 8-bit latches (latch circuit: digit 0, digit 1, digit 2,
167a-167d (for digit 3), control unit 173, oscillation unit 174, 4-to-1 data selector 1
83, a character generator (decoder) 185, a 2-to-1 data selector 187, a segment drive unit 193, and a digit drive unit 195. The control unit 173 includes a digit number setting unit 175, a duty setting unit 176, a data selection unit 177, and a standby mode setting unit 1.
Equipped with 78. The oscillator 174 generates and transmits a signal used in the controller 173 (particularly the digit number setting unit 175 and the duty setting unit 176). The 8-bit latch functions as a data register. Further, the LED driver 153 may include an emission color control unit that controls the emission color of the LED (or segment).

The 16-bit command is input from the data input terminal to the 16-bit shift register 163 of the LED driver 153, and can be output to another LED driver 153 as it is from the data output terminal. The data of the 16-bit shift register 163 is the data of the 16-bit latch circuit 1.
At the timing (latch timing) at which 64 receives the latch signal (load signal) from the gaming microcomputer 111, it is held (set) in the 16-bit latch circuit 164.

Of the commands held in the 16-bit latch circuit 164, the upper 8 bits are sent to the latch selector 165, the digit number setting unit 175, the duty setting unit 176, the data selecting unit 177, and the standby mode setting unit 178. Of the commands held in the 16-bit latch circuit 164, the lower 8 bits (data section) are sent to the 8-bit latches 167a-167d. Further, the lower 8 bits of data (only required bits (for example, 4 bits) are acceptable) are also sent to the digit number setting unit 175, the duty setting unit 176, the data selection unit 177, and the standby mode setting unit 178.

When the upper 8 bits (address part) indicate the address of the digit number setting part 175 (for example, 21H (hexadecimal number)), the digit number setting part 175 holds the control data (initial value) held in the 16-bit latch circuit 164. Of the setting data), the lower 8 bits (only the necessary bits are acceptable) are taken in and the corresponding number of digits (for example, X0H to X3H (hexadecimal notation, X is arbitrary)) is set (initial setting). It should be noted that the number of digits to be set depends on the display unit 90 driven by the LED driver 153.
The number is 0 (the number of digits), and is 4 in this embodiment.

The upper 8 bits are the address of the duty setting unit 176 (for example, 20H (hexadecimal notation))
In this case, the duty setting unit 176 takes in the lower 8 bits (only required bits are acceptable) of the control data (initial setting data) held in the 16-bit latch circuit 164, and outputs the corresponding duty ratio ( For example, X0H to XFH (hexadecimal notation, X is arbitrary)) is set (initial setting). The brightness (emission intensity) of the segment (LED) of the display device 900
The duty ratio indicated by corresponds to the output time width of the source driver. The source driver corresponds to the digit drive unit 195 in the case of common anode, and the segment drive unit 193 in the case of common cathode.

When the upper 8 bits indicate the address of the data selection unit 177 (for example, 27H (hexadecimal notation)), the data selection unit 177 selects the lower 8 bits (necessary) from the control data held in the 16-bit latch circuit 164. (Bits only) are taken in and the use/non-use of the decoded data by the character generator 185 is set. The addresses of the data selection unit 177 and the digit number setting unit 175 may be the same, and the use/non-use setting of the decoded data by the data selection unit 177 and the digit number setting of the digit number setting unit 175 may be performed simultaneously ( Data selection section 1
77 and the digit number setting unit 175 are distinguished by the lower 8 bits).

That is, the data selection unit 177 uses the data of the 8-bit latch as the character generator 18
It is selected whether the data is decoded by 5 and used as the decoded data or the data of the 8-bit latch is directly used as the non-decoded data. 8 if decoded
The data of the bit latch is regarded as a character code and is decoded into the lighting pattern data of the character. When the data of the 8-bit latch is used as the non-decoded data as it is, the data selection unit 177 outputs the data selection signal indicating the selection of the non-decoded data to 2
It is sent to the data selector 187 of the pair 1. In this way, the data selection unit 177 determines whether or not the decoding function is used by issuing a command (command, command) from the game control device 100 (game microcomputer 111).
(Including control data).

When the upper 8 bits indicate the address of the standby mode setting unit 178 or the command for the standby mode setting unit 178 (for example, 41H, 1XH, 0XH (hexadecimal notation: X is arbitrary), etc.), the standby mode setting unit 178 Of the control data held in the 16-bit latch circuit 164, the lower 8 bits (only the necessary bits are acceptable) are taken in. Then, for example, the standby mode setting unit 178 transmits a standby signal to the segment drive unit 193 or the digit drive unit 195 so that the segment drive unit 193 or the digit drive unit 195 is turned off, and shifts the LED driver 153 to the standby mode (in the case of 41H). 193 and digit drive unit 1
95 is forcibly turned off and the display 900 of all digits is turned off (in the case of 0XH (BLANK data)), the segment driver 193 and the digit driver 195 of the LED driver 153 are normally operated by a dynamic driving method. Yes (for 1XH). In the standby mode, each setting is not cleared and the previous setting is retained. Further, in the normal operation, after the segment driving unit 193 and the digit driving unit 195 are driven once, the data of the 8-bit latch is immediately reflected in the display of the display 900 only by storing the data in the 8-bit latch. It

The upper 8 bits are the address of the 8-bit latch 167a (for example, 22H (hexadecimal number))
, The latch selector 165 transfers the latch signal to the 8-bit latch 167a. As a result, the 8-bit latch 167a latches (holds) and captures (sets) the lighting pattern data or character code of the lower 8 bits (data section). Similarly,
The upper 8 bits are any address of the 8-bit latches 167b-167d (for example, 23H
, 24H, 25H (in hexadecimal notation), the latch selector 165 transfers the latch signal to any of the 8-bit latches 167b-167d corresponding to the address. As a result, the 8-bit latches 167b-167d are provided with the lower 8 bits (data section) addressed to themselves.
The lighting pattern data or the character code of can be latched and taken in.

A latch signal (load signal) from the gaming microcomputer 111 is input to the latch selector 165, and the latch selector 165 outputs the latch signal as an 8-bit latch 167a-16.
7d and select any one of the 8-bit latches 167a-167d. Then, the 8-bit latches 167a to 167d have the digits 0 and 1 respectively addressed to themselves.
The display data for the display 900 of the digits 2, 3 can be held.

The 4-to-1 data selector 183 sequentially selects the data of the 8-bit latches 167a to 167d corresponding to the digit line of each digit selected by the digit drive unit 195 in order to realize the dynamic drive system (dynamic lighting system). To do. The 4-to-1 data selector 183 is
The data of any one of the selected 8-bit latches 167a to 167d is output to the character generator 185 and the 2-to-1 data selector 187. The digit line is selected by outputting an ON/OFF drive signal to the digit line. In the case of anode common, the ON voltage is applied to the digit line, and in the case of cathode common, the current pull-in voltage (OFF voltage) is applied to the digit line. ) Is applied. It should be noted that information indicating which digit line of digit digit the digit drive section 195 has selected may be transmitted to the 4-to-1 data selector 183.

For example, when the digit drive section 195 outputs a drive signal and selects the digit line of digit 0, the data of the 8-bit latch 167a is selected. Similarly, the digit drive unit 19
When 5 outputs the drive signal to select the digit lines of digit 1, digit 2, and digit 3, the data of 8-bit latches 167b, 167c, 167d are respectively selected.

The character generator 185 decodes the data sent from the 4-to-1 data selector 183. When the data sent from the 4-to-1 data selector 183 is a character code, the character generator 185 decodes the character code (character code) into the lighting pattern data of the character (character) indicated by the character code. Convert to.

FIG. 72 is a diagram illustrating a character code (character code) and a lighting pattern of a character corresponding thereto. In FIG. 72, X is arbitrary (0 or 1), and the character code “X10... B” corresponds to lighting pattern data when the decimal point (Dp) is turned on. Although it is possible to define variously what kind of character code a character is associated with, the character generator 185 is a logic circuit that defines a correspondence relationship between a character code (input) and a character (output) (character lighting pattern data). And so on. For example, the character code "X0011010B" is the character "-".
Corresponding to the lighting pattern data ((a, b, c,
d, e, f, g, Dp)=(0,0,0,0,0,0,1,0)) (for example, "00000
010B"). Since the batch driver 153a uses non-decoded data, when turning on (turning on) only the segment g, the lighting pattern data (for example, “00000010B”) transmitted from the gaming microcomputer 111 is used as it is. ..

Returning to the description with reference to FIG. 71. If the LED driver 153 is the winning ratio driver 153b or the throwing rate/discharging ball number driver 153c, the character code transmitted from the gaming microcomputer 111 is held in the 8-bit latches 167a-167d. 185 outputs the lighting pattern data of the character (character) indicated by the character code. However, if the LED driver 153 is the collective driver 153a, the appropriate lighting pattern data transmitted from the gaming microcomputer 111 is the 8-bit latch 167a-1.
Since it is already stored in 67d, the character generator 18
In No. 5, only proper lighting pattern data is converted into inappropriate lighting pattern data by the decoding process. If the appropriate lighting pattern data coincides with any one of the character codes, the character generator 185 of the collective driver 153a may output the lighting pattern data of the character.

The 2:1 data selector 187 directly outputs the decoded data (decoded data) output from the character generator 185 and the 4:1 data selector 183 in response to the data selection signal from the data selection unit 177. The selected non-decoded data is selected and output to the segment drive unit 193. The non-decoded data is the data output from the 4-to-1 data selector 183 without passing through the character generator 185, and is the 8-bit data itself of the 8-bit latches 167a-167d. When a data selection signal indicating selection of non-decoded data is input, the 2-to-1 data selector 187
The non-decoded data is output, and when the data selection signal is not input, the decoded data is output.

If the LED driver 153 is the collective driver 153a, the 2-to-1 data selector 1
A data selection signal indicating selection of non-decoded data is input to 87, which always outputs appropriate lighting pattern data held in the 8-bit latches 167a to 167d to the segment drive unit 193. On the other hand, if the LED driver 153 is the winning ratio driver 153b or the ball output rate/discharging ball number driver 153c, the 2-to-1 data selector 187 does not receive a data selection signal and always lights a character. The pattern data (decoded data) will be output to the segment drive unit 193.

The segment drive section 193 outputs the lighting pattern data (decoded data or non-decoded data) from the 2-to-1 data selector 187 to the display 900 of the digit corresponding to the digit line selected by the digit drive section 195 ( Dynamic drive system). The lighting pattern data is ON/OFF data of light emission of the eight LEDs (segments ag, Dp, or eight dot-shaped LEDs) of the display 900 of the selected digit (that is, the selected digit line). In the case of the anode common, the segment driving unit 193 turns on the LED (light emitting state) by applying a current drawing voltage (OFF voltage) to the segment line as a driving voltage. In the case of common cathode, LE is applied by applying ON voltage as a drive voltage to the segment line.
D is turned on (light emitting state).

The eight LEDs of the display 900 are 7-segment type (8-segment type including the dot part)
In the display 900 of No., the segments are ag and Dp. On the other hand, in the case of FIG.
The eight LEDs of the display 900 are a set of eight dot-shaped LED lamps (D3-D7, D8,
D10, D18) or a set of eight dot-shaped LED lamps (D9, D11-D16, D
17).

The digit drive unit 195 outputs a drive signal and selects the digit line of each digit. As the drive signal, the digit drive unit 195 applies an on-voltage to the digit line in the case of the anode common, and applies a current pull-in voltage (off voltage) to the digit line in the case of the cathode common.

The resistor connection terminal 197 (R-EXT terminal) is connected to one external resistor between this terminal and the ground (GND), so that the segment drive unit 193 and the segment drive unit 193 can be used to segment the segment. The current value flowing in the line can be set. This allows
A current value common to all LEDs can be supplied.

Further, a light emission color control unit (not shown) of the LED driver 153 controls the light emission color of the LED (or segment). The emission color control unit, in the main process and the timer interrupt process,
It is possible to control the emission color of the LED by receiving a command (control data) relating to the color of the LED and sending a command signal to the segment drive unit 193. Segment drive unit 1
Reference numeral 93 drives by applying a drive voltage to the segment line of a color corresponding to the command signal from the emission color control section. The segment line is provided for each color LED (or segment) of the display 900.

As described above, the driver 150 of the first embodiment has been initialized in the main processing. At this time, initial setting is performed on the digit number setting unit 175 and the duty setting unit 176 (further, the data selecting unit 177 and the standby mode setting unit 178) of the driver 150 (LED driver 153). On the other hand, in the sixth embodiment, at least one of the digit number setting unit 175 and the duty setting unit 176 is also initialized in the timer interrupt process. As a result, even if the setting value of the LED driver 153 (driving means) becomes an indefinite value due to noise or the like after the main processing, the driving data (LED command) is output after the setting value is correct in the timer interrupt processing. Therefore, it is possible to avoid extinguishing the status display device 152 due to noise or the like. When the digit number setting unit 175 and the duty setting unit 176 (further, the data selecting unit 177 and the standby mode setting unit 178) are initialized in the timer interrupt process, the initial setting in the main process (A1016).
Can be omitted. In the sixth embodiment, the digit number setting unit 175 and the duty setting unit 1
An example will be described in which the initial setting is performed for 76.

[Initialization command transmission timing chart]
FIG. 73 is a diagram showing the relationship between the initial setting command transmitted to the LED driver according to the sixth embodiment and the latch. In FIG. 73, the initial setting command is the address part (8
(Bit) is omitted. The gaming microcomputer 111 includes an initial setting command (digit) including initial setting data (8 bits) for the digit number setting unit 175 ((digit) is an initial setting value of the digit number) (16 bits) (FIG. 74), Initial setting data (du) ((
Du) is the initial setting command (du) including the initial setting value of the duty ratio (8 bits)
(16 bits) (FIG. 74) are transmitted in order.

The gaming microcomputer 111 outputs a latch signal each time it sends an initial setting command (16 bits). The gaming microcomputer 111 outputs a latch signal when transmitting the final bit of the initial setting command. As a result, the initial setting command (digit) (FIG. 74) is held in the 16-bit latch circuit 164 of the LED driver 153, and the initial setting data (digit) is stored in the digit number setting unit 175 by the initial setting command (digit). To be done. Then, the next latch signal holds the next initialization command (du) (FIG. 74) in the 16-bit latch circuit 164,
The initial setting command (du) causes the duty setting unit 176 to set initial setting data (du).
Is memorized. Note that, in FIG. 73, the initialization command for the digit number setting unit 175 is transmitted before the initialization command for the duty setting unit 176, but the order may be reversed.

[LED driver initial setting process]
Referring to FIG. 74, the LED driver initial setting process (A15 in FIG. 70) according to the sixth embodiment.
001) will be described. FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the LED driver initial setting process according to the sixth embodiment. In the present embodiment, the case where the LED driver 153 is the combination ratio driver 153b and the character code (8 bits) stored in the combination ratio driver 153b is the accessory ratio display data will be described as an example.

The gaming microcomputer 111 first generates an initial setting command (digit) related to the number of used digits of the digit number setting unit 175 (A15002), writes the initial setting command (digit) in the transmission buffer of the serial communication circuit, and clocks it. It is transmitted together with the signal (A15003). Next, the gaming microcomputer 111 generates an initial setting command (du) related to the duty ratio of the duty setting unit 176 (A15004) and transmits the initial setting command (du) in the same manner as described above (
A15005).

[LED command transmission timing chart]
FIG. 75 is a diagram showing the relationship between the LED command transmitted to the LED driver according to the sixth embodiment and the latch. Note that, in FIG. 75, the LED command is shown with the address part (8 bits) omitted. Gaming microcomputer 111, LED command (16 bits)
The latch signal is output each time the is transmitted. The gaming microcomputer 111 outputs a latch signal when transmitting the last bit of the LED command.

The 16-bit latch circuit 164 of the LED driver 153 holds the first LED command (digit 0) by the first latch signal, and the LED command (digit 0) causes the 8-bit latch 167a to display character ratio display data (digit 0). ) Is stored. Similarly, the 16-bit latch circuit 164 holds the second LED command (digit 1) by the second latch signal,
The LED command (digit 1) causes the 8-bit latch 167b to display the accessory ratio display data (digit 1).
) Is stored. The 16-bit latch circuit 164 holds the third LED command (digit 2) by the third latch signal, and the 8-bit latch 167c receives the duty ratio display data (digit 2) by the LED command (digit 2). Remembered. The 16-bit latch circuit 164 holds the fourth LED command (digit 3) by the fourth latch signal, and the 8-bit latch 167d receives the accessory ratio display data (digit 3) by the LED command (digit 3). Remembered.

[LED data transmission process]
The LED driver transmission processing according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing the procedure of LED data transmission processing according to the sixth embodiment. The gaming microcomputer 111 first generates an LED command (digit 0) (16 bits) including the accessory ratio display data (digit 0) to be stored in the 8-bit latch 167a (A16003), and the LED command (digit 0). ) Is written in the transmission buffer of the serial communication circuit and transmitted together with the clock signal (A16005).

The gaming microcomputer 111 generates an LED command (digit 1) including the accessory ratio display data (digit 1) stored in the 8-bit latch 167b (A16009), and transmits the LED command (digit 1) as described above. (A16011). The gaming microcomputer 111 includes an LED command (digit 2) that includes accessory ratio display data (digit 2) to be stored in the 8-bit latch 167c.
) Is generated (A16015), and the LED command (digit 2) is transmitted (A16017).
.. The gaming microcomputer 111 displays the character ratio display data (which is stored in the 8-bit latch 167d).
An LED command (digit 3) including the digit 3) is generated (A16021), and the LED command (digit 3) is transmitted (A16023). In FIG. 76, the LED command (characteristic ratio display data=character code) is transmitted in the order of digit 0, digit 1, digit 2, digit 3, but the transmission order can be set arbitrarily.

[Cascade Connection of LED Driver According to First Modification]
FIG. 77 shows an LED driver 153 (driver for ratio combination 1) according to a first modification of the sixth embodiment.
53b, details of the cascade connection of the ball output rate/discharge ball number driver 153c). In the cascade connection, the winning ratio driver 153b is the first stage, and the winning rate/discharging ball number driver 15
3c constitutes the second stage. The serial data (initial setting command, LED command) transmitted from the gaming microcomputer 111 is first transmitted to the winning ratio driver 153b, and then transmitted from the winning ratio driver 153b to the winning rate/discharging ball number driver 153c as it is. It That is, the serial data such as the initial setting data, the lighting pattern data, and the character code (character code) transmitted from the gaming microcomputer 111 are the driver for ratio combination 153b and the winning rate/
It is transmitted to the driver 153c for the number of discharged balls. Therefore, the gaming microcomputer 111 can transmit the initial setting data, the lighting pattern data, and the character code in a serial manner by using one serial communication circuit. The gaming microcomputer 111 transmits a clock signal and a latch signal (load signal) in parallel to the winning ratio driver 153b and the winning rate/discharging ball number driver 153c.

[Status display device]
FIG. 78(A) is a diagram showing details of the accessory ratio display unit 68 for displaying the accessory ratio. The character ratio display unit 68 in the status display device 152 is a display device 900 of four 7-segment type (8-segment type including the dot portion) arranged side by side in the horizontal direction. , A 2-digit, 3-digit 4-digit, 7-segment display 900. The character ratio display unit 68 displays a total character ratio (for example, "y50.8") and a continuous character ratio (for example, "r58.4").
) Can be switched and displayed. The digit 3 (the fourth digit from the right) is the letter "y" indicating the total character ratio (generally used character ratio) or the character "y" indicating the continuous character ratio.
r" may be displayed.

The winning ratio driver 153b (FIG. 77) converts the character code (character code) received from the gaming microcomputer 111 into lighting pattern data of the character (character) indicated by the character code, and based on the lighting pattern data. Each digit of the accessory ratio display section 68 (digit 3,
The lighting of the display device 900 of the digit 2, the digit 1, the digit 0) is controlled. This character code (characteristics ratio display data) is a character ratio calculated by the gaming microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 (FIG. 6).
, A1318) of FIG. 70. The duty ratio driver 153b has a character generator 185 (decoder) that generates lighting pattern data of a character indicated by the character code by decoding, and can set use/non-use of the decoded data by the character generator 185. If so, it is set to use the decoded data. That is, the winning ratio driver 153b can set whether or not to use the decoding function for generating the lighting data of the winning ratio display unit 68 from the character code.

FIG. 78(B) is a diagram showing details of the number of discharged balls display unit 66 for displaying the number of discharged balls and the payout rate display unit 67 for displaying the payout rate. The discharge ball number display unit 66 and the ball output rate display unit 67 in the state display device 152 are four 7-segment type display devices (8 segment type including dot portions).
00 are arranged side by side, and a display device 900 showing a digit 0 and a display device 9 showing a digit 1 are arranged from the right.
00 corresponds to the number-of-discharging-balls display unit 66, and the display device 900 indicating the digit 2 and the display 900 indicating the digit 3 correspond to the payout rate display unit 67 from the right. On the contrary, the indicator 900 showing the digit 0 from the right and the indicator 900 showing the digit 1 correspond to the payout rate display section 67, and the indicator 900 showing the digit 2 and the indicator 900 showing the digit 3 are discharged from the right. It may correspond to the number-of-spheres display unit 66. The discharged ball number display section 66 and the payout rate display section 67 can be displayed at the same time.

The payout rate/discharged ball number driver 153c (FIG. 77) turns on the character code (character code) received from the gaming microcomputer 111 via the winning ratio driver 153b and the character (character) indicated by the character code. It is converted into pattern data, and the lighting of the indicator 900 at each digit of the discharge ball number display unit 66 and the payout rate display unit 67 is controlled based on the lighting pattern data. The ball output rate/ball output rate driver 153c converts the character code into lighting pattern data (ball output display data or ball output rate display data) of the character indicated by the character code by decoding. ) And the use/non-use of the decoded data by the character generator 185 can be set, the decoded data is set to be used. That is, the payout rate/discharge ball number driver 153c can set whether or not to use the decoding function for generating the lighting data of the discharge ball number display section 66 and the discharge rate display section 67 from the character code.

[Transmission Timing Chart of Initial Setting Command According to First Modification]
FIG. 79 is a timing chart showing an initial setting command sent to the combination ratio driver and the payout rate/discharged ball number driver according to the first modified example of the sixth embodiment. Note that FIG.
In the initial setting command, the address part (8 bits) is omitted. The gaming microcomputer 111 sets initial setting data (8 bits) for the digit number setting unit 175 of the payout rate/discharging ball number driver 153c, and initial setting data (8 bit) for the digit number setting unit 175 of the winning ratio driver 153b. (Bit) in the order of being included in the initial setting command (32 bits), and the initial setting data (8 bits) for the duty setting unit 176 of the ball output rate/discharge ball number driver 153c,
The initial setting data (8 bits) for the duty setting section 176 of the duty ratio driver 153b are transmitted in the order of being included in the initial setting command (32 bits).

The gaming microcomputer 111 outputs a latch signal every time it transmits an initial setting command (32 bits). The gaming microcomputer 111 outputs a latch signal when transmitting the final bit of the initial setting command. As a result, the number-of-digits setting unit 1 of the payout rate/discharging ball number driver 153c
The initial setting data (digit) c is stored in 75. At the same time, by the latch signal, the initial setting data (digit) b is stored in the digit number setting unit 175 of the combination ratio driver 153b.

Then, in accordance with the next latch signal, the initial setting data (du)c is stored in the duty setting section 176 of the driver 153c for ball output rate/ball discharge number. At the same time, the initial setting data (du)b is stored in the duty setting section 176 of the driver for duty ratio 153b by the latch signal.

[Initial setting processing of driver for winning rate/number of discharged balls and driver for role ratio]
Referring to FIG. 80, the LED driver initial setting process (A15001 in FIG. 70) according to the first modified example of the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing the procedure of initial setting processing of the winning ratio driver and the payout rate/discharged ball driver according to the first modified example of the sixth embodiment.

The gaming microcomputer 111 first sets the number-of-digits setting unit 17 of the payout rate/discharge ball number driver 153c.
Initialization command (digit) c (8 bits) including the number of used digits of 5 (8
Digit) c (16 bits) is generated (A15006), and initial setting command (digit) including initial setting data (digit) b (8 bits) relating to the number of used digits of the digit number setting unit 175 of the ratio driver 153b. ) B (16 bits) is generated (A15007), and the initial setting command (digit) c and the initial setting command (digit) b are connected in this order, and the initial setting command (digit) c and b (32 bits) are serial communication circuit. Write to the transmission buffer of and transmit with the clock signal (A150
09).

Next, the game microcomputer 111 sets an initial setting command (du) c including initial setting data (du) c relating to the duty ratio of the duty setting section 176 of the ball output rate/discharge ball number driver 153c.
Du) c (16 bits) is generated (A15011), and initial setting command (du) b (16 bits) including initial setting data (du) b relating to the duty ratio of the duty setting unit 176 of the driver 153b for the ratio combination is generated. Is generated (A15012), and the initial setting command (du)c is generated.
, Initial setting command (du) b, which are linked in this order, initial setting command (du) c, b (32
(Bit) is transmitted in the same manner as described above (A15014).

[LED command transmission timing chart according to the first modification]
FIG. 81 is a timing chart showing LED commands sent to the combination ratio driver and the payout rate/discharged ball number driver according to the first modified example of the sixth embodiment. Here, the character code stored in the driver ratio driver 153b is character ratio display data (digit 0 to digit 3).
The character code stored in the ball output rate/ball output rate driver 153c is ball output display data (digit 0, digit 1) or ball output rate display data (digit 2, digit 3). Note that FIG.
In, the LED command is shown by omitting the address part (8 bits).

The gaming microcomputer 111 uses the 8-bit latch 16 of the ball output rate/ball discharge number driver 153c.
These are the discharge ball number display data (digit 0) c (8 bits) stored in 7a, and the accessory ratio display data (digit 0) b (8 bits) stored in the 8-bit latch 167a of the driver 153b for role ratio. The discharge ball number display data (digit 1) is generated and transmitted in a form included in the LED command (32 bits), and then stored in the 8-bit latch 167b of the ball output rate/discharge ball number driver 153c.
) C (8 bits), the character ratio display data (digit 1) b stored in the 8-bit latch 167b of the ratio driver 153b are generated and transmitted in the order of being included in the LED command (32 bits). ..

Here, the gaming microcomputer 111 outputs a latch signal each time an LED command (32 bits) is transmitted. The gaming microcomputer 111 outputs a latch signal when transmitting the last bit of the LED command. As a result, the discharge ball number display data (digit 0)c is stored in the 8-bit latch 167a of the ball output rate/discharge ball number driver 153c. At the same time, the latch signal causes the 8-bit latch 167b of the duty ratio driver 153b to display the duty ratio display data (
The digit 0)b is stored.

Then, according to the next latch signal, the discharge ball number display data (digit 1)c is stored in the 8-bit latch 167b of the ball output rate/discharge ball number driver 153c. At the same time, the character ratio display data (digit 1)b is stored in the 8-bit latch 167b of the character ratio driver 153b.

Although illustration is omitted in FIG. 81, after that, the game microcomputer 111 outputs the output rate display data (digit 2)c stored in the 8-bit latch 167c of the output rate/discharge number driver 153c.
(8 bits), and the character ratio display data (digit 2)b stored in the 8-bit latch 167c of the ratio driver 153b are generated and transmitted in the order of being included in the command (32 bits). Ball output rate display data (digit 3)c (8 bits) stored in the 8-bit latch 167b of the ball output rate/ball output driver 153c, 8-bit latch 167 of the winning ratio driver 153b
The character ratio display data (digit 3) b stored in d is generated in the order of being included in the command (32 bits) and transmitted.

Therefore, in accordance with the next latch signal, the ball output rate display data (digit 2) c is stored in the 8-bit latch 167c of the ball output rate/ball discharge number driver 153c. At the same time, the latch signal causes the 8-bit latch 167c of the duty ratio driver 153b to display the duty ratio display data (digit 2).
b is stored.

Further, in accordance with the next latch signal, the ball output rate display data (digit 3)c is stored in the 8-bit latch 167d of the ball output rate/ball discharge number driver 153c. At the same time, the character ratio display data (digit 3)b is stored in the 8-bit latch 167d of the duty ratio driver 153b by the LED command (digit 3)b.

[LED Data Transmission Processing According to First Modification]
The LED driver transmission process according to the first modification of the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 82. FIG. 82 is a flow chart showing the procedure of LED data transmission processing according to the first modification of the sixth embodiment.

First, the gaming microcomputer 111 firstly outputs an LED command (digit 0)c(digit 0)c(digit 0)c(8 bits) c(8 bits) stored in the 8-bit latch 167a of the ball discharge rate/ball discharge number driver 153c. 16 bits) is generated (A16002), and an LED command (digit 0)b including the punctuation ratio display data (digit 0)b stored in the 8-bit latch 176a of the ratio driver 153b is generated (A16003). The LED command (digit 0) c, the LED command (digit 0) c, b (32 bits), which is connected in the order of the LED command (digit 0) c and the LED command (digit 0) b, is written in the transmission buffer of the serial communication circuit and transmitted together with the clock signal ( A16006).

The gaming microcomputer 111 uses the 8-bit latch 16 of the ball output rate/ball discharge number driver 153c.
7b, the LED command (digit 1)c including the discharge ball number display data (digit 1)c is generated (A16008), and the accessory ratio display data (a16bit) stored in the 8-bit latch 176b of the ratio driver 153b ( An LED command (digit 1)b including digit 1)b is generated (A1600
9), the LED command (digit 1) c, and the LED command (digit 1) c and b connected in the order of LED command (digit 1) b are transmitted in the same manner as described above (A16012).

The gaming microcomputer 111 uses the 8-bit latch 16 of the ball output rate/ball discharge number driver 153c.
The character ratio display data (A16014) for generating the LED command (digit 2)c including the output rate display data (digit 2)c stored in 7c (A16014) and stored in the 8-bit latch 176c of the driver 153b for role ratio ( An LED command (digit 2)b including digit 2)b is generated (A16015).
), an LED command (digit 2)c, and an LED command (digit 2)b that are linked in this order are transmitted in the same manner as described above (A16018).

The gaming microcomputer 111 uses the 8-bit latch 16 of the ball output rate/ball discharge number driver 153c.
The character ratio display data (A16020) for generating the LED command (digit 3)c including the output rate display data (digit 3)c stored in 7d (A16020) and stored in the 8-bit latch 176d of the ratio driver 153b ( An LED command (digit 3)b including digit 3)b is generated (A16021).
), the LED command (digit 3)c, and the LED command (digit 3)b connected in this order are transmitted in the same manner as described above (A16024).

[Game control device according to second modification]
FIG. 83 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of a game control system of the gaming machine according to the second modified example of the sixth embodiment. The game control device 100 of the sixth embodiment is the game control device 100 of the first embodiment.
Although similar to the above, the state display device 152 attached to the game control device 100 is incorporated in the collective display device 50. In addition, the game control device 100 of the present embodiment
, A batch driver 153a, a combination ratio driver 153b, and a payout rate/discharge ball number driver 153c are cascade-connected by a data signal line in that order, and a data signal line extending from the gaming microcomputer 111 is a batch driver 153a. It is connected to the.

[Cascade Connection of LED Driver According to Second Modification]
FIG. 84 is a diagram showing details of the cascade connection of the LED drivers according to the second modification of the sixth embodiment. In the cascade connection, the collective driver 153a constitutes the first stage, the winning ratio driver 153b constitutes the second stage, and the payout rate/discharged ball number driver 153c constitutes the third stage. Serial data transmitted from gaming microcomputer 111 (initial setting command, LED command)
Is transmitted to the collective driver 153a, and the combination driver 1 is transmitted from the collective driver 153a.
It is transmitted to 53b as it is. Then, the serial data transmitted to the combination ratio driver 153b is directly transmitted from the combination ratio driver 153b to the payout rate/discharged ball number driver 153c. That is, serial data such as initial setting data, lighting pattern data, and character code (character code) transmitted from the gaming microcomputer 111 are, in order, a batch driver 153a, a winning combination driver 153b, a winning rate/the number of discharged balls. Is transmitted to the driver 153c. Therefore, the gaming microcomputer 111 can transmit the initial setting data, the lighting pattern data, and the character code in a serial manner by using one serial communication circuit. The gaming microcomputer 111 provides a batch signal 153a, a winning combination driver 153b, and a winning rate/discharging ball number driver 153c in parallel with a clock signal and a latch signal (load signal).
Send to.

The batch driver 153a controls the lighting of the batch display unit (not shown) according to the lighting pattern data received from the gaming microcomputer 111. The collective driver 153a is a 7-segment type (8-segment type including the dot portion) display 900 (LED lamp), and the first special figure variation display portion 51 (D1) is a digit 0 display 900 and a second. Special figure fluctuation display section 52 (D2)
Is controlled as a digit 1 display 900 (see FIG. 2B, etc.).

The collective driver 153a originally controls the 4-digit 7-segment type (8-segment type including the dot portion) display 900 itself. The round display section 60 and the dot-shaped eight LED lamps (D3-D7, D8, D10, D18) of the first gaming state display section 57 are the segments (ag) of the digit 900 of the digit 2.
, Dp) and control (see FIG. 2B etc.). In addition, the collective driver 153a includes a hold storage display section (special figure 1 hold indicator 54, special figure 2 hold indicator 55, general figure hold indicator 56),
Eight dot-shaped LED lamps (D9, D9,
D11-D16, D17) are regarded as the segments (ag, Dp) of the indicator 900 of the digit 3 and controlled (see FIG. 2B, etc.).

Note that, in the present embodiment, the batch driver 153a is actually the role ratio driver 153.
Although it is the LED driver 153 (the same IC) of b and the ball output rate/number of discharged balls driver 153c, the batch driver 153a does not use the decoded data by the character generator 185 even if it has the character generator 185. It is set (not used).

[Timing chart for transmitting initial setting command according to second modification]
FIG. 85 is a package driver, a combination driver according to the second modification of the sixth embodiment, and
It is a timing chart which shows the initial setting command sent to the driver for a ball output rate/ball discharge number. In FIG. 85, the initial setting command is shown with the address part (8 bits) omitted.

The gaming microcomputer 111 sets the initial setting data (8 bits) for the digit number setting unit 175 of the payout rate/discharging ball number driver 153c, and the initial setting data (8 bits) for the digit number setting unit 175 of the winning ratio driver 153b. Bit), and initial setting data (8 bits) for the digit number setting unit 175 of the batch driver 153a are transmitted in the form of being included in the command (48 bits), and the duty ratio of the ball output rate/discharge ball number driver 153c is set. Initial setting data (digits) c (8 bits) for the unit 176, initial setting data (digits) b (8 bits) for the duty ratio setting driver 153b, for the duty setting unit 176 of the collective driver 153a Initial setting data (digit) a(8
It is transmitted in the order of bits) included in the command (48 bits).

The gaming microcomputer 111 outputs a latch signal every time it transmits an initial setting command (48 bits). The gaming microcomputer 111 outputs a latch signal when transmitting the final bit of the initial setting command. As a result, the number-of-digits setting unit 1 of the payout rate/discharging ball number driver 153c
The initial setting data (digit) c is stored in 75. At the same time, by the latch signal, the initial setting data (digit) b is stored in the digit number setting unit 175 of the combination ratio driver 153b. At the same time, the latch signal causes the digit number setting unit 175 of the batch driver 153a to store the initial setting data (digit) a.

Then, in accordance with the next latch signal, the initial setting data (du)c is stored in the duty setting section 176 of the driver 153c for ball output rate/ball discharge number. At the same time, the initial setting data (du)b is stored in the duty setting section 176 of the driver for duty ratio 153b by the latch signal. At the same time, the latch signal causes the duty setting unit 176 of the batch driver 153a to store the initial setting data (du) a.

[Initial setting processing of the ball output rate/number of discharged balls driver, role ratio driver, and batch driver]
The LED driver initial setting process according to the second modification of the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 86. FIG. 86 is a package driver, role ratio driver according to the second modification of the sixth embodiment,
It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the initial setting process of the driver for a ball output rate / discharge ball number.

The gaming microcomputer 111 first sets the number-of-digits setting unit 17 of the payout rate/discharge ball number driver 153c.
Initialization command (digit) c (8 bits) including the number of used digits of 5 (8
Digit) c (16 bits) is generated (A15006), and initial setting command (digit) including initial setting data (digit) b (8 bits) relating to the number of used digits of the digit number setting unit 175 of the ratio driver 153b. ) B (16 bits) is generated (A15007), and initial setting command (digit) a including initial setting data (digit) a (8 bits) related to the number of used digits of the digit number setting unit 175 of the batch driver 153a. (16 bits) is generated (A15008), the initial setting command (digit) c,
The initial setting command (digit) b and the initial setting command (digit) a are linked in this order, and the initial setting command (digit) c, b, a (48 bits) is written in the transmission buffer of the serial communication circuit and transmitted together with the clock signal. (A15010).

Next, the game microcomputer 111 sets an initial setting command (du) c including initial setting data (du) c relating to the duty ratio of the duty setting section 176 of the ball output rate/discharge ball number driver 153c.
Du) c (16 bits) is generated (A15011), and initial setting command (du) b (16 bits) including initial setting data (du) b relating to the duty ratio of the duty setting unit 176 of the driver 153b for the ratio combination is generated. (A15012), an initial setting command (du) a (16 bits) including initial setting data (du) a relating to the duty ratio of the duty setting unit 176 of the batch driver 153a is generated (A15013), and An initial setting command (du) c, b, a (48 bits), which is a combination of a setting command (du) c, an initial setting command (du) b, and an initial setting command (du) a, is transmitted in the same manner as described above (A15015).
).

[LED command transmission timing chart according to the second modification]
FIG. 87 is a collective driver, a ratio driver, and a second modification of the sixth embodiment.
It is a timing chart showing an LED command sent to a driver for a winning rate/number of discharged balls. Here, the character code stored in the driver 153b for winning ratio is the character ratio display data (digit 0-digit 3), and the character code stored in the driver 153c for winning rate/discharging balls is discharging. It is ball number display data (digit 0, digit 1) or ball output rate display data (digit 2, digit 3). Further, lighting pattern data (digit 0 to digit 3) (hereinafter referred to as "lighting data") is stored in the collective driver 153a. In FIG. 87, the LED command is shown with the address part (8 bits) omitted.

The gaming microcomputer 111 uses the 8-bit latch 16 of the ball output rate/ball discharge number driver 153c.
Character code (digit 0) c (8 bits) stored in 7a, 8 in the ratio driver 153b
A character code (digit 0)b (8 bits) stored in the bit latch 167a, and lighting data (digit 0)a (8 bits) stored in the 8-bit latch 167a of the batch driver 153a are LED commands (digit 0). ) C, b, a (48 bits) are generated and transmitted in the form of inclusion, and then the character code (digit 1) c (digit 1) c (stored in the 8-bit latch 167b of the ball output rate/discharge ball number driver 153c) 8-bit), 8-bit latch 1 of the ratio driver 153b
The character code (digit 1)b (8 bits) stored in 67b and the lighting data (digit 1)a (8 bits) stored in the 8-bit latch 167b of the batch driver 153a are sequentially stored in the order of L.
ED command (digit 1) c, b, a (48 bits) is generated and transmitted.

Here, the gaming microcomputer 111 outputs a latch signal each time an LED command (48 bits) is transmitted. The gaming microcomputer 111 outputs a latch signal when transmitting the last bit of the LED command. As a result, the discharge ball number display data (digit 0)c is stored in the 8-bit latch 167a of the ball output rate/discharge ball number driver 153c. At the same time, the latch signal causes the 8-bit latch 167b of the duty ratio driver 153b to display the duty ratio display data (
The digit 0)b is stored. At the same time, the batch signal 153a is generated by the latch signal.
The lighting data (digit 0)a is stored in the 8-bit latch 167a.

Then, according to the next latch signal, the discharge ball number display data (digit 1)c is stored in the 8-bit latch 167b of the ball output rate/discharge ball number driver 153c. At the same time, the latch signal causes the 8-bit latch 167b of the duty ratio driver 153b to display the duty ratio display data (digit 1).
) B is stored. Further, at the same time, the latch signal causes the batch driver 153a to output 8
Lighting data (digit 1) a is stored in the bit latch 167b.

Although not shown in FIG. 87, the game microcomputer 111 thereafter stores a character code (digit 2) c stored in the 8-bit latch 167c of the ball output rate/discharge ball number driver 153c.
(8 bits), a character code (digit 2) b (8 bits) stored in the 8-bit latch 167c of the driver 153b for the ratio, and lighting data (digit 2) a (digit 2) stored in the 8-bit latch 167c of the batch driver 153a. These are LED commands (digit 2) c, b in the order of 8 bits.
, A (48 bits), and generate and send it.
The character code (digit 3) c (8 bits) stored in the 8-bit latch 167d of 53c,
Character code (digit 3) stored in the 8-bit latch 167d of the driver 153b
b (8 bits), lighting data (digit 3) a (8 bits) to be stored in the 8-bit latch 167d of the batch driver 153a are included in the LED command (digit 3) c, b, a (48 bits) in this order. It is generated in the form of a letter and sent.

Therefore, in accordance with the next latch signal, the payout rate display data (digit 2)c is stored in the 8-bit latch 167c of the driver 153c for payout rate/number of discharged balls. At the same time, the ratio driver 1
The accessory ratio display data (digit 2)b is stored in the 8-bit latch 167c of 53b. At the same time, the latch signal causes the 8-bit latch 167c of the collective driver 153a to store the lighting data (digit 2)a.

Further, in accordance with the next latch signal, the output rate display data (digit 3)c is stored in the 8-bit latch 167d of the output rate/number of discharged balls driver 153c. At the same time, the latch ratio signal causes the 8-bit latch 167d of the driver 153b for role ratio to display the role ratio display data (digit 3).
b is stored. At the same time, lighting data (digit 3) a is stored in the 8-bit latch 167d of the collective driver 153a by the latch signal.

[LED data transmission process according to second modification]
The LED driver transmission processing according to the second modification of the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 88. FIG. 88 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the LED data transmission process according to the second modification of the sixth embodiment.

First, the gaming microcomputer 111 firstly outputs an LED command (digit 0)c(digit 0)c(digit 0)c(8 bits) c(8 bits) stored in the 8-bit latch 167a of the ball discharge rate/ball discharge number driver 153c. 16 bits) is generated (A16002), and an LED command (digit 0)b including the accessory ratio display data (digit 0)b stored in the 8-bit latch 176a of the driver 153b for role ratio is generated (A16003). 8-bit latch 176 of batch driver 153a
An LED command (digit 0) a including a lighting code (digit 0) a (display data of LED of Toku-zu 1) stored in a is generated (A16004). And LED command (digit 0) c, LE
The LED command (digit 0) c, b, a (48 bits), which is a combination of the D command (digit 0) b and the LED command (digit 0) a, is written in the transmission buffer of the serial communication circuit and transmitted together with the clock signal. (A16007).

The gaming microcomputer 111 uses the 8-bit latch 16 of the ball output rate/ball discharge number driver 153c.
LED command (including digit 1) c (8 bits) stored in 7b
The digit 1) c (16 bits) is generated (A16008), and the LED command (digit 1) b including the accessory ratio display data (digit 1) b stored in the 8-bit latch 176b of the driver 153b for duty ratio is generated. Then, (A16009), an LED command (digit 1) a including a lighting code (digit 1)a (display data of LED of FIG. 2) stored in the 8-bit latch 176b of the batch driver 153a is generated (A16010). The LED command (digit 1) c, the LED command (digit 1) b, and the LED command (digit 1) a are connected in this order.
c, b, and a (48 bits) are transmitted in the same manner as described above (A16013).

The gaming microcomputer 111 uses the 8-bit latch 16 of the ball output rate/ball discharge number driver 153c.
The LED command (digit 2)c (16 bits) including the output rate display data (digit 2)c (8 bits) to be stored in 7c is generated (A16014), and is stored in the 8-bit latch 176c of the driver 153b for role ratio. LED command (digit 2) that includes the accessory character display data (digit 2) b to be stored
)B is generated (A16015), and the LED command (digit 2) including the lighting code (digit 2) a (regular figure/round/first game state display data) stored in the 8-bit latch 176c of the batch driver 153a is generated. ) A is generated (A16016). And LED command (digit 2
) C, the LED command (digit 2) b, and the LED command (digit 2) a connected in this order, the LED command (digit 2) c, b, a (48 bits) is transmitted in the same manner as described above (A16019).

The gaming microcomputer 111 uses the 8-bit latch 16 of the ball output rate/ball discharge number driver 153c.
The LED command (digit 3)c (16 bits) including the output rate display data (digit 3)c (8 bits) to be stored in 7d is generated (A16020), and is stored in the 8-bit latch 176d of the driver 153b for role ratio. LED command (digit 3) including the accessory character display data (digit 3) b to be stored
)B is generated (A16021), and the LE including the lighting code (digit 3)a (display data of hold/second and third gaming states) stored in the 8-bit latch 176d of the batch driver 153a is included.
The D command (digit 3) a is generated (A16022). And LED command (digit 3) c
, LED command (digit 3)b and LED command (digit 3)a are connected in this order, and LED command (digit 3)c, b, a (48 bits) is transmitted in the same manner as described above (A16025).

[Operation/Effect of Sixth Embodiment]
According to the sixth embodiment, the gaming machine 10 includes a game control program storage means (ROM 111b) for storing a game control program (invariant information (program) for game control), and a game control program (for game control). Arithmetic processing means (gaming microcomputer 111) for performing predetermined arithmetic processing based on invariant information (program), and arithmetic processing means (gaming microcomputer 111)
), and a drive unit (LED driver 153) for driving the light emitting unit (characteristics ratio display unit 68) based on the drive data (LED command) output by (1). Driving means (LED
The driver 153) is provided with a setting unit (digit number setting unit 175, duty setting unit 176) for setting the light emitting mode in the light emitting unit (role ratio display unit 68), and the game control program,
A main process (A1001) for controlling the progress of the game and a main process (A10) at predetermined time intervals.
01-) interrupt processing (A1301) which is executed by interruption, and the arithmetic processing means (gaming microcomputer 111), in the interrupt processing (A1301), the setting unit (digit number setting unit 175, duty setting). Unit 176) initializing data for initializing (at least one of the plurality of setting units) is transmitted to the driving unit (LED driver 153) (A15001), and then the driving data (LED command) is transmitted to the driving unit (LED). It is transmitted to the driver 153).

As a result, even if the set value of the LED driver 153 (driving unit) becomes an indefinite value due to noise or the like after the main processing, the LED driver 153 can be normally restored in the interrupt processing, and the correct set value can be obtained. After that, it becomes possible to output the driving data (LED command), and it is possible to avoid extinguishing the state display device 152 (and the collective display device 50) due to noise or the like.

In the interrupt process (A1301), after transmitting the driving data (LED command) to the driving unit (LED driver 153), at least one of the plurality of setting units (digit number setting unit 175, duty setting unit 176) is selected. The initial setting data for initializing the
A configuration for transmitting to the ED driver 153) is also possible. In this case, in order to transmit the driving data in the next interrupt processing, the initial setting data is transmitted to the driving means in the current interrupt processing to initialize the setting unit.

That is, in the interrupt process (A1301), if the initialization data is transmitted to the drive means together with the drive data, the status display device 152 (and the collective display device) is independent of the transmission order of the drive data and the initialization data. It is possible to avoid the extinction caused by noise and the like in 50).

Further, according to the sixth embodiment, the arithmetic processing means (game microcomputer 111) can also send the initial setting data to the driving means (LED driver 153) in the main processing (A1001). As a result, it is possible to prevent the state display device 152 from being turned off even before interrupt processing is entered.

Further, according to the sixth embodiment, the setting unit (digit number setting unit 175, duty setting unit 176).
Is a digit number setting unit 175 that sets the number of light emitting elements (display 900) that emit light in the light emitting unit (characteristics ratio display unit 68), and a duty setting unit that sets the duty ratio of the light emitting elements (display 900). 176, and.

As a result, even if the set value of the LED driver 153 (driving means) becomes an indefinite value due to noise or the like, after setting the correct set value (the number of light emitting elements and their duty ratio (emission intensity, brightness)) It becomes possible to output drive data (LED command), and it is possible to avoid turning off the status display device 152 (and the collective display device 50) due to noise or the like.

According to the sixth embodiment, the light emitting unit is the accessory ratio display unit 68 that displays the accessory ratio. As a result, the accessory ratio display section 68 can be displayed reliably according to the game control program even after the main processing.

The present invention is not limited to the embodiments described above, and various modifications and changes can be made within the scope of the technical idea thereof, and it is obvious that they are also included in the technical scope of the present invention. Is. For example, it is possible to combine a plurality of embodiments. Further, for example, the present invention can be applied to other types of gaming machines (slot machines, etc.). The scope of the present invention is shown by the claims, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope of equivalents of the claims.

10 Gaming Machine 12 Front Frame (Game Frame)
25 Production Button 30 Game Board 32 Game Area 36 First Start Winning Port (First Start Winning Area)
37 Ordinary variation prize winning device (second starting prize area)
39 special variation winning device 40 center case 41 display device 42 setting change device 44 board production device 44a, 44b internal accessory (inner movable member)
46 board decoration device 50 collective display device (LED)
80 lamp display device 93 setting key switch 95a external accessory (outer movable member)
102 set value change switch 143 probability set value display device 150 driver 152 status display device 153 LED driver 100 game control device (main board)
200 payout control device 300 production control device (sub-board)
400 power supply device 630 hold display section 640 hold digestion area 640A start memory display background 641 effect display area

Claims (2)

A display device capable of displaying a variable display game based on a plurality of pieces of identification information based on establishment of a start condition, and when the result of the variable display game is a special result, a special game state advantageous for a player can be generated. In amusement machines,
Start storage means capable of storing a start memory that is the right to execute the variable display game based on the satisfaction of the start condition;
A start memory display control means capable of executing control for displaying a start memory display corresponding to the start memory in a start memory display area displayed in the display device with priority over the variable display game,
The starting memory display control means,
A starting memory display background is displayed in a first display mode on the back surface of the starting memory display so as to overlap with the starting memory display in the starting memory display area,
A gaming machine, wherein the starting memory display background can be switched to a second display mode different from the first display mode based on the establishment of a predetermined condition. In the effect display area that is displayed with priority over the variable display game on the display device,
Further comprising effect control means capable of executing control for displaying an effect relating to the variable display game,
The effect control means,
Displaying the effect in the first display mode in the effect display area,
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the effect can be switched to the second display mode based on establishment of a predetermined condition.

Images